Communication and Media

Transcription

Routledge
Communication
and Media
New Titles and Key Backlist 2012
www.routledge.com/media • www.routledge.com/communication
Welcome!
Thank you for your interest in communication, media and cultural studies
titles from Routledge. For 2012, we are excited to offer you a diverse list of
books, ranging from undergraduate and graduate textbooks, to edited
collections, to handbooks and scholarly monographs. This range reflects
Routledge’s commitment to publishing for all levels of the academic
community.
If you’re looking for textbooks, take a look at our course guide on p. 2.
Note that all Routledge textbooks are available for examination, as either print
or e-inspection copies. Watch the textbook listings for the Companion
Website notation; these sites provide additional materials for students and
teaching resources for instructors, enhancing the functionality of the textbook
and serving as invaluable tools for instruction. For instructors in the United
States, we have many textbooks available for e-review on CourseSmart
(www.coursesmart.com).
In addition to the new and forthcoming titles featured here, our online catalogue
provides a comprehensive listing of our backlist titles in communication, media
and related areas, cultural studies, and journalism, including descriptions, full
tables of contents, and additional information. Take a look at www.routledge.
com/resources/catalogs/communication_media_catalogue_2012. Our
website, www.routledge.com, also includes titles from disciplines throughout
the humanities, social sciences, and behavioural sciences.
Finally, our innovative program of cutting-edge research books deserved a
livery to match, so we are delighted to unveil our new Routledge Research
cover design. Take a look at the new cover in effect below.
We welcome your feedback on our publishing program, so please feel free to
get in touch – we look forward to hearing from you.
Linda Bathgate Natalie Foster Erica Wetter Aileen Storry
Senior Editor
Senior Editor Associate Editor
Publisher
www.routledge.com/communication
www.routledge.com/media
Welcome to Routledge
New Titles and Key Backlist 2011
Page 19
Page 28
Page 30
Page 50
Page 62
Page 75
contents
Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Persuasion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Music, Sound and Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Interpersonal Communication. . . . . . . . . . . 4
Media Law. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Family Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Media Management/Economics . . . . . . . . 49
Health Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
JOURNALISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Organizational Communication . . . . . . . . . 6
Interviewing and Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Political Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
News and Media Writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Instructional Communication . . . . . . . . . . 10
Visual Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
PUBLISHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Page 79
Page 79
Considering books
for course use?
This symbol shows books that are
available as complimentary exam copies
for lecturers or faculty considering them
for course adoption. To obtain your copy
visit the URL listed beneath the title in the
catalog and select your choice of print or
electronic copy. Visit www.routledge.com
or in the US you can call 1-800-634-7064.
This symbol shows books that are available
as electronic inspection copies only.
Rhetoric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
FILM STUDIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Public Relations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
American Film. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Advertising. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
British Film. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
The Easy Way to Order
Communication Theory
and Research . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
World Cinema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Ordering online is fast and efficient, simply
follow the on-screen instructions. Alternatively,
you can call, fax, or see order form at the back
of this catalog.
Communication and Language. . . . . . . . . 21
MEDIA STUDIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Global Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Media and Society . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Genre. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
TELEVISION STUDIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
CULTURAL STUDIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
SPECIAL ISSUES AS BOOKS. . . . . . . . . . 84
Media Ethics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
PAPERBACKS DIRECT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Media Effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
New Media and Cyberculture. . . . . . . . . . 40
Order Form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
UK and Rest of World
Call: +44 (0)1235 400524
Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699
US, Canada and Latin America
Call: 1-800-634-7064
Fax: 1-800-248-4724
eUpdates
Contacts
uk and rest of world
us, canada and latin america
Marketing:
Marketing:
Carla Hepburn – Senior Marketing Executive
Paul Myatovich – Senior Marketing Manager
Email: [email protected]
Christina Stead – Senior Marketing Coordinator
Julia Sammaritano – Marketing Assistant
Editorial:
Editorial:
Natalie Foster – Senior Editor
Linda Bathgate – Publisher
Aileen Storry – Associate Editor
Erica Wetter – Senior Editor
Prices, publication dates and content are correct at time of going to press, but may be subject to change without notice.
Register your email address at
www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates to receive
information on books, journals and other news
within your area of interest.
Trade Customers’ Representatives,
Agents and Distribution
For a complete list, visit:
www.routledge.com/representatives.
eBooks
There are over 23,000 eBooks available across the
humanities, social sciences, behavioural sciences,
built environment, STM and law from some of
the world’s leading imprints for individual and
institutional purchase.
c o u rse gu ide
2
course guide
This quick reference grid highlights just a few of the textbooks that we offer, and the relevant courses they can be used for.
If you would like information on our textbooks for any specific course you may teach, please contact us – our full details are
on the contents page.
Advertising
Media Law
Advertising: Its Business, Culture and Careers
17
Media Law and Ethics, 4E
48
Advertising, the Media and Globalization
17
Media and Entertainment Law
49
Advertising Theory
17
Advertising and Public Relations Law, 2E
18
Media Planning
The Advertising and Consumer Culture Reader
18
The Media Handbook
The Media Handbook
18
Communication research
Communication Research Measures II
19
Conflict
Stategic Conflict
4
Crisis Communication
Crisis Communications, 4E
13
Crisis Communications Student Workbook, 4E
13
The Crisis Manager, 2E
12
Cultural Studies
18
Media Studies
The Media Student’s Book
22
New Media: A Critical Introduction
40
A Handbook of Media and Communications Research
23
Global Media: A Critical Introduction
30
The Gender and Media Reader
25
Net Works
43
Media and Religion
36
The Media Studies Reader
24
Media Writing
Magazine Writing
60
MediaWriting, 4E
59
That’s the Joint! 2E
79
Professional Feature Writing, 5E
60
Critical Approaches to Comics
79
Reporting Disaster on Deadline
57
Film Studies
Newswriting and reporting
An Introduction to Film Studies, 5E
62
Show Me the Money
57
Movie History: A Survey
62
The Business of Sports
57
The Classical Hollywood Reader
69
The International Film Business
66
Organizational Communication
Film Theory: An Introduction Through the Senses
67
The Situated Organization
International Communication
7
Persuasion
International Communication: A Reader
32
The Dynamics of Persuasion, 4E
3
Mediating the Message, 3E
23
Persuasion in Society, 2E
3
Introduction to Media
Media Today, 4E
Political Communication
22
Journalism Studies
An Introduction to Political Communication
8
Making Sense of Media and Politics
9
Journalism Studies: A Critical Introduction
50
Public Relations & Corporate Communication
The Routledge Companion to News and Journalism
51
Reputation Management, 2E
12
Principles of American Journalism
56
The Public Relations Handbook, 4E
15
Key Readings in Journalism
52
Practising Convergence Journalism
56
Public relations cases
American Journalism History Reader
54
Applied Public Relations, 2E
16
Multimedia Journalism
50
Cases in Public Relations Management
16
Magazines: A Guide to Critical Practice
51
Media Economics
The Media Economy
49
Public Relations Campaigns
Strategic Planning for Public Relations, 3E
13
The Public Relations Strategic Toolkit
14
Public relations writing
Media Effects/ Media Psychology
Media Effects
39
Becoming a Public Relations Writer, 4E
15
A Cognitive Psychology of Mass Communication, 5E
33
Public Relations Writing Worktext
17
Media Effects in Society, 2E
39
Mixed Media
39
Media Ethics
Doing Ethics in Media
38
Controversies in Media Ethics
38
Publishing
An Introduction to Book History
61
Television Studies
An Introduction to Television Studies
75
Television, 4E
75
Video Games
Understanding Video Games, 2E
Complimentary Exam Copy
e-InspectionNew in Paperback
45
Companion Website
Pe r s uas i o n
Persuasion
Persuasion in Society
NEW in
2011
2nd Edition
Herbert W. Simons, Temple University, USA and Jean G. Jones, Edinboro University, USA
Persuasion in Society introduces readers to the rich tapestry of persuasive technique and scholarship, interweaving rhetorical, critical theory, and social science
traditions. This text examines current and classical theory through the lens of contemporary culture, encouraging readers to explore the nature of persuasion and
to understand its impact in their lives. Employing a contemporary approach, authors Herbert W. Simons and Jean G. Jones draw from popular culture, mass
media, and social media to help readers become informed creators and consumers of persuasive messages.
This introductory persuasion text offers:
•a broad-based approach to the scope of persuasion, expanding students’ understanding of what persuasion is and how it is effected
•insights on the diversity of persuasion in action, through such contexts as advertising, marketing, political campaigns, activism and social movements, and negotiation in social conflicts
•the inclusion of ’sender’ and ’receiver’ perspectives, enhancing understanding of persuasion in practice
•extended treatment of the ethics of persuasion, featuring opposing views on handling controversial issues in the college classroom for enhanced instruction
•case studies showing how and why people fall for persuasive messages, demonstrating how persuasion works at a cognitive level.
Highlights of this second edition include:
•an extensively revised approach, written with the needs of today’s undergraduate students in mind
•contemporary examples, selected for relevance, currency, and appeal
•updated discussions of theory and research, including cognitive psychology and neuroscience
•current illustrations from advertising, politics, social movements, propaganda, and other sources.
To reinforce the topics covered in each chapter, discussion questions, exercises, and key terms are included. Additional resources are available on the Companion Website
(www.routledge.com/textbooks/simons), along with materials for instructors, including supplements for lectures and sample exam questions.
Selected Contents: Part I: Understanding Persuasion The Study of Persuasion The Psychology of Persuasion: Basic Concepts and Principles Persuasion Broadly Considered Part 2: The Coactive
Approach Coactive Persuasion Resources of Communication Framing and Reframing: The Coactive Approach Cognitive Shorthands Reasoning and Evidence Part 3. Context for Persuasion
Going Public: Delivering a Presentation that Persuades Persuasive Campaigns Staging Political Campaigns Analyzing Product Advertising Talking Through Differences Leading Social Movements
More About Ethics
March 2011: 584pp • Hb: 978-0-415-96513-2: £140.00 • Pb: 978-0-415-96514-9: £49.99 • eBook: 978-0-203-93303-9
For more information, visit: www.routledge.com/9780415965149
4th Edition
The Dynamics of Persuasion
Communication and Attitudes in the Twenty-First Century
Richard M. Perloff, Cleveland State University, USA
Series: Routledge Communication Series
The Dynamics of Persuasion provides a comprehensive and up-to-date introduction to persuasive communication and attitude change. Offering a
thorough discussion of classic and contemporary theories of persuasion, this text explores the structure and functions of attitudes, consistency between
attitude and behavior, and issues in attitude measurement.
Examining persuasion through media, interpersonal, and psychological lenses, author Richard M. Perloff systematically investigates the impact of
persuasive communication on attitudes toward a variety of topics, including health, politics, and racial prejudice. In addition to presenting persuasion
theory and research, he provides numerous examples of persuasion in action, demonstrating the role of persuasion research in everyday life. Written in a
highly accessible and clear style, The Dynamics of Persuasion serves to:
•introduce the social science perspective on persuasion
•enhance understanding of persuasion theories and research
•highlight the major issues discussed in the field of persuasion research
•explore the complexities and subtleties in the dynamics of everyday persuasion
•raise awareness about the ethics of contemporary persuasion.
New to this edition are:
•2008 election examples interspersed throughout the text
•focused discussions on compliance-gaining and negative advertising
•examples of strong attitude, such as the pros and cons of using animals in research.
Complimented by a Companion Website (www.routledge.com/textbooks/dynamicsofpersuasion4e) with resources for students and instructors, The Dynamics of Persuasion
is an engaging text appropriate for advanced courses on persuasion in communication, psychology, marketing, and sociology. In its exploration of the dynamics of persuasive
communication, it illuminates the powerful effects persuasion has in contemporary society and enhances understanding of this ubiquitous communicative strategy.
Selected Contents: Part 1: Foundations Introduction to Persuasion Attitudes: Definition and Structure Attitudes: Functions and Consequences Attitude Measurement Part 2: Changing
Attitudes and Behavior Processing Persuasive Communications ’Who Says It’: Source Factors in Persuasion Message Factors Personality and Persuasion Cognitive Dissonance Theory
Interpersonal Persuasion Part 3: Persuasion in American Society Advertising Communication Campaigns
2010: 448pp • Hb: 978-0-415-80567-4: £95.00 • Pb: 978-0-415-80568-1: £39.99 • eBook: 978-0-203-87032-7
Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/communication
3
i n t er p erson al co mm un i cation
4
Interpersonal
Communication
NEW
The Life of Voices
Bodies, Subjects and Dialogue
B. Hannah Rockwell, Loyola University Chicago, USA
New in 2012
Managing Interpersonal
Conflict
Advances through Meta-Analysis
Edited by Nancy Burrell and Mike Allen, both at
University of Wisconsin - Milwaukee, USA,
Barbara Mae Gayle, Saint Martin’s University, USA
and Raymond W. Preiss, University of Puget Sound,
USA
Managing Interpersonal Conflict is a systematic review of
published conflict research in legal, institutional and
relational contexts. Each chapter represents a summary
of the existing quantitative social science research using
meta-analysis. This volume provides a unique and
valuable resource for teaching conflict, mediation,
negotiation and facilitation courses; for implementing
and planning training programs, designing interventions,
creating workshops; and for scholarly work.
As a unique informational resource, this book provides
important and essential answers to key research
questions. The chapters provide connections between
cutting-edge scholarship about abstract theoretical
arguments, the needs of instructional and training
pedagogy and practical application of information.
August 2012: 424pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99917-5: £95.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99918-2: £33.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14904-1
For more information, visit:
www.routledge.com/9780415999182
The Life of Voices illustrates
how human voices have special
significance as the place where
mind and body collaborate to
produce everyday speech.
Hannah Rockwell links Russian
semiotician Mikhail Bakhtin’s
philosophy of dialogue with
French phenomenologist
Maurice Merleau-Ponty’s views
of the relation between bodies
and speech expression to
develop a unique theory of
communication and bodies. By introducing readers to
actual human subjects speaking about how their
identities have been shaped and transformed through
time, the author explores how discourses reproduce
ideology and social power relations. Readers are
challenged to consider complex influences between
human subjects and institutionalized discourses through
critical-interpretive analyses of transcribed speech.
The Life of Voices has an interdisciplinary flair grounded
in careful research. Scholars in communication,
sociology, philosophy, psychology, linguistics,
anthropology, gender studies and identity politics will
find valuable insights, methods and examples in this
work. It is essential reading for anyone who is interested
in discourse studies and the body’s relationship to speech
or human identity formation.
April 2011: 136pp
Hb: 978-0-8058-2191-8: £46.00
eBook: 978-0-203-81889-3
The Dark Side of Close
Relationships II
Edited by William R. Cupach, Illinois State
University, USA and Brian H. Spitzberg, San Diego
State University, USA
The Dark Side of Close Relationships II sheds light on the
paradoxical, dialectical, and mystifying facets of human
interaction, not merely to elucidate dysfunctional
relationship phenomena, but to help readers explore and
understand it in relation to a broader understanding
about relationships. A unique and provocative collection,
this volume will appeal to relationship researchers in
communication, social psychology, family studies, and
sociology.
2010: 472pp
Hb: 978-0-415-80457-8: £95.00
Pb: 978-0-415-80458-5: £42.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87437-0
The Interplay of Truth and
Deception
New Agendas in Theory and Research
Edited by Matthew S. McGlone and Mark L.
Knapp, both at University of Texas at Austin, USA
Series: New Agendas in Communication Series
2009: 216pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99566-5: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99567-2: £24.95
eBook: 978-0-203-88785-1
Uncertainty, Information
Management, and Disclosure
Decisions
New in 2012
Arguments, Aggression, and
Conflict
Strategic Conflict
New Directions in Theory and Research
Theories and Applications
Daniel J. Canary, Arizona State University, USA and
Sandra Lakey, Pennsylvania College of Technology,
USA
Edited by Theodore Avtgis, West Virginia
University, USA and Andrew S. Rancer, University
of Akron, USA
Edited by Tamara Afifi and Walid Afifi, both at
University of California at Santa Barbara, USA
Arguments, Aggression, and Conflict: New Directions in
Theory and Research provides a thorough examination
of argumentative and aggressive communication. Editors
Theodore Avtgis and Andrew S. Rancer bring together a
score of prolific and informed authors to discuss aspects
of the conceptualization and measurement of aggressive
communication.
This text offers a research-based, accessible analysis of
how people can manage conflict productively. Moving
beyond the basics of conflict, it examines interpersonal
situations in which conflict occurs and promotes
strategic communicative responses, based on
communication research. Daniel J. Canary and his
colleagues base the principles for conflict management
on the latest theoretical research, and add personal
observations, media examples, and samples of actual
interaction to provide concrete illustrations of the
research findings. It provides students with the tools to
understand conflict in real-world contexts.
2009: 448pp
Hb: 978-0-415-96515-6: £87.00
Pb: 978-0-415-96516-3: £32.99
eBook: 978-0-203-93304-6
2010: 448pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99639-6: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99641-9: £32.99
eBook: 978-0-203-85542-3
February 2012: 288pp
Hb: 978-0-8058-5063-5: £40.99
Pb: 978-0-8058-5064-2: £18.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14874-7
Companion Website
health communication
fa m i ly c o mm u n i cation
Family
Communication
New in 2012
2nd Edition
Routledge Handbook of Family
Communication
Edited by Anita L. Vangelisti, University of Texas at
Austin, USA
With a synthesis of research on issues key to
understanding family interaction, as well as an analysis
of many theoretical and methodological choices made
by researchers studying family communication, this
second edition serves to advance the field by reframing
old questions and stimulating new ones. The wellknown contributors approach family interaction from a
variety of theoretical perspectives, and focus on topics
ranging from the influence of structural characteristics
on family relationships to the importance of specific
communication processes.
June 2012: 500pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88198-2: £140.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88197-5: £60.00
Parents and Children
Communicating with Society
Managing Relationships Outside of the
Home
Edited by Thomas J. Socha, Old Dominion
University, Virginia Beach, USA and Glen Stamp,
Ball State University, USA
The volume opens a new
frontier in parent-child
communication research as it
brings together veteran
researchers and newcomers to
explore the communication of
parents and children as they
create relationships outside the
family. The chapters herein
examine communication
processes and problems of
parents and children as they
interact with childcare,
healthcare, education, and youth sports; investigate the
unique challenges facing various types of families as they
communicate outside the family (e.g. stepfamilies and
gay/lesbian/bisexual families); and consider the role of
media in family relationships outside of home.
2009: 400pp
Hb: 978-0-415-96487-6: £78.00
Pb: 978-0-415-96488-3: £27.99
eBook: 978-0-203-93860-7
Health
Communication
New in 2012
eHealth Applications
Promising Strategies for Behavior Change
Edited by Seth M. Noar, University of North
Carolina at Chapel Hill, USA and Nancy Harrington,
University of Kentucky, USA
This volume delves into the use of interactive
communication applications to promote health behavior
change. Providing a timely and comprehensive review of
current tools for health communication, eHealth
Applications is a must-read for scholars, students and
researchers in health communication, public health, and
health education.
April 2012: 304pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88817-2: £95.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88818-9: £32.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14909-6
New in 2012
New
Exploring Health
Communication
2nd Edition
Language in Action
Family Communication
Kevin Harvey and Nelya Koteyko, University of
Nottingham, UK
Chris Segrin, University of Arizona, USA and
Jeanne Flora, New Mexico State University, USA
Family Communication carefully
examines state-of-the-art
research and theories of family
communication and family
relationships. In addition to
presenting cutting-edge
research, it focuses on classic
theories and research findings
that have influenced and
revolutionized the way scholars
conceptualize family interaction.
This text offers a thorough and
up-to-date presentation of
scientific research in family communication for both
teachers and students of family communication as well
as professionals who work with families.
A Companion Website provides chapter outlines, exam
questions, and PowerPoint slides for students and
instructors. Undergraduate readers should find the
information easy to understand, while advanced readers,
such as graduate students and professionals, will find it
a useful reference to classic and contemporary research
on family communication and relationships.
www.routledge.com/cw/segrin
May 2011: 504pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87633-9: £140.00
Pb: 978-0-415-87634-6: £56.99
eBook: 978-0-203-85783-0
Series: Routledge Introductions to Applied Linguistics
Exploring Health Communication brings together many
of the various linguistic strands in health communication,
while maintaining an interdisciplinary focus on method
and theory.
It critically explores and discusses a number of underlying
themes that constitute the broad field of health
communication including spoken, written and electronic
health communication. The rise of the Internet has led to
an explosion of interactive online health resources which
have profoundly affected the way in which healthcare is
delivered, and with this, have brought about changes in
the relationship between provider and patient. This
textbook uses examples of real life health language data
throughout, in order to fully explore the topics covered.
Exploring Health Communication is essential reading for
postgraduate and upper undergraduate students of
applied linguistics and health communication.
April 2012: 288pp
Hb: 978-0-415-59721-0: £85.00
Pb: 978-0-415-59722-7: £22.99
5
or gan i z ati on al a n d
g roup co mm un i cat i o n
H ea lt h co mm un i cation
6
New in 2012
NEW
Health and Risk
Communication
2nd Edition
An Applied Linguistics Perspective
Rodney Jones, City University of Hong Kong
Health and Risk Communication provides a critical and
comprehensive overview of the core issues surrounding
health and risk communication, taken from the
perspective of various approaches in applied linguistics.
Incisive and innovative, it assesses the benefits and
limitations of these approaches whilst also positing a
new integrated framework for analysis.
Utilising data such as medical pamphlets and texts and
real world patient doctor interactions, this book will
address crucial questions including:
•What is the role of texts in influencing health
behaviour, and how are these texts put together and
interpreted by readers?
•How are meanings and actions around health and risk
negotiated in situated social interactions, and how are
they affected by contexts like power, social identities
and norms of interaction?
•How does communication about health and risk reflect
and reproduce broader ideologies and patterns of
power and inequality within societies?
Health and Risk Communication: An Applied Linguistic
Perspective will be essential reading for advanced students
and researchers studying and working in this area.
September 2012: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-67259-7: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-67260-3: £24.99
New
Bioethics, Public Moral
Argument, and Social
Responsibility
Edited by Nancy M.P. King and Michael J. Hyde,
both at Wake Forest University, USA
Series: Routledge Annals of Bioethics
Selected Contents: Preface Editors’ Introduction Part I:
Public Moral Argument and Social Responsibility
1. Arguing About Values: The Problem of Public Moral
Argument David Zarefsky 2. Bioethical Deliberation in a
Democracy Jonathan D. Moreno 3. Bioethics and the Law:
Using Moot Court as a Tool to Teach Effective Argumentation
Skills Christine Nero Coughlin, Tracey Banks Coan, and
Barbara Lentz Part II: Moral Relationships and
Responsibilities 4. Dignity Can Be a Useful Concept in
Bioethics Rebecca Dresser 5. Appeals to Human Nature in
Biomedical Ethics: Managing Our Legacies, Loyalties, and
Love of Champions Eric T. Juengst 6. In the Stars or In Our
Genes: The Languages of Fate and Moral Responsibility Larry
R. Churchill 7. Responsibility versus ’Blame’ in Health
Communication: Where to Draw the Lines in Romancing the
Gene Roxanne Parrott Part III: The Media, the Public, and
the Person 8. Media Misinformation and the Obesity
Epidemic: The Conflict Between Scientific Fact and Industry
Claims Stephen Giles and Marina Krcmar 9. How We Feel
With Metaphors for Genes: Implications for Understanding
Humans and Forming Genetic Policies Celeste M. Condit
10. An Investigative Bioethics Manifesto Carl Elliott 11. The
Question of ’The Public’, Christian O. Lundberg and Ross
Smith Afterword
August 2011: 192pp
Hb: 978-0-415-89855-3: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-63051-8
The Routledge Handbook of
Health Communication
Edited by Teresa L. Thompson, University of
Dayton, USA, Roxanne Parrott and Jon F.
Nussbaum, both at Pennsylvania State University,
USA
Health Communication brings
together the current body of
scholarly work in health
communication. With its
expansive scope, it offers an
introduction for those new to
this area, summarizes work for
those already learned in the
area, and suggests avenues for
future research on the
relationships between
communicative processes and health/health care delivery.
Arguably the most comprehensive scholarly resource
available for study in this area, The Routledge Handbook
of Health Communication serves an invaluable role and
reference for students, researchers, and scholars doing
work in health communication.
April 2011: 704pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88314-6: £150.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88315-3: £60.00
eBook: 978-0-203-84606-3
Communicating to Manage
Health and Illness
Edited by Dale E. Brashers, University of Illinois
Urbana-Champaign, USA and Daena Goldsmith,
Lewis and Clark University, USA
Communicating to Manage
Health and Illness is a valuable
resource for those in the field of
health and interpersonal
communication, public health,
medicine, and related health
disciplines. This scholarly edited
volume advances the theoretical
bases of health communication
in two key areas:
1) communication, identity, and
relationships; and 2) health care
provider patient interaction.
Chapters aim to underscore the theory that
communication processes are a link between personal,
social, cultural, and institutional factors and various
facets of health and illness. This book serves as an
excellent reference tool and is a substantial addition to
health communication literature.
2009: 360pp
Hb: 978-0-8058-4428-3: £90.00
Pb: 978-0-8058-4429-0: £27.99
eBook: 978-0-203-92918-6
Organizational
and Group
Communication
New in 2012
The Handbook of Intergroup
Communication
Edited by Howard Giles, University of California,
Santa Barbara, USA
Series: ICA Handbook Series
The Handbook of Intergroup Communication brings
together research, theory and application on traditional
as well as innovative intergroup situations, exploring the
communication aspect of these groups.
The volume is organized into four domains – crossdisciplinary approaches to intergroup study; types/
processes of communication between groups;
communication between specific group types; and arenas
in which intergroup communication takes place. Editor
Howard Giles worked with an internationally-based
advisory board to develop and review content, and the
contributors included here represent those scholars doing
innovative and well-regarded work around the globe.
The ’intergroup’ umbrella integrates and transcends
many traditional conceptual boundaries in
communication (including media, health, intercultural,
organizational); hence the Handbook will appeal to
scholars and graduate students not only in the core area
of intergroup communication itself, but across varying
terrains of study in communication and beyond,
including intergroup relations and social psychology.
May 2012: 544pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88964-3: £160.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88965-0: £56.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14862-4
New in 2012
Interaction and Influence in
Small Group Decision Making
Joseph Bonito, University of Arizona, USA
Interaction and Influence in Small Group Decision
Making examines the current literature on the role of
participation in small group outcomes. The book
addresses seminal small group research and traces its
legacy to current work, providing a context for the
assumptions and directions of today’s leading-edge
research. In addition to highlighting the contributions
made during small group discussion, the book draws on
work from important cognate areas including social
psychology, sociology, and business, offering an
interdisciplinary approach to the consideration of small
group discussion.
August 2012: 288pp
Hb: 978-0-415-80455-4: £50.00
Pb: 978-0-415-80456-1: £19.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87439-4
Companion Website
o r gan i z ati on al an d g rou p c omm un i cat i o n
New
The Situated Organization
Communicating and
Organizing in Context
Case Studies in the Pragmatics of
Communication Research
The Theory of Structurational Interaction
James R. Taylor and Elizabeth J. Van Every, both
at University of Montreal, Canada
Beth Bonniwell Haslett, University of Delaware, USA
The Situated Organization explores recent research in
organizational communication, emphasizing the
organization as constructed in and emerging out of
communication practices. Working from the tradition of
the Montreal School in its approach, it focuses not only
on how an organization’s members understand the
purposes of the organization through communication,
but also on how they realize and recognize the
organization itself as they work within it.
Communicating and Organizing
in Context integrates Giddens’
structuration theory with
Goffman’s interaction order and
develops a new theoretical
base, the theory of
structurational interaction, for
the analysis of communicating
and organizing. Both theorists
emphasize tacit knowledge,
social routines, context, social
practices, materiality, frames,
agency, and view
communication as constitutive of social life and of
organizing. Thus their integration in structurational
interaction provides a coherent, communication-centric
approach to analyzing communicating, organizing and
their interrelationships.
This book will be a valuable resource for students and
scholars as an orientation to the field of organizational
communication and as an integration of organizing and
communicating. It will also be useful for practitioners as
a tool for understanding how conceptual frames limit
possibilities and constitute the nature of organizing and
members’ participation in organizations.
August 2011: 448pp
Hb: 978-0-8058-3895-4: £55.00
eBook: 978-0-203-80937-2
New
Research Methods for Studying
Groups and Teams
A Guide to Approaches, Tools, and
Technologies
Edited by Andrea Hollingshead, University of
Southern California, USA and Marshall Scott Poole,
University of Illinois, USA
This volume provides an overview of the methodological
issues and challenges inherent in the study of small
groups from the perspective of seasoned researchers in
communication, psychology and other fields in the
behavioral and social sciences. It summarizes the current
state of group methods in a format that is readable,
insightful, and useful for both new and experienced
group researchers.
2010: 288pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88167-8: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88168-5: £27.99
eBook: 978-0-203-84807-4
Communication and
Organizational Knowledge
Contemporary Issues for Theory and
Practice
Edited by Heather E. Canary, University of Utah,
USA and Robert D. McPhee, Arizona State
University, USA
This book provides an overview of communicationcentered theory and research regarding organizational
knowledge and learning. It brings the work of scholars
in communication, management, information
technology, and other disciplines together in a coherent
volume that represents existing research and theory on
communication-related knowledge work.
2010: 344pp
Hb: 978-0-415-80403-5: £69.00
Pb: 978-0-415-80404-2: £27.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87450-9
Now
e
onlin
Communication and
Media Catalogue
We have introduced a number of
new functions to our easy to use
e-catalogue format which should
help you whilst browsing the latest
Routledge titles in Communication
and Media Studies.
Using the online catalogue
you can:
•save books to your personal booklist and email it to friends or colleagues or save as an Excel spreadsheet
•bring up the full details for every book, including blurbs, tables of contents, author bios and reviews
Destructive Organizational
Communication
•preview titles using the view inside function for many of our books
Processes, Consequences, and Constructive
Ways of Organizing
•request a complimentary exam copy for qualifying titles or recommend books to your librarian using the online forms.
Edited by Pamela Lutgen-Sandvik, University of
New Mexico, USA and Beverly Davenport Sypher,
Purdue University, USA
November 2011: 480pp
Hb: 978-0-415-80632-9: £85.00
Pb: 978-0-415-80633-6: £29.99
eBook: 978-0-203-80577-0
2009: 424pp
Hb: 978-0-415-98993-0: £95.00
Pb: 978-0-415-98994-7: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-92855-4
Simply visit:
www.routledge.com/resources/
catalogs/communication_media_
catalogue_2012.
7
p o lit i ca l comm un ication
8
Political Communication
New
5th Edition
An Introduction to
Political
Communication
Brian McNair, Queensland University of Technology, Australia
Series: Communication and Society
‘One of the main strengths of this book is that it is written in a highly accessible style. There is a good balance between academic theory and the more empirical
discussion of recent trends in contemporary political communication. The text also provides some valuable historical background on key developments, such as
the rise of TV.’
– Paul Smith, De Montfort University, UK
An Introduction to Political Communication introduces students to the complex relationship between politics, the media and
democracy in the United Kingdom, United States and other contemporary societies. Brian McNair examines how politicians, trade
unions, pressure groups, NGOs and terrorist organisations make use of the media.
Individual chapters look at political media and their effects, the work of political advertising, marketing and public relations, and
the communicative practices of organizations at all levels, from grass-root campaigning through to governments and
international bodies.
This fifth edition has been revised and updated to include:
• the 2008 US presidential election, and the early years of Barack Obama’s term
• the MPs’ expenses scandal in Britain, and the 2010 UK election campaign
• the growing role of bloggers and online pundits such as Guido Fawkes in the political agenda setting process
• the emergence of social media platforms such as Twitter, YouTube and Facebook, and their destabilising impact on the management of political crises all over the world, including the Iranian pro-reform protests of July 2009 and the Israeli attack on the anti-blockade flotilla of May 2010
• the growing power of Wikileaks and other online information sources to challenge state control of classified information.
March 2011: 256pp
Hb: 978-0-415-59643-5: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-59644-2: £19.99
eBook: 978-0-203-82869-4
New in 2012
New in 2012
New in 2012
Discourse and Democracy
Political Discourse Analysis
Visual Discourses of War
Michael Farrelly, University of Birmingham, UK
Norman Fairclough, Emeritus Professor, Lancaster
University, UK and Isabela Ietcu-Fairclough
A Multimodal Approach
Series: Routledge Critical Studies in Discourse
This critical examination of democracy in advanced liberal
nations combines close analysis of discourse with theories
of democracy and the State. Building on the work of
Fairclough, and others, the book analyses the paradox of
pervasive reference to democracy in legitimizing political
action versus the weakening of actual democratic practice.
March 2012: 192pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87235-5: £85.00
Adopting a critical discourse analysis approach with an
emphasis on the dialectical-relational aspect, the book is
divided into four sections, and begins by developing the
analytical framework, then moves on to look at concepts
and ideology. In a separate section a wide selection of
case studies are analysed, including political texts from a
variety of contexts and locations, with up-to-date
examples including the recent economic crisis. The
conclusion puts forward the authors’ view of the field of
political discourse analysis, moving towards their theory
of political discourse and a methodology for researching
it, and arguing for this approach against others.
Presented it in an accessible format, this exciting new
text is suitable for students and researchers in the fields
of politics and discourse analysis.
David Machin, Leicester University, UK and Gill
Abousnnouga, University of Glamorgan, UK
Series: Routledge Critical Studies in Discourse
This book is a multimodal critical discourse analysis of
visual discourses of war realized in different genres of
communication in Britain, the US, and Europe over the
last 150 years. It argues that while there has been
extensive work produced on the linguistic realization of
discourses of war, for example through the speeches of
politicians and official documents, there has been a lack
of attention to the way that these discourses are
disseminated visually through a range of genres of
communication. It argues that war and conflict are
legitimized not just in official speeches and news texts but
through toys, photography, news footage, computer war
games, war monuments, and sites of heritage tourism.
January 2012: 320pp
Hb: 978-0-415-49922-4: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-49923-1: £19.99
March 2012: 256pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88040-4: £80.00
Companion Website
p ol i ti cal c omm un i cat i o n
NEW
Making Sense of Media and
Politics
Five Principles in Political Communication
Gadi Wolfsfeld, Hebrew University of Jerusalem, Israel
Politics is above all a contest,
and the news media are the
central arena for viewing that
competition. One of the central
concerns of political
communication has to do with
the myriad ways in which
politics has an impact on the
news media and the equally
diverse ways in which the
media influences politics. Both
of these aspects in turn weigh
heavily on the effects such
political communication has on mass citizens.
In Making Sense of Media and Politics, Gadi Wolfsfeld
introduces readers to the most important concepts that
serve as a framework for examining the interrelationship
of media and politics:
•political power can usually be translated into power
over the news media
•when authorities lose control over the political
environment they also lose control over the news
•there is no such thing as objective journalism (nor can
there be)
•the media are dedicated more than anything else to
telling a good story
•the most important effects of the news media on
citizens tend to be unintentional and unnoticed.
By identifying these five key principles of political
communication, the author examines those who
package and send political messages, those who
transform political messages into news, and the effect all
this has on citizens. The result is a brief, engaging guide
to help make sense of the wider world of media and
politics and an essential companion to more in-depths
studies of the field.
Hb: 978-0-415-88522-5: £100.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88523-2: £25.99
eBook: 978-0-203-83987-4
Sourcebook for Political
De-Westernizing
Methods, Measures, and Analytical
Techniques
Altering Questions and Changing
Frameworks
Edited by Erik P. Bucy, Indiana University, USA and
R. Lance Holbert, Ohio State University, USA
Edited by Georgette Wang, National Chengchi
University, Taiwan
Series: Routledge Contemporary Asia Series
The Sourcebook for Political Communication Research
offers scholars, students, researchers, and other
interested readers a comprehensive source for
state-of-the-art/field research methods, measures, and
analytical techniques in political communication.
This path-breaking book moves beyond critiquing
’Westerncentrism’ in media and communication studies
by examining where Eurocentrism has come from, how
is it reflected in the study of media and communication,
what the barriers and solutions to de-centralizing the
production of theories are, and what is called for in
order to establish Asian communication theories.
2010: 608pp
Hb: 978-0-415-96495-1: £125.00
eBook: 978-0-203-93866-9
Techno Politics in Presidential
Campaigning
New Voices, New Technologies, and New
Voters
Edited by John Allen Hendricks, Stephen F. Austin,
State University, USA and Lynda Lee Kaid, University
of Florida, USA
This volume examines the use of new media and
technologies to reach voters in the 2008 US Presidential
campaigns, and the role these tactics played in attracting
new voters and communicating with the electorate.
Chapters focus on how the technologies were used by
candidates, the press, and voters.
2010: 240pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87978-1: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-87979-8: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-85126-5
Political Communication and
Social Theory
Aeron Davis, Goldsmiths, University of London, UK
Political Emotions
Edited by Janet Staiger, University of Texas at
Austin, USA, Ann Cvetkovich and Ann Reynolds,
also at University of Texas at Austin, USA
Political Emotions explores the contributions that the
study of discourses, rhetoric, and framing of emotion
make to understanding the public sphere, civil society
and the political realm. Tackling critiques on the
opposition of the public and private spheres, chapters in
this volume examine why some sentiments are valued in
public communication while others are judged irrelevant,
and consider how sentiments mobilize political
trajectories.
2010: 272pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88054-1: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88055-8: £27.99
eBook: 978-0-203-84953-8
Political Communication and
Social Theory presents an
advanced and challenging text
for students and scholars of
political communication and
mass media in democracies. It
draws together work from
across political communication,
media sociology and political
sociology, and includes a mix of
theoretical debate and current
examples from several
democratic media systems. Its
wide ranging discussions both introduce and contest the
traditional scholarship on a number of contemporary
topics and issues.
2010: 216pp
Hb: 978-0-415-54712-3: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-54713-0: £22.99
eBook: 978-0-203-84729-9
2010: 304pp
Hb: 978-0-415-57545-4: £75.00
eBook: 978-0-203-84659-9
Political Communication in Asia
Edited by Lars Willnat, George Washington
University, USA and Annette Aw, University of
Maryland University College, USA
2009: 248pp
Hb: 978-0-415-96284-1: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-96285-8: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-88568-0
Also available:
Political Public Relations
See page 16 for more details.
9
Instru cti onal Co mm u ni cat i o n
a nd vi sual co mm u ni cat i o n
10
Instructional
Communication
2nd Edition
Classroom Communication and
Diversity
Enhancing Instructional Practice
Robert G. Powell and Dana Powell, both at
California State University, USA
This volume addresses ways in
which culture influences
communication in the
classroom and provides teachers
with information they need to
meet the needs of students in
multicultural classrooms. For
students and scholars in
instructional communication.
r he tor i c
Rhetoric
Routledge Studies in Rhetoric
and Communication
Routledge Research is our home for
cutting-edge, upper level scholarly studies
and edited collections. Ranging in
scholarship across the humanities and
social sciences, Routledge Research titles
are characterized by dynamic interventions
into established subjects and innovative
studies on emerging topics.
New in 2012
Communication, Public
Discourse, and Road Safety
Campaigns
Persuading People to Be Safer
Nurit Guttman, Tel Aviv University, Israel
2010: 296pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87718-3: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-87719-0: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-85606-2
This book discusses the use of communication
campaigns to promote road safety, arguing that they
need to elicit public discourse on issues pertaining to
culture, equity, gender, workplace norms, environmental
issues, and social solidarity.
July 2012: 228pp
Hb: 978-0-415-80669-5: £80.00
Visual
Communication
New in 2012
The Multimediated Rhetoric of
the Internet
New in 2012
The Rhetoric of Food
Discourse, Materiality, and Power
Edited by Joshua Frye, State University on New
York, USA and Michael Bruner, Humboldt State
University, USA
This book focuses on the rhetoric of food and the power
dimensions that intersect this most fundamental but
increasingly popular area of ideology and practice,
including politics, culture, lifestyle, identity, advertising,
environment, and economy, analyzing rhetoricís role in
food representations, and its symbolic and material effects.
May 2012: 228pp
Hb: 978-0-415-50071-5: £80.00
New
Reading, Writing, and the
Rhetorics of Whiteness
Wendy Ryden, Long Island University, USA and
Ian Marshall, William Patterson University, USA
In this volume, Ryden and Marshall bring together the
field of composition and rhetoric with critical whiteness
studies to show that in our ’post race’ era whiteness and
racism not only survive but actually thrive in higher
education. As they examine the effects of racism on
contemporary literacy practices and the rhetoric by
which white privilege maintains and reproduces itself,
Ryden and Marshall consider topics ranging from the
emotional investment in whiteness to the role of
personal narrative in reconstituting racist identities to
critiques of the foundational premises of writing
programs steeped in repudiation of despised discourses.
August 2011: 208pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88865-3: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-80298-4
Digital Fusion
New
Carolyn Handa, University of Alabama, USA
The Graphic Communication
Handbook
Simon Downs, University of Loughborough, UK
Series: Media Practice
The Graphic Communication
Handbook is a comprehensive
and detailed introduction to the
theories and practices of the
graphics industry. It traces the
history and development of
graphic design, explores issues
which affect the industry,
examines its analysis through
communications theory,
explains how to do each section
of the job, and advises on entry
This project is a critical, rhetorical study of the digital text
we call the Internet, in particular the style and figurative
surface of its many pages as well as the conceptual,
design patterns structuring the content of those same
pages. This book shows how analyzing the web
rhetorically helps us to understand the inescapable fact
that culture is reflected through all media fused within
the parameters of digital technology.
June 2012: 228pp
Hb: 978-0-415-89325-1: £80.00
New
Ecology, Writing Theory, and
New Media
Writing Ecology
Sidney L. Dobrin, University of Florida, USA
This book galvanizes conversations in ecology and writing
to firmly establish the significance of writing research that
intersects with ecology. Contributors look to establish
ecological writing studies not just as a legitimate or
important form of research, but as paramount to the
future of writing studies and writing theory.
December 2011: 240pp
Hb: 978-0-415-89704-4: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-13469-6
into the profession.
October 2011: 384pp
Hb: 978-0-415-55737-5: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-55738-2: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-80466-7
Companion Website
R h e to ri c
New
Radical Pedagogies of Socrates
and Freire
Ancient Rhetoric/Radical Praxis
Stephen Brown, University of Nevada, USA
Situating contemporary critical praxis at the intersection
of the social, the political, and the rhetorical, this book is
a provocative inquiry into the teaching philosophies of
Plato’s Socrates and Paulo Freire that has profound
implications for contemporary education. Brown not
only sheds new light on the surprising and significant
points of intersection between ancient rhetoric and
radical praxis as embodied in the teaching philosophies
of Socrates and Freire, using the philosophy of each to
illumine the teaching of the other, but uses this analysis
to lead contemporary education in a bold new direction,
articulating a vision for a neo-humanist pragmatism. The
book draws on the post-Freudian theories of Jacques.
October 2011: 240pp
Hb: 978-0-415-89792-1: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-33412-6
New
Rhetoric, Remembrance,
and Visual Form
Sighting Memory
Edited by Anne Teresa Demo and Bradford
Vivian, both at Syracuse University, USA
This volume offers a multifaceted investigation of
intersections among visual and memorial forms in modern
art, politics, and society. The question of the relationships
among images and memory is particularly relevant to
contemporary society, at a time when visually-based
technologies are increasingly employed in both grand and
modest efforts to preserve the past amid rapid social
change. The chapters in Rhetoric, Remembrance, and
Visual Form provide valuable insights concerning not only
how memories may be seen (or sighted) in visual form but
also how visual forms constitute noteworthy material sites
of memory. The collection addresses this central theme
with a wealth of interdisciplinary and international
approaches, featuring conventional scholarly as well as
artistic works from such disciplines as rhetoric and
communication, art and art history, architecture, landscape
studies, and more, by contributors from around the globe.
August 2011: 240pp
Hb: 978-0-415-89553-8: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-80340-0
Rhetorics, Literacies, and
Narratives of Sustainability
Edited by Peter N. Goggin, Arizona State University,
USA
Touching on topics including conservation efforts in specific
locales; social and political constructions of rhetorical place
and space; town planning and zoning issues; and rhetorics
of environmental remediation and sustainability, this
collection provides rhetoricians and environmentalists a
window into the discourse on sustainability.
2009: 240pp
Hb: 978-0-415-80041-9: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-87277-2
The Rhetoric of Intellectual
Property
Copyright Law and the Regulation of Digital
Culture
Jessica Reyman, Northern Illinois University, USA
This book identifies the public and legal stories told
about copyright law in a digital age, analyzes the
rhetoric behind recent legal developments, and
challenges the underlying claims about the role of
technology in creative and intellectual activity.
2009: 188pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99907-6: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-85792-2
Activism and Rhetoric
Theories and Contexts for Political
Engagement
Edited by Seth Kahn, West Chester University, USA
and JongHwa Lee, Loyola Marymount University, USA
This volume examines the role of
rhetoric in today’s culture of
democratic activism. In
presenting a variety of political
and rhetorical struggles in their
specific contexts, editors Seth
Kahn and JongHwa Lee allow
contributors to reflect on and
elaborate possibilities for both
activist approaches to rhetorical
studies, and rhetorical
approaches to activist projects,
facilitating better understanding
the socio-political consequences of this work.
2010: 232pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87855-5: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-87856-2: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-84628-5
Reengaging the Prospects of
Rhetoric
Current Conversations and Contemporary
Challenges
Edited by Mark J. Porrovecchio, Oregon State
University, USA
Queer Temporalities in Gay
Male Representation
Tragedy, Normativity, and Futurity
Dustin Bradley Goltz, DePaul University, USA
Through the analysis of over seventy films and thirty
television series, Goltz examines reoccurring narrative
structures in popular media that perpetuate the extreme
value placed upon “young” gay male bodies, while
devaluing health, aging, and longevity.
2009: 204pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87228-7: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-89815-7: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-86131-8
Media Representations of
Gender and Torture Post-9/11
Marita Gronnvoll, Eastern Illinois University, USA
Using a feminist rhetorical lens, this book examines
entertainment and news media representations of gender
and torture. Case studies include Abu Ghraib, Guantanamo
Bay, and popular television, such as 24. Contextual
discourses suggest a cultural creation of an evil Muslim
enemy, and a longing for a heroic masculine warrior savoir.
2010: 186pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87480-9: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-84867-8
Reengaging the Prospects of
Rhetoric reanimates the debate
over the function and scope of
rhetoric. Providing a
contemporary response to the
volume The Prospect of
Rhetoric (1971), this volume
reconceptualizes that classic
work to address the challenges
facing the study of rhetoric
today. As a standalone text or a
supplemental resource for
undergraduate and graduate
courses in the history, theory, and criticism of rhetoric or
contemporary rhetorical theory, it will help to shape
rhetoric’s future role in communication studies and will
foster interdisciplinary dialogues about the topic.
2010: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87308-6: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-87309-3: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-85845-5
11
p u b li c relation s
12
Public Relations
2nd Edition
Reputation Management
The Key to Successful Public Relations and Corporate Communication
John Doorley and Helio Fred Garcia, both at New York University, USA
Reputation management is the most important theme in public relations and corporate communication today. John Doorley and
Helio Fred Garcia argue that most CEOs don’t actually pay much heed to reputation and this is to their peril.
This book is a how-to guide for professionals and students in public relations and corporate communication, as well as for CEOs and
other leaders. It rests on the premise that reputation can be measured, monitored, and managed. Organized by corporate
communication units (media relations, employee communication, government relations, and investor relations, for example), the
book provides a field-tested guide to corporate reputation problems such as leaked memos, unfair treatment by the press, and
negative rumors – and it is this rare book that focuses on practical solutions. Each chapter is fleshed out with real-world experience
by the authors and their contributors who come from a wide range of professional corporate communication backgrounds.
This new edition features new and updated examples throughtout, two new chapters on social media and public relations
consulting, a new textbox feature in each chapter relating key communication theories to the practice of public relations and
corporate communication, expanded coverage of global issues, and a new Companion Website at: www.routledge.com/
textbooks/doorley, featuring lecture materials for instructors and extensive learning resources for students and professionals.
2010: 456pp
Hb: 978-0-415-80184-3: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-80185-0: £35.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87686-2
New
2nd Edition
The Crisis Manager
Facing Risk and Responsibility
Otto Lerbinger, Boston University, USA
Responding to the era of crises in which we now live, The Crisis Manager offers wise counsel for anticipating and
responding to crises as well as taking the steps required to reduce the impact of these events. Spotlighting the reality of
crisis at levels ranging from local to global, author Otto Lerbinger helps readers understand the approaches and ways
of thinking required for successful crisis management in today’s world. As no organization or individual is immune from
crisis, he guides managers to make good decisions under conditions of high uncertainty, and to consider the interests
not only of stockholders but also of a wide variety of stakeholders.
With a focus on the threat of crises to an organization’s most valuable asset – its reputation – The Crisis Manager covers:
• preparation for crisis, including crisis communication planning
• physical crises – natural, biological, and technological
• ’human climate’ crises, stemming from targeted attacks on an organization’s policies, actions, or physical holdings
• crises due to management failure, including mismanagement, skewed values, deception, and misconduct.
New to this second edition are the use of social media in crisis management, and chapters on image restoration
strategies and crises stemming from mismanagement, as well as a comprehensive updating of the entire work.
Real-world case studies provide examples of what worked and what did not work, and the reasons why.
Written for present and future crisis managers in all types of businesses and organizations, this resource will be required
reading for students in public relations, business, and management, as it prepares them for their crucial roles as
decision makers.
Selected Contents: Part I: Preparing For an Era of Crises Part II: Crises of the Physical Environment Part III: Crises of Management Failure Part IV: Conclusions
Hb: 978-0-415-89228-5: £95.00
Pb: 978-0-415-89231-5: £42.99
eBook: 978-0-203-22213-3
Companion Website
p ubl i c r e l ati o n s
Crisis
Communications
4th Edition
A Casebook Approach
Kathleen Fearn-Banks, University of Washington, USA
Crisis Communications: A Casebook Approach presents case studies of organizational, corporate, and individual crises, and analyzes the communication
responses to these situations. Demonstrating how professionals prepare for and respond to crises, as well as how they develop communications plans,
this essential text explores crucial issues concerning communication with the news media, employees, and consumers in times of crisis.
Author Kathleen Fearn-Banks examines the steps of choosing the appropriate words to convey a message, selecting the method and channels for
delivering the message, and identifying and targeting the most appropriate publics or audiences. She also addresses such important topics as avoiding
potential mismanagement of communication in crisis situations.
Key features of this fourth edition are:
•six new cases, including several international crises
•current discussion of communications technology as it relates to crises
•a Companion Website – www.routledge.com/textbooks/fearn-banks – with additional cases as well as supplemental materials for students and
classroom resources for instructors.
Utilizing both classic and contemporary cases of real-world situations, Crisis Communications provides students in public relations and business with real-world perspectives and
valuable insights for professional responses to crises. It is intended for use in crisis communications, crisis management, and PR case studies courses.
2010: 400pp • Hb: 978-0-415-88058-9: £68.00 • Pb: 978-0-415-88059-6: £33.99 • eBook: 978-0-203-84952-1
Also available:
Crisis Communications
Academic Package
Multi-Pack Set incl. Textbook and Workbook: 978-0-415-89197-4: £46.99
See www.routledge.com/9780415891974 for more details.
4th Edition
3rd Edition
New in 2012
Student Workbook
to Accompany Crisis
Communications
Strategic Planning for Public
Relations
Health Public Relations
A Casebook Approach
Kathleen Fearn-Banks, University of Washington,
USA
No company, organization, or individual whose
livelihood depends on public reaction can afford to
function without a crisis communications plan. This
Student Workbook reviews the critical terminologies,
processes, and skills needed for understanding and
responding to crises. It prepares individuals for
responding to crises in a variety of contexts, and
reinforces strategies and tactics to be used during a
crisis. Chapters include instructive case studies of public
relations professionals in crises: what they did, what they
wished they had done, and what hampered their
progress. The exercises provide students with the
opportunity to respond to real-world crises, sharpening
their own skills and practicing response behaviors. This
workbook will serve as a useful tool for all future
practitioners.
2010: 128pp
Pb: 978-0-415-88177-7: £18.99
eBook: 978-0-203-81883-1
Ronald D. Smith, Buffalo State College, USA
This innovative and popular text
provides a clear pathway to
understanding public relations
campaigns and other types of
strategic communication.
Implementing the pragmatic,
in-depth approach of the
previous editions, author Ronald
D. Smith presents a step-bystep unfolding of the strategic
campaign process used in
public relations practice.
Drawing from his experience in professional practice and
in the classroom, Smith walks readers through the
critical steps for the formative research, strategic and
tactical planning, and plan evaluation phases of the
process.
As a classroom text or a resource for professional
practice, this volume provides a model that can be
adapted to fit specific circumstances and used to
improve effectiveness and creativity in communication
planning. It serves as an accessible and understandable
guide to field-tested procedures, offering practical
insights that apply to public relations campaigns and
case studies coursework.
2009: 456pp
Pb: 978-0-415-99422-4: £35.99
eBook: 978-0-203-89118-6
Jon Cope, University College Falmouth, UK and Myc
Riggulsford
Health PR is an important and growing sector of the
public relations industry, both in the UK and
internationally, but is generally seen as a ’difficult’
specialism due to the highly technical language and novel
theoretical concepts usually used by scientists and doctors
when publishing, describing and discussing their work.
This book is about how and why information about
health and medical science is communicated to target
audiences through a range of PR techniques. It brings
together information on the wide range of healthrelated public relations activities and combines a critical,
analytical and cultural view of these activities with
guidance on best practice.
Hb: 978-0-415-61330-9: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-61331-6: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14369-8
13
14
New in 2012
New in 2012
Strategic Social Media
The Public Relations Strategic
Toolkit
Kelli Matthews, University of Oregon, USA with
Michelle Honald, University of Denver, USA
Strategic Social Media provides an essential tool for
contemporary public relations, tying new technologies
and strategies of social media use to foundational PR
values. Introducing readers to various social media
channels available for use in PR campaigns, the text also
provides a theoretical framework to gird the use of these
channels and maintain high standards of PR practice.
The text focuses on categories of social media (blogs,
wikis, podcasts, social networking and social
bookmarking), examining strengths, weaknesses, and
opportunities among the options.
Author Kelli Matthews works with Michelle Honald to
provide readers with the context for social media use in
public relations, the theories applicable to guide this
practice, and the processes and steps involved. They also
address the varying technology literacies among
instructors and students, and provide current,
easy-to-follow activities and case studies to help both
students and teachers enhance their social media savvy.
The book’s Companion Website provides social media
resources and ’how-to’ guidance; assignments and
activities; an instructor guide; and a bibliography with
links to relevant sites and online publications.
Bridging the gap between the ’how-to’ publications for
practitioners and the planning and campaign textbooks
for the classroom, Strategic Social Media provides a
practical guide for teaching social media in the PR and
strategic communication context.
March 2012: 228pp
Hb: 978-0-415-89064-9: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-89065-6: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14873-0
An Essential Guide to Successful Public
Relations Practice
Alison Theaker and Heather Yaxley
The Public Relations Toolkit provides a structured
approach to understanding public relations and
corporate communications. The focus is on professional
skills development as well as approaches that are widely
recognised as ’best practice’. Original methods are
considered alongside well established procedures to
ensure the changing requirements of contemporary
practice are reflected.
Routledge Research in Public
Relations
Routledge Research is our home for
cutting-edge, upper level scholarly studies
and edited collections. Ranging in
scholarship across the humanities and
social sciences, Routledge Research titles
are characterized by dynamic interventions
into established subjects and innovative
studies on emerging topics.
Split into four parts covering the public relations
profession, campaign planning, corporate
communication and stakeholder engagement, this
textbook covers evrything involved in the critical practice
of public relations in an accessible manner. Features
include:
New in 2012
•definitions of key terms
Kristin Demetrious, Deakin University, Australia
•contemporary case studies
This book draws significant new meaning to the
inter-relationships of public relations and social change
through a number of international case studies, and
rebuilds knowledge around alternative communicative
practices that are ethical, sustainable, and effective.
•insight from practitioners
•handy checklists
•practical activities and assignments.
Covering the practicalities of using traditional and social
media as well as international considerations, ethics, and
PR within contexts from politics to charities, this guide
gives you all the critical and practical skills you need to
introduce you to a career in public relations.
Hb: 978-0-415-67647-2: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-67648-9: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14365-0
Public Relations, Activism, and
Social Change
Speaking Up
August 2012: 208pp
Hb: 978-0-415-89706-8: £80.00
New in 2012
Transparency, Public Relations
and the Mass Media
Combating Media Bribery Worldwide
Katerina Tsetsura, University of Oklahoma, USA and
Dean Kruckeberg, University of North Carolina, USA
Routledge Communication and Media
Studies on Facebook and Twitter
This book provides a theoretical framework for
understanding media transparency and its antithesis –
media opacity – by analyzing extensive empirical data that
the authors have collected from more than sixty countries.
Did you know that we are on Facebook and Twitter? Follow us and join the conversation.
Hb: 978-0-415-88424-2: £80.00
Our social media sites are a great way of following what’s new from Routledge in these subject
areas. We’ll share news about the latest books published and special issues from journals, you can
read recent book reviews or share your own, plus there are regular links to lots of free articles,
special offers and useful information. Whether you’re interested in a specific area or just have a
general interest in media and communications, we hope to offer something for everyone.
Start following us today and say hello.
Routledge Communication Studies
Routledge Media Studies
Facebook: www.facebook.com/RoutledgeCommunication Facebook: www.facebook.com/RoutledgeMedia
Twitter: http://twitter.com/Routledge_Comms
Twitter: http://twitter.com/Routledge_MandC
Find Routledge on Facebook
Like Us
Like us. Learn from us.
Follow Routledge on Twitter
Companion Website
p ubl i c r e l ati o n s
New in 2012
New
New
Culture and Public Relations
Marketing and Public Relations
for Museums, Galleries, Cultural
and Heritage Attractions
4th Edition
Edited by Krishnamurthy Sriramesh, Massey
University, New Zealand and Dejan Verčič, Pristop
Communications, Slovenia
Culture and Public Relations explores the impact of
culture – societal and organizational – through the
global lens of public relations. Structuring the volume
around three themes – culture as an environment for
public relations; the culture of PR globally; and the
impact of PR on culture – the editors bring together
compelling discussions on such questions as how
spirituality, religion, and culture have affected public
relations, and how public relations culture has been
affected by the ’corporate cultures’ of business
enterprises. Additionally, the volume provides studies on
the effect of culture on public relations practice in
specific countries.
With contributors from Europe, Asia, Australia, and
North America, this collection offers international
perspectives on a topic that is growing increasingly
important in public relations study and practice. It will be
required reading for scholars, researchers, and students
in public relations and also has much to offer the
business discipline, for those seeking to integrate culture
and communication to their practices.
March 2012: 344pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88726-7: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88727-4: £34.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14923-2
NEW
Public Relations, Society
& Culture
Theoretical and Empirical Explorations
Edited by Lee Edwards, University of Manchester,
UK and Caroline E.M. Hodges, Bournemouth
University, UK
Historically, public relations
research has been dominated by
organisational interests, treating
the profession as a function to
help organisations achieve their
goals, and focusing on practice
and processes first and foremost.
Such research is valuable in
addressing how public relations
can be used more effectively by
organisations and institutions,
but has tended to neglect the
consequences of the practice on the social world in which
those organisations operate.
Public Relations, Society & Culture makes an essential
contribution to a range of scholarly fields and illustrates the
relevance of public relations to matters beyond its
organisational function. It will be highly useful to students
and scholars of public relations as well as cultural studies,
ethnicity/’race’ communication, media studies,
development communication, anthropology, and
organisational communication. This insightful book will
make a significant contribution to debates about the
purpose and practice of public relations in the new century.
Hb: 978-0-415-57273-6: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-57274-3: £18.99
eBook: 978-0-203-83213-4
Becoming a Public Relations
Writer
Ylva French, Freelance Consultant, UK and Sue
Runyard, Heritage Lottery Fund, UK
A Writing Workbook for Emerging and
Established Media
Ronald D. Smith, Buffalo State College, USA
Visitors to museums, galleries,
heritage sites and other not for
profit attractions receive their
information in changing ways.
Communications channels are
shifting and developing all the
time, presenting new challenges
to cultural PR and Marketing
teams. As well as providing
some of the theory of
marketing, this book provides
the latest available case studies
coupled with comments and advice from professionals
inside and outside the cultural sector to describe the
possibilities and outline strategies for the future.
This book is aimed at students of marketing, museums,
culture and heritage as well as professionals working in a
range of cultural organisations from small to large and
at different stages of market development from new
entrants to those offering mature products. This includes
museums, galleries, heritage and visitor attractions,
community organisations, as well as organisers of
festivals, markets, craft fairs and temporary exhibitions.
June 2011: 384pp
Hb: 978-0-415-61045-2: £90.00
Pb: 978-0-415-61046-9: £29.99
eBook: 978-0-203-81375-1
New
4th Edition
The Public Relations Handbook
Alison Theaker
The Public Relations Handbook
is a comprehensive and detailed
introduction to the theories and
practices of the public relations
industry. It traces the history
and development of public
relations, explores ethical issues
which affect the industry,
examines its relationship with
politics, lobbying organizations
and journalism, assesses its
professionalism and regulation
and advises on training and entry into the profession.
The Public Relations Handbook combines theoretical and
organizational frameworks for studying public relations
with examples of how the industry works in practice. It
draws on a range of promotional strategies and campaigns
from businesses, public and non-profit organizations
including the AA, Airbus, BT, Northamptonshire County
Council, Cuprinol and Action for Children.
It is supported by a Companion Website at:
www.routledge.com/cw/theaker.
August 2011: 520pp
Hb: 978-0-415-59813-2: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-59814-9: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-80482-7
Becoming a Public Relations
Writer is a comprehensive guide
to the writing process for public
relations practice. Using
straightforward, no-nonsense
language, realistic examples,
easy-to-follow steps and
practical exercises, this text
introduces the various formats
and styles of writing you will
encounter as a public relations
practitioner.
The fourth edition has been updated to reflect
significant developments in the public relations field,
including:
•a new chapter on multimedia and social media
releases
•a new chapter on websites, blogs, and wikis
•an expansion of the chapter on direct mail and online
appeals
•updated examples of actual pieces of public relations
writing.
Through its comprehensive and accessible approach,
Becoming a Public Relations Writer is an invaluable
resource for future and current public relations
practitioners.
Hb: 978-0-415-89342-8: £95.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88802-8: £44.99
eBook: 978-0-203-18275-8
15
16
Public Relations in Global
Cultural Contexts
Handbook of Risk and Crisis
Communication
Principles and Applications
Multi-paradigmatic Perspectives
Edited by Jesper Stromback, Mid Sweden
University, Sweden and Spiro Kiousis, University of
Florida, USA
Edited by Nilanjana Bardhan, Southern Illinois
University, USA and C. Kay Weaver, Waikato
University, New Zealand
Edited by Robert L. Heath, University of Houston, USA
and H. Dan O’Hair, University of Oklahoma, USA
New
Political Public Relations
Political Public Relations maps
and defines this emerging field,
bringing together scholars from
various disciplines, political
communication, public relations
and political science, to explore
the area in detail. The volume
connects differing schools of
thought, bringing together
theoretical and empirical
investigations, and defines a
field that is becoming
increasingly important and
prominent. It offers an international orientation, as the
field of political public relations must be studied in the
context of various political and communication systems
to be fully understood.
As a singular contribution to scholarship in public
relations and political communication, this work fills a
significant gap in the existing literature, and is certain to
influence future theory and research.
March 2011: 352pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87380-2: £100.00
Pb: 978-0-415-87381-9: £31.99
eBook: 978-0-203-86417-3
This volume emphasizes
theories and concepts that
highlight global
interconnectedness through a
range of interpretative and
critical approaches to
understanding the global
significance and impacts of
public relations.
2010: 312pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87285-0: £95.00
Pb: 978-0-415-87286-7: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-86615-3
Corporate Reputation and the
News Media
Agenda-setting within Business News
Coverage in Developed, Emerging, and
Frontier Markets
Edited by Craig Carroll, Lipscomb University, USA
New
Public Relations as Activism
Derina R. Holtzhausen, Oklahoma State University,
USA
This volume applies postmodern
theory to public relations,
providing an alternative lens to
public relations theory and
practice and developing public
relations theory within the
context of postmodernism.
Author Derina R. Holtzhausen
focuses on two key issues and
their application to public
relations theory and practice:
the postmodernization of
society, and the possibilities postmodern theories offer to
explain and understand public relations practice in
today’s changing society. Holtzhausen’s argument is that
existing theory should be evaluated from a postmodern
perspective to determine its applicability to
postmodernity. Utilizing practitioner perspectives
throughout the volume, she explores the practice of
public relations as a form of activism.
The volume is intended for scholars and students in
public relations. It may be used as a supplemental text in
advanced courses on public relations theory, PR
management, organizational communication, and
related areas.
This volume examines
agenda-setting theory as it
applies to the news media’s
influence on corporate
reputation. It presents
interdisciplinary, international,
and empirical investigations
examining the relationship
between corporate reputation
and the news media throughout
the world. Providing coverage of
more than twenty-five countries,
and incorporating scholarship
from a broad range of disciplines (including advertising,
strategic management, business, political
communication, et al.), this volume has much to offer
scholars and students examining business and the news
media.
The Handbook of Risk and Crisis Communication
explores the scope and purpose of risk, and its
counterpart, crisis, to facilitate the understanding of
these issues from conceptual and strategic perspectives.
The Handbook offers a broad approach to the study of
risk and crisis as joint concerns. Chapters explore the
reach of crisis and risk communication, define and
examine key constructs, and parse the contexts of these
vital areas. As a whole, the volume presents a
comprehensive array of studies that highlight the
standard principles and theories on both topics, serving
as the largest effort to date focused on engaging risk
communication discussions in a comprehensive manner.
With perspectives from psychology, sociology,
anthropology, political science, economics, and
communication, the Handbook provides vital insights for
all disciplines studying risk, and is required reading for
scholars and researchers investigating risk and crisis in
various contexts.
2010: 696pp
Hb: 978-0-8058-5777-1: £145.00
Pb: 978-0-8058-5778-8: £60.00
eBook: 978-0-203-89162-9
Cases in Public Relations
Management
Patricia Swann, Utica College, USA
Developed for advanced students in public relations,
Cases in Public Relations Management uses recent cases
in public relations that had outcomes varying from
expected to unsuccessful. The text challenges students to
think analytically, strategically, and practically. Each case is
based on real events, and is designed to encourage
discussion, debate, and exploration of the options
available to today’s strategic public relations manager.
2010: 400pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87892-0: £85.00
Pb: 978-0-415-87893-7: £38.99
eBook: 978-0-203-85136-4
2nd Edition
Applied Public Relations
2010: 480pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87153-2: £99.00
Pb: 978-0-415-87152-5: £33.99
eBook: 978-0-203-86858-4
Cases in Stakeholder Management
Kathy Brittain McKee, Berry College, USA and
Larry F. Lamb, University of North Carolina, USA
2009: 304pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99915-1: £95.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99916-8: £27.99
August 2011: 288pp
Hb: 978-0-8058-5523-4: £62.50
eBook: 978-0-203-81909-8
Companion Website
adv e rti s i n g
Advertising
New in 2012
Edited by Øyvind Ihlen, University of Oslo, Norway,
Betteke Van Ruler, University of Amsterdam, the
Netherlands and Magnus Fredriksson, University of
Trollhattan, Sweden
Advertising
A World in Motion
2009: 384pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99785-0: £62.50
Pb: 978-0-415-99786-7: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-88323-5
Whether you are an aspiring
advertising creative, designer,
account manager, PR / publicity
consultant or marketing
manager, Advertising is an
engaging source of inspiration
for those dark, idea-less days
and a motivator when those job
interviews or placements seem
in short supply. Its Companion Website at:
www.routledge.com/textbooks/advertising
supports the book with further examples and ideas to
inspire as well as offering up-to-date advice.
Public Relations and Social
Theory
Key Figures and Concepts
2nd Edition
Rhetorical and Critical
Approaches to Public Relations II
Edited by Robert L. Heath, University of Houston,
USA, Elizabeth L. Toth, University of Maryland, USA
and Damion Waymer, Virginia Tech, USA
2009: 392pp
Hb: 978-0-8058-6423-6: £126.00
Pb: 978-0-8058-6424-3: £34.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87492-9
3rd Edition
Public Relations Writing
Worktext
A Practical Guide for the Profession
Joseph M. Zappala, Cornell University, USA and
Ann R. Carden, SUNY Fredonia, USA
Advertising, the Media and
Globalisation
Its Business, Culture and Careers
John Sinclair, University of Melbourne, Australia
Andy Tibbs, University of Gloucestershire, UK
This book provides a thorough account of contemporary
trends in advertising and media industries. It examines
the role of advertising in the globalisation of consumer
culture, taking an empirical, region-by-region approach.
Advertising does not need
another graduate!
This book is filled with numerous visual examples of
advertising thinking. With words of advice and guidance
from some of the industryís most respected practitioners
and insights from graduates who faced the same
challenges you will soon encounter in securing that
elusive first job.
Add to that, an extensive supply of hints and tips to
enhance the creative thinking processes, take the work
you do beyond what you think you are capable of and,
crucially, gain an edge at job interviews.
Maybe advertising doesn’t need another graduate, but
then you wonít be just another graduate will you?
2009: 232pp
Hb: 978-0-415-54468-9: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-54466-5: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-86595-8
2009: 312pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99753-9: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99754-6: £34.99
2nd Edition
The Global Public Relations
Handbook, Revised and
Expanded Edition
Theory, Research, and Practice
Edited by Krishnamurthy Sriramesh, Massey
University, New Zealand and Dejan Verčič,
Pristop Communications, Slovenia
2009: 992pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99513-9: £190.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99514-6: £60.00
eBook: 978-0-203-88937-4
Advertising attracts much public criticism for the
commercialisation of culture and its apparent impact on
social and personal life. This book outlines and assesses
the issues involved, with regard to how they are
manifested in different regional, national and global
contexts. Topics covered include:
•advertising as an object of study
•global trends in the advertising industry
•advertising and the media
•issues in advertising and society
•advertising, globalisation and world regions.
While maintaining a contemporary focus, the book looks
over the whole of the twentieth century as background
to the globalisation of what it calls the manufacturingmarketing-media complex. There is specific emphasis on
the 1980s, a crucial decade for advertising as a global
institution; the 1990s, as the decade which gave rise to
the discourse of globalisation; and the decade recently
ended, as the era of new media.
May 2012: 144pp
Hb: 978-0-415-66882-8: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-66883-5: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14364-3
New
Advertising Theory
Edited by Shelly Rodgers and Esther Thorson,
both at University of Missouri, USA
Advertising Theory provides detailed and current
explorations of key theories in the advertising discipline.
The volume gives a working knowledge of the primary
theoretical approaches of advertising, offering a
comprehensive synthesis of the vast literature in the
area. Editors Shelly Rodgers and Esther Thorson have
developed this volume as a forum in which to compare,
contrast, and evaluate advertising theories in a
comprehensive and structured presentation.
Chapters in this text provide concrete examples, case
studies, and readings written by leading advertising
scholars and educators. Utilizing McGuire’s persuasion
matrix as the structural model for each chapter, the text
offers a wider lens through which to view the
phenomenon of advertising as it operates within various
environments. Within each area of advertising theory
– and across advertising contexts – both traditional and
non-traditional approaches are addressed, including
electronic word-of-mouth advertising, user-generated
advertising, and social media advertising contexts.
As a benchmark for the current state of advertising
theory, this text will facilitate a deeper understanding for
advertising students, and will be required reading for
advertising theory coursework.
October 2011: 476pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88661-1: £125.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88662-8: £46.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14954-6
17
a dvert ising
18
2nd Edition
4th Edition
New in 2012
Advertising and Public
Relations Law
The Media Handbook
4 Volume Set
A Complete Guide to Advertising Media
Selection, Planning, Research, and Buying
Advertising
Helen Katz, Starcom Mediavest, USA
Series: Critical Concepts in Media and Cultural Studies
Roy L. Moore, Middle Tennessee State University,
USA, Carmen Maye and Erik L. Collins, both at
University of South Carolina, USA
Addressing a critical need, Advertising and Public
Relations Law explores the issues and ideas that affect
the regulation of advertising and public relations speech.
Coverage includes the categorization of different kinds
of speech afforded varying levels of First Amendment
protection; court-created tests for laws and regulations
of speech; and non content-based restrictions on speech
and expression.
Features of this second edition include:
•overviews and synopses for each chapter
•extended excerpts from major court decisions
•appendices providing a chart of the judicial system, a
summary of the judicial process, an overview of
alternative dispute resolution mechanisms, and the
professional codes for media industry and business
associations
•online materials for instructors.
The volume is intended for upper-level undergraduate
and graduate students in media, advertising and public
relations law or regulation courses. It also serves as an
essential reference for advertising and public relations
practitioners.
2010: 480pp
Hb: 978-0-8058-5346-9: £110.00
Pb: 978-0-415-96548-4: £40.95
eBook: 978-0-203-84587-5
3rd Edition
The Advertising Handbook
Helen Powell, Jonathan Hardy, Sarah Hawkin and
Iain MacRury, all at University of East London, UK
The Advertising Handbook, third Edition offers new
material and a new organising framework, while
continuing to provide both an introduction and an
authoritative guide to advertising theory and practice.
2009: 264pp
Hb: 978-0-415-42312-0: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-42311-3: £24.99
For more titles in:
The Media Practice Series
See page 48
’The Media Handbook is the perfect companion to
class materials for my audience and media contacts
class. It provides the essential concepts for
understanding the role of media in advertising and
illustrates the steps in the planning process.’
– Michelle Nelson, University of Illinois, USA
The Media Handbook provides an introduction to the
complete media planning and buying process.
Emphasizing basic media planning and buying
calculations along with the practical realities of offering
plan alternatives and evaluating the plan, this fourth
edition reflects the critical changes in how media today
are planned, bought, and sold. Author Helen Katz looks
at the larger marketing, advertising, and media
objectives, and follows with an exploration of major
media categories, including those emerging, such as
branded entertainment and viral marketing. She provides
a comprehensive analysis of planning and buying, with a
continued focus on how those tactical elements tie back
to the strategic aims of the brand and client.
This popular text is perfect for advanced students in
advertising, media planning/buying, communication,
public relations, and marketing, and it also will serve as
an informative reference volume for practitioners.
Edited by Iain MacRury, University of East London, UK
This new four-volume collection from Routledge’s
acclaimed Critical Concepts in Media and Cultural
Studies series answers the need for an authoritative
reference work to make sense of this rapidly growing
and ever more complex corpus of literature. The
collection connects researchers and advanced students
to the best in contemporary social and cultural theory,
while maintaining a stringent focus on advertising, as
industry, as cultural form, and as evolving (multi-) media
technology.
With a comprehensive introduction, newly written by
the editor, which places the collected material in its
historical and intellectual context, Advertising is destined
to be valued by scholars, students, and practitioners as a
vital work for research and reference.
Available at a special introductory price. This price is
applicable until 3 months after publication. For more
information, please contact us at
[email protected].
Hb: 978-0-415-57711-3: £575.00
2010: 228pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87353-6: £55.00
Pb: 978-0-415-87354-3: £22.99
eBook: 978-0-203-86455-5
The Advertising and Consumer
Culture Reader
Edited by Joseph Turow, University of Pennsylvania,
USA and Matthew P. McAllister, Pennsylvania State
University, USA
The classic and contemporary essays gathered here
explore the past, present, and future of advertising –
from the early days of print to the World Wide Web and
beyond. These selections offer historical, sociological,
critical, cultural, and political-economic lenses to explore
a wide range of topics – from consumer activism to
globalization to the role of ads in the political process.
Together, these key readings chart the past, present, and
future of advertising, while also examining the effects of
advertising and consumer culture upon individuals,
society, cultures, and the world at large.
Designed for use in courses, the collection begins with a
general introduction that orients students to thinking
critically about advertising and consumer culture. Section
and chapter introductions offer valuable historical and
critical context, while review questions after each
reading will spark classroom debates and challenge
students’ understanding of key concepts.
2009: 456pp
Hb: 978-0-415-96329-9: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-96330-5: £33.99
Companion Website
c omm un i cati on the ory an d r e s e a rch
Communication
Theory and
Research
New in 2012
Handbook of Communication
History
Edited by Peter Simonson, Janice Peck,
Robert T. Craig and John Jackson, all at University
of Colorado, USA
The Handbook of Communication History addresses
central ideas, social practices, and media of
communication as they have developed across time,
cultures, and world geographical regions. It attends to
both the varieties of communication in world history and
the historical investigation of those forms in
communication and media studies. The Handbook
editors view communication as encompassing patterns,
processes, and performances of social interaction,
symbolic production, material exchange, institutional
formation, social praxis, and discourse. As such, the
history of communication cuts across social, cultural,
intellectual, political, technological, institutional, and
economic history.
Hb: 978-0-415-89259-9: £190.00
Pb: 978-0-415-89260-5: £65.00
eBook: 978-0-203-14911-9
New in 2012
Handbook of Comparative
Edited by Frank Esser and Thomas Hanitzsch
The Handbook of Comparative Communication Research
aims to provide a comprehensive understanding of
comparative communication research. It fills an obvious
gap in the literature and offers an extensive and
interdisciplinary discussion of the general approach of
comparative research, its prospect and problems as well
as its applications in crucial sub-fields of
communications.
The first part of the volume charts the state of the art in
the field; the second section introduces relevant areas of
communication studies where the comparative approach
has been successfully applied in recent years; the third
part offers an analytical review of conceptual and
methodological issues; and the last section proposes a
roadmap for future research.
Hb: 978-0-415-80271-0: £110.00
Pb: 978-0-415-80275-8: £40.00
eBook: 978-0-203-14910-2
New
Psychophysiological
Measurement and Meaning
Cognitive and Emotional Processing of Media
Robert F. Potter, Indiana University, USA and
Paul Bolls, University of Missouri, USA
New in 2012
Situational Theory of Problem
Solving
Communicative, Cognitive, and Perceptive
Bases
Jeong-Nam Kim and James E. Grunig, both at
University of Maryland, USA
This book presents the situational theory of problem
solving (STOPS). This situational theory describes human
problem-solving approaches that people adopt in
dealing with almost any kind of life problem. In this
book the authors construct and present a theory that
hinges on problem and problem-solving approaches. In
addition to the theory-building concern, the authors pay
attention to the ubiquitous notion of problem solving in
human life. They focus their theory on communicative
behavior and cognitive strategies purposely adopted to
overcome problematic states that one subjectively
perceives. Thus, their account focuses on the problemsolver’s perceptive, cognitive and communicative bases,
when one encounters a problematic situation.
July 2012: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99640-2: £60.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99642-6: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14880-8
This research volume serves as a
comprehensive resource for
psychophysiological research on
media responses. It addresses
the theoretical underpinnings,
methodological techniques, and
most recent research in this
area. It goes beyond current
volumes by placing the research
techniques within a context of
communication processes and
effects as a field, and
demonstrating how the
real-time measurement of physiological responses
enhances and complements more traditional measures
of psychological effects from media.
This volume introduces readers to the theoretical
assumptions of psychophysiology as well as the
operational details of collecting psychophysiological
data. In addition to discussing specific measures, it
includes brief reviews of recent experiments that have
used psychophysiological measures to study how the
brain processes media. It will serve as a valuable
reference for media researchers utilizing these
methodologies, or for other researchers needing to
understand the theories, history, and methods of psycho
physiological research.
The Handbook of
Communication Ethics
Edited by George Cheney, University of Texas at
Austin, USA, Steve May, University of North
Carolina, USA and Debashish Munshi, University of
Waikato, New Zealand
This Handbook bridges explicit treatments of ethical
issues in communication and implicit considerations of
ethics, presenting in one volume analyses and
applications that draw upon recognized ethical theories
and those which engage important questions of power,
equality, and justice. It is intended for scholars in
communication, and will serve as a reference text in
advanced courses addressing communication and ethics.
2010: 560pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99464-4: £160.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99465-1: £56.99
eBook: 978-0-203-89040-0
Measures II
A Sourcebook
Rebecca B. Rubin and Alan M. Rubin, Kent State
University, USA, Elizabeth Graham, Ohio University,
USA, Elizabeth M. Perse, University of Delaware,
USA and David Seibold, University of California, USA
2009: 528pp
Hb: 978-0-8058-5132-8: £140.00
Pb: 978-0-8058-5133-5: £39.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87153-9
Distinctive Qualities in
Donal Carbaugh, University of Massachusetts
Amherst, USA and Patrice M. Buzzanell, Purdue
University, USA
2009: 136pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99025-7: £81.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99026-4: £18.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87416-5
Routledge Handbook of
Applied Communication
Research
Edited by Lawrence R. Frey, University of Colorado,
USA and Kenneth N. Cissna, University of South
Florida, USA
August 2011: 312pp
Hb: 978-0-8058-6286-7: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99414-9: £32.99
eBook: 978-0-203-18102-7
2009: 712pp
Hb: 978-0-8058-4983-7: £165.00
Pb: 978-0-8058-4984-4: £45.00
eBook: 978-0-203-87164-5
19
C OM M UNI CATION AND THEORY RESEARC H
20
ICA Communication Yearbooks
The Communication Yearbook annuals publish diverse, state-of-the-discipline, literature reviews that advance knowledge and
understanding of communication systems, processes, and impacts across the discipline. Sponsored by the International Communication
Association, each volume provides a forum for the exchange of interdisciplinary and internationally diverse scholarship relating to
communication in its many forms. More information about Communication Yearbooks 6 through 35 can be viewed online at:
www.routledge.com/icabooks.
28 Volume Set
NEW
Communication Yearbooks Volumes 6–33 Set
Communication Yearbook 35
The Communication Yearbook annuals originally published between 1977 and 2009 publish
diverse, state-of-the-discipline literature reviews that advance knowledge and understanding of
communication systems, processes, and impacts across the discipline.
Edited by Charles T. Salmon, Michigan State University, USA
November 2011: 234 x 156: 668pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88009-1: £2965.00
eBook: 978-0-203-80297-7
Communication Yearbook 35 continues the tradition of publishing state-of-the-discipline
literature reviews and essays. Editor Charles T. Salmon presents a volume that is highly
international and interdisciplinary in scope, with authors and chapters representing the
broad global interests of the International Communication Association.
May 2011: 229 x 152: 496pp
Hb: 978-0-415-89227-8: £95.00
eBook: 978-0-203-81417-8
Also availabl
e in
eBook form
at
TitleEditor
HB ISBN
Price
Michael Burgoon
978-0-415-87681-0
£140.00
Robert N. Bostrom
978-0-415-87682-7
£140.00
Robert N. Bostrom
978-0-415-87683-4
£130.00
Margaret L. McLaughlin
978-0-415-87684-1
£130.00
Margaret L. McLaughlin
978-0-415-87691-9
£130.00
James A. Anderson
978-0-415-87692-6
£110.00
James A. Anderson
978-0-415-87320-8
£120.00
James A. Anderson
978-0-415-87693-3
£100.00
James A. Anderson
978-0-415-87319-2
£110.00
Stanley A. Deetz
978-0-415-87694-0
£110.00
Stanley A. Deetz
978-0-415-87695-7
£110.00
Stanley A. Deetz
978-0-415-87657-5
£110.00
Brant R. Burleson
978-0-415-87318-5
£100.00
Brant R. Burleson
978-0-415-87317-8
£90.00
Brant R. Burleson
978-0-415-87316-1
£90.00
Michael Roloff
978-0-415-87315-4
£100.00
Michael Roloff
978-0-415-87314-7
£100.00
Michael Roloff
978-0-415-87313-0
£90.00
William B. Gudykunst
978-0-415-87312-3
£100.00
978-0-8058-4034-6
£95.00
978-0-8058-4437-5
£95.00
Pamela J. Kalbfleisch
978-0-8058-4819-9
£95.00
978-0-8058-5121-2
£95.00
978-0-8058-5581-4
£95.00
Christina S. Beck
978-0-8058-6015-3
£95.00
Christina S. Beck
978-0-8058-6358-1
£95.00
Christina S. Beck
978-0-415-98859-9
£95.00
Christina S. Beck
978-0-415-99961-8
£95.00
Charles T. Salmon
978-0-415-87857-9
£85.00
Every ICA member receives a generous discount on purchases of these titles. To purchase at the ICA member price, please log in to the ICA’s Members Only page at:
www.icahdq.org to retrieve the discount code.
Companion Website
CO MMUNICATION AND l an g uage
Communication
and Language
New
Discourse Analysis
Edited by James Paul Gee, Arizona State University,
USA and Michael Handford, University of Tokyo,
Japan
Series: Routledge Handbooks in Applied Linguistics
Discourse Analysis covers the
major approaches to discourse
analysis from Critical Discourse
Analysis to Multimodal Discourse
Analysis and their applications in
key educational and institutional
settings. This book is divided
into six sections: Approaches to
Discourse Analysis, Approaches
to Spoken Discourse, Genres
and Practices, Educational
Applications, Institutional Applications, and Identity,
Culture and Discourse.
New
New in 2012
The Language and Intercultural
Communication Reader
Communicating in English
Edited by Zhu Hua, Birkbeck College, University of
London, UK
Edited by Daniel Allington and Barbara Mayor,
both at The Open University, UK
Reflecting the international nature of the field, this
Reader covers a wide range of language and cultural
contexts: Arabic, Chinese, English (British, American,
Australian and South African), Greek, Hebrew, Japanese,
Samoan and Spanish. Divided into six parts, it covers:
Culture, Language and Thought; Cultural Approaches to
Discourse and Pragmatics; Communication Patterns
Across Cultures; Teaching and Learning Cultural
Variations of Language Use; and Interculturality and
Intercultural Communication in Professional Contexts.
With twenty-two readings by eminent authorities in the
field as well as cutting-edge materials representing
current developments, the book explores the breadth
and depth of the subject as well as providing an essential
overview for both students and researchers.
Series: Worlds of English
Each part begins with a clear and comprehensive
introduction, and is enhanced by discussion questions,
study activities and further reading sections. Alongside a
comprehensive Resource List, detailing important
reference books, journals, organisations and websites
and an annotated Glossary of key terms, the final
section offers advice on how to carry out research in
Language and Intercultural Communication.
Talk, Text, Technology
Communicating in English: Talk,
Text, Technology looks at how
people use spoken and written
English to communicate in their
everyday lives.
Exploring the complex
relationship between
communication, technology and
the English language, this book
offers the reader practical insights
into the analysis of speech and
writing. A wide range of examples is provided, ranging
from text messages and domestic quarrels to the works of
Shakespeare and the words of Martin Luther King.
This book takes a fresh look at established topics such as
rhetoric, language acquisition, and professional
communication, as well as covering exciting new fields
such as everyday creativity, digital media, and the history
of the book. Key theoretical concepts are introduced in
an accessible manner, and the reader is given an
in-depth understanding of English-language
communication in its social and historical contexts.
Chapters are written by a wide range of contributors
from around the world, each a leading researcher in
their respective field, which have been closely edited by
James Paul Gee and Michael Handford. With a focus on
the application of discourse analysis to real-life problems,
the contributors introduce the reader to a topic, and
analyse authentic data.
Hb: 978-0-415-54912-7: £90.00
Pb: 978-0-415-54913-4: £25.99
eBook: 978-0-203-83152-6
Communicating in English: Talk, Text, Technology is
essential reading for all students of English Language
Studies or Communication Studies.
March 2012: 416pp
Hb: 978-0-415-67422-5: £90.00
Pb: 978-0-415-67423-2: £24.99
The Routledge Handbook of Discourse Analysis is vital
reading for linguistics students as well as other areas where
discourse analysis is studied, from communication and
cultural studies to social psychology and anthropology.
New in 2012
New
Hb: 978-0-415-55107-6: £115.00
Exploring Professional
Communication
Language in Action
New in 2012
Discourse Analysis
A Resource Book for Students
Series: Routledge English Language Introductions
Stephanie Schnurr, University of Warwick, UK
Series: Routledge Introductions to Applied Linguistics
Adopting the “back to front” approach of the series,
Exploring Professional Communication starts with real-life
problems and issues, enters into a discussion of intervention
and how to engage with these concerns and concludes by
tying the practical issues to theoretical foundations.
Divided into ten chapters, each dealing with a specific area
of professional communication, the book addresses
important questions such as:
Routledge English Language Introductions cover core areas
of language study and are one-stop resources for students.
•What is professional communication?
Assuming no prior knowledge, books in the series offer an
accessible overview of the subject, with activities, study
questions, sample analyses, commentaries and key
readings, all in the same volume. The innovative and
flexible ’two dimensional’ structure is built around four
sections, introduction, development, exploration and
extension, which offer self-contained stages for study. Each
topic can also be read across these sections, enabling the
reader to build gradually on the knowledge gained. Each
book in the series has a Companion Website with extra
resources for teachers, lecturers and students.
•What are the key topics relevant for an understanding of
the field?
January 2012: 256pp
Hb: 978-0-415-60999-9: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-61000-1: £18.99
•Why study it?
•What does an applied linguistics approach have to offer
to the study of professional communication?
Exploring Professional Communication takes an interactive
approach that is reflected in the numerous examples of
authentic discourse data discussed throughout the book.
These are taken from a variety of different written and
spoken professional contexts. The book also provides many
activities and exercises, a glossary of key terms and an
annotated further reading section.
May 2012: 288pp
Hb: 978-0-415-58481-4: £85.00
Pb: 978-0-415-58483-8: £22.99
3rd Edition
Growing Up with Two
Languages
A Practical Guide for the Bilingual Family
Una Cunningham, Stockholm University, Sweden
The lives of many families involve
contact with more than one
language and culture on a daily
basis. Growing Up with Two
Languages is aimed at the many
parents and professionals who
feel uncertain about the best
way to go about helping children
gain maximum benefit from the
multilingual situation.
This best-selling guide is
illustrated by glimpses of life
from interviews with fifty
families from all around the world. The trials and
rewards of life with two languages and cultures are
discussed in detail, and followed by practical advice on
how to support the child’s linguistic development.
June 2011: 208pp
Hb: 978-0-415-59851-4: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-59852-1: £17.99
21
m ed ia st u die s
22
Media Studies
New
Fourth Edition
Media
Today
An Introduction to Mass Communication
Joseph Turow, University of Pennsylvania, USA
Media Today puts students at the center of the profound changes in the twenty-first century media world,
from digital convergence to media ownership, and gives them the skills to think critically about what these
changes mean for the role of media in their lives.
Media Today, Fourth Edition is built around four key concepts:
•a media systems approach allows students to understand the interconnected cultural, political, and economic forces that shape media they encounter every day
•unique insights into media trends give students an insider’s perspective on how media industries are responding to changes from globalization to social networking
•focus on digital convergence shows in each chapter how digital media is transforming traditional mass media such as newspapers, magazines, and television
•a media literacy goal encourages and builds critical skills to make students more informed and engaged citizens in our media-driven society.
Completely revised with updated examples, new case studies, and new online video resources, the fourth edition of Media Today connects the latest trends, debates, and technologies to
the history of media, highlighting the impact and meaning of today’s changes to the media landscape, especially how traditional industries have blurred together with digital convergence.
Additional learning resources including a new set of online video resources, interactive quizzes, study resources, and instructor guides are available on the free Companion Website at:
www.routledge.com/textbooks/mediatoday4e.
Selected Contents: I. Understanding the Nature of Mass Media 1. Understanding Mass Media and the Importance of Media Literacy 2. Making Sense of the Media Business 3. Controls on Media
Content: Government Regulation, Self-Regulation, and Ethics 4. Making Sense of Research on Media Effects and Media Culture II. Media Giants and Cross-Media Activities 5. A World of Blurred
Media Boundaries 6. Understanding the Strategies of Media Giants III. The Print Media 7. The Book Industry 8. The Newspaper Industry 9. The Magazine Industry IV. The Electronic Media 10. The
Recording Industry 11. The Radio Industry 12. The Movie Industry 13. The Television Industry 14. The Internet and Video Game Industries V. Advertising and Public Relations 15. The Advertising
Industry 16. The Public Relations Industry
5th Edition
The Media
Student’s Book
Gill Branston, Cardiff University, UK
with Roy Stafford
’This book does precisely what you
want a textbook to do. It brings
students to a wide range of concepts,
issues and debates in media studies
and sets them within critical, yet
accessible, contexts. Through a guided
and fully illustrated tour of textual,
political, economic, social,
technological and regulatory concerns
the reader is encouraged to grasp the
fundamentals of the field. It is littered
with both contemporary and classic examples, links to online resources and
probing questions to both cement understanding and challenge assumptions. It
is effortless to read and should be the bread and butter of every media student’s
diet.’ – Natalie Fenton, Goldsmiths, University of London, UK
’The fifth edition of The Media Student’s Book is the best edition yet. Its
reorganized and revised contents make the material more accessible and also
provide valuable updated overviews of contemporary developments in both
new and longer-standing forms of media. One of the book’s major strengths is
its combination of detailed up-to-date accounts of contemporary media forms
together with a deeper historical and theoretical perspective. The widespread
inclusion of discussions and case studies on media texts and genres which have
emerged since the fourth edition also ensures the book’s continuing ability to
dialogue with media students and to provide a focused account of the
contemporary media landscape.’ – Hilary Dannenberg, University of Trier, Germany
The Media Student’s Book is a comprehensive introduction for students of media
studies. It covers all the key topics and provides a detailed, lively and accessible guide
to concepts and debates.
Now in its fifth edition, this bestselling textbook has been thoroughly revised,
re-ordered and updated, with many very recent examples and expanded coverage of
the most important issues currently facing media studies. It is structured in three main
parts, addressing key concepts, debates, and research skills, methods and resources.
Each chapter includes a range of examples to work with, sometimes as short case
studies. They are also supported by separate, longer case studies which include:
Slumdog Millionaire, online access for film and music, CSI and detective fictions, Let
the Right One In, The Orphanage, PBS, BBC, HBO, images of migration, The Age of
Stupid and climate change politics.
The authors are experienced in writing, researching and teaching across different levels
of undergraduate study, with an awareness of the needs of students. The book is
specially designed to be easy and stimulating to use, with:
•a Companion Website
•margin terms, definitions, photos, references (and even jokes), allied to a
comprehensive glossary
•follow-up activities in ’Explore’ boxes
•suggestions for further reading and online research
•references and examples from a rich range of media and media forms, including
advertising, cinema, games, the Internet, magazines, newspapers, photography,
radio, and television.
The Companion Website includes popular chapters from previous editions, extra case
studies and further resources for teaching and learning, and is available at:
www.mediastudentsbook.com.
2010: 488pp • Hb: 978-0-415-55841-9: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-55842-6: £24.99 • eBook: 978-0-203-85064-0
Companion Website
m e di a s tud i e s
New
2nd Edition
A Handbook of Media and Communication Research
Qualitative and Quantitative Methodologies
Edited by Klaus Bruhn Jensen, University of
Copenhagen, Denmark
The second edition of the Handbook has been thoroughly updated with reference to
the development of the Internet, mobile, and other digital media.
’An authoritative, stimulating and rigorous
survey of diverse research traditions in
media and communications. The emphasis
on identifying the potential for
convergence across these traditions is both
original and welcome.’ – Sonia Livingstone,
London School of Economics and Political
Science, UK
•Each chapter addresses shifting configurations of established media organizations,
media discourses, and media users in networked practices of communication.
A Handbook of Media and Communication
Research presents qualitative as well as
quantitative approaches to the study of media
and communication, integrating perspectives
from both the social sciences and the
humanities. Taking methodology as a strategic
level of analysis that joins practical concerns
with theoretical issues, the Handbook offers a comprehensive and in-depth review of
the field and a set of guidelines for how to think about, plan, and carry out media and
communication studies in different social and cultural contexts.
•The introduction and one further chapter probe changing conceptions on mass and
interpersonal, online and offline communication in research as in everyday life.
•Three new chapters have been added to exemplify different forms of research
employing multiple methods to study multiple media in multiple contexts.
Contributors include: Barrie Gunter, Stig Hjarvard, Klaus Bruhn Jensen, Peter Larsen,
Amanda D. Lotz, Graham Murdock, Horace Newcomb, Kim Christian Schroder, Paddy
Scannell and Gaye Tuchman.
Hb: 978-0-415-60965-4: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-60966-1: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-35725-5
Key Readings in Media Today
New in 2012
New in 2012
Mass Communication in Contexts
3rd Edition
Edited by Brooke Erin Duffy, Temple University, USA
and Joseph Turow, University of Pennsylvania, USA
Mediating the Message
Qualitative Research Methods
for Media Studies
Key Readings in Media Today
provides both historical and
contemporary analyses of each
of the major media industries:
book, newspaper, magazine,
sound recording/radio, motion
picture, television, new media,
advertising, and public relations.
The volume places an emphasis
on convergence, looking at the
ways boundaries between these
media industries are blurring in
surprising new ways. Section introductions and
headnotes for each article offer valuable critical and
historical context, while review questions after each
reading test students’ understanding of key concepts.
Additional resources on the Companion Website
(www.routledge.com/textbooks/9780415876087)
are designed to spark classroom discussion and connect
the readings to the latest contemporary media issues
and controversies. By combining classic studies of mass
communication with contemporary research on media,
technology, and culture, Key Readings in Media Today
will help students to make sense of the rapidly changing
media environment.
Theories of Influences on Mass Media
Content
Pamela J. Shoemaker, Syracuse University, USA and
Stephen D. Reese, University of Texas at Austin, USA
Hailed as one of the ’most significant books of the
twentieth century’ by Journalism and Mass
Communication Quarterly, this new edition of the classic
media sociology textbook now offers students a
comprehensive, theoretical approach to media content
in the twenty-first century, with an added focus on
entertainment media and the Internet.
An Introduction
Bonnie S. Brennen, Marquette University, USA
This book introduces the essential qualitative methods
used in media research, with an emphasis on integrating
theory with practice. Each method is introduced through
step-by-step instruction on conducting research and
interpreting research findings, alongside in-depth
discussions of the historical, cultural, and theoretic
context of the particular method and case studies drawn
from published scholarship. This text is a comprehensive
and accessible introduction to qualitative methods, ideal
for media and mass communication research courses.
August 2012: 320pp
Hb: 978-0-415-98913-8: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-98914-5: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-93043-4
August 2012: 400pp
Hb: 978-0-415-89021-2: £110.00
Pb: 978-0-415-89022-9: £37.99
2008: 496pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99204-6: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99205-3: £29.99
New in 2012
Teaching Media and
Communication Studies
Pedagogy and Practice
Jan Fernback, Temple University, USA
From course building to learning assessment, Teaching
Media and Communication Studies offers instructors at
all levels strategies they can use to create a successful
classroom experience. The book provides an overview of
teaching philosophies, pedagogical methods, practical
classroom advice, and more, it is an invaluable guide to
teaching media and communication courses.
June 2012: 256pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88663-5: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88664-2: £24.99
Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/media
23
m ed ia st u die s
24
New in 2012
Shaping Inquiry in Culture,
Studies
The Media Studies Reader
Edited by Laurie Ouellette, University of Minnesota,
USA
The Media Studies Reader is a broad and accessible
anthology that addresses the key topics, debates and
theoretical perspectives associated with the
interdisciplinary field of media studies. Emphasizing
critical and cultural approaches, the collection presents
foundational essays by leading scholars alongside the
most influential new writing in media studies today.
Defining media in the widest sense, chapters address
traditional mass media (film, television, print) as well as
new media technologies and practices (interactive
games, social networking sites).
Covering topics including culture, technology,
representation, industry, identity, audience, and
citizenship, The Media Studies Reader provides students
an entry point into the critical media studies tradition. A
map of a rapidly growing – and changing – field, it will
be an invaluable resource to students as well as
established scholars.
March 2012: 592pp
Hb: 978-0-415-80124-9: £95.00
Pb: 978-0-415-80125-6: £32.99
Series Editor: Barbie Zelizer, University
of Pennsylvania, USA
New
Making the University Matter
Edited by Barbie Zelizer, University of Pennsylvania,
USA
Making the University Matter
investigates how academics
situate themselves
simultaneously in the university
and the world and how doing
so affects the viability of the
university setting.
New in 2012
The collection is introduced
with an essay by the editor and
each section has a brief
introduction to contextualise
the essays and highlight the
issues they raise.
Media Studies: The Basics
Julian McDougall, Newman University College, UK
Series: The Basics
•Who, or what, is the media?
•What are the key terms and concepts used in analysing
media?
•What has been the impact of the globalization of
media?
•Who is making media in the twenty-first century?
Featuring case studies from around the world, a glossary
and suggestions for further reading, this is the ideal
introduction to media studies today.
June 2012: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-68126-1: £55.00
Pb: 978-0-415-68125-4: £11.99
Global Perspectives
Edited by Marwan M. Kraidy and Katherine
Sender, both at University of Pennsylvania, USA
Dedicated to bringing to the foreground the
central impulses by which we engage in
inquiry, the Shaping Inquiry in Culture,
Communication and Media Studies series
attempts to make explicit the ways in which
we craft our intellectual grasp of the world.
There have been seismic shifts in what constitutes (the)
media in recent years with technological advances
ushering in whole new categories of producers,
consumers and modes of delivery. This has been
reflected in the way media is studied too with new issues
and ideas coming to the fore. Media Studies: The Basics
is the ideal guide to this changing landscape and
addresses core questions including:
The Politics of Reality
Television
The Politics of Reality Television
encompasses an international
selection of expert contributions
who consider the specific ways
media migrations test our
understanding of, and means of
investigating, reality television
across the globe.
2010: 240pp
Hb: 978-0-415-58824-9: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-58825-6: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-84356-7
The Changing Faces of
Journalism
Tabloidization, Technology and Truthiness
Barbie Zelizer, University of Pennsylvania, USA
June 2011: 272pp
Hb: 978-0-415-78239-5: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-78240-1: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-81302-7
New
Communication Matters
Materialist Approaches to Media, Mobility
and Networks
Edited by Jeremy Packer and Stephen B. Crofts
Wiley, both at North Carolina State University, USA
Communication has often been understood as a realm of
immaterial, insubstantial phenomena, images, messages,
thoughts, languages, cultures, and ideologies, mediating
our embodied experience of the concrete world.
Communication Matters challenges this view, assembling
leading scholars in the fields of Communication, Rhetoric,
and English to focus on the materiality of communication.
Building on the work of materialist theorists such as Gilles
Deleuze, Michel Foucault, Friedrich Kittler, and Henri
Lefebvre, the essays collected here examine the materiality
of discourse itself and the constitutive force of
communication in the production of the real.
2009: 192pp
Hb: 978-0-415-77824-4: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-77825-1: £22.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87845-3
Explorations in Communication
and History
USA
October 2011: 304pp
Hb: 978-0-415-78224-1: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-78225-8: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-18109-6
2008: 240pp
Hb: 978-0-415-77733-9: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-77734-6: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-88860-5
Companion Website
New
New
4th Edition
Edited by Mary Celeste Kearney, University of
Texas at Austin, USA
is an essential text for those
interested in gender and media
studies, its main topics,
debates, and theoretical
approaches. The primary
objective of this collection is to
expand readers’ knowledge of
how gender operates within
media culture through
engagement with foundational
writings as well as more
contemporary research in this field. Taking a
multiperspectival approach that considers gender
broadly and examines media texts alongside their
production and consumption, The Gender and Media
Reader enables readers’ critical thinking about how
gender is constructed, contested, and subverted in
different sites within media culture. Along with the main
introduction, individual section introductions facilitate
readers’ understanding of the development of gender
and media studies by contextualizing the various topics,
debates, and theoretical approaches that have shaped it,
as well as by highlighting current trends.
August 2011: 728pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99345-6: £120.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99346-3: £39.99
After the Media
Culture and Identity in the 21st Century
Peter Bennett, University of Wolverhampton, UK,
Alex Kendall, Birmingham City University, UK and
Julian McDougall, Newman University College, UK
This provocative text considers
the state of media and cultural
studies today after the
demolition of the traditional
media paradigm, and engages
with the new, active consumer
culture.
Media Studies, particularly
within schools, has until
recently been concerned with
mass media and the effects of
’the media’ in society and on
people. As new media
technology has blurred the boundaries between the
audience and the media, the status of this area of
education is threatened. Whilst some have called for a
drastic re-think (Media Studies 2.0), others have called
for caution, arguing that the power dynamics of
ownership and gate keeping are left intact.
This book uses cultural and technological change as a
context for a more forensic exploration of the traditional
dependence on the idea of ’the media’ as one
homogenous unit. It suggests that it would be liberating
for students, teachers and academics to depart from
such a model and shift the focus to people and how
they create culture in this contemporary ’mediascape’.
A Student Guide
Greg Smith, Georgia State University, USA
John Hartley, Queensland University of Technology,
Australia
Series: Routledge Key Guides
This fourth edition of
Communication, Cultural and
Media Studies: The Key Concepts
is an indispensible guide to the
most important terms in the
field. It offers clear explanations
of the key concepts, exploring
their origins, what they’re used
for and why they provoke
discussion. The author provides a
multi-disciplinary explanation
and assessment of the key
concepts, from ’authorship’ to
’censorship’; ’creative industries’ to ’network theory’;
and ’complexity’ to ’visual culture’.
June 2011: 288pp
Hb: 978-0-415-55075-8: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-56323-9: £16.99
Media Convergence
The Three Degrees of Network, Mass and
Interpersonal Communication
New
Communication, Cultural and
Media Studies: The Key
Concepts
What Media Classes Really
Want to Discuss
Klaus Bruhn Jensen, University of Copenhagen,
Denmark
’In this compact and smart
volume, Klaus Bruhn Jensen
has done two essential
things: shown us how rich
the pragmatist tradition is
for understanding
communication and torn
down the Berlin wall
between interpersonal and
mass communication. Media
Convergence provides us
with a trusty Virgil for
navigating the digital
jungle!’ – John D. Peters, University of Iowa, USA
The development of digital media presents a unique
opportunity to reconsider what communication is, and
what individuals, groups, and societies might hope to
accomplish through new as well as old media. At a time
when digital media still provoke both utopian and
dystopian views of their likely consequences, Klaus
Bruhn Jensen places these ’new’ media in a comparative
perspective together with ’old’ mass media and
face-to-face communication, restating the two classic
questions of media studies: what do media do to
people, and what do people do with media?
What Media Classes Really
Want To Discuss focuses on
topics that introductory
textbooks generally ignore,
although they are prominent in
students’ minds. Using
approachable prose, this book
will give students a more
precise critical language to
discuss ’common sense’
phenomena about media.
The book acknowledges that students begin
introductory film and television courses thinking they
already know a great deal about the subject. What
Media Classes Really Want To Discuss provides students
with a solid starting point for discussing their
assumptions critically and encourages the reader to
argue with the book, furthering the ’discussion’ on
media in everyday life and in the classroom.
2010: 168pp
Hb: 978-0-415-77811-4: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-77812-1: £14.99
eBook: 978-0-203-84642-1
Everyday Pornography
Edited by Karen Boyle, University of Glasgow, UK
Public and academic debate
about ’porn culture’ is
proliferating. Ironically, what is
often lost in these debates is a
sense of what is specific about
pornography. By focusing on
pornography’s mainstream
– contemporary commercial
products for a heterosexual
male audience – Everyday
Pornography offers the
opportunity to reconsider what
it is that makes pornography a
specific form of industrial practice and genre of
representation.
Everyday Pornography presents original work from
scholars from a range of academic disciplines (Media
Studies, Law, Sociology, Psychology, Women’s Studies,
Political Science), introducing new methodologies and
approaches whilst reflecting on the ongoing value of
older approaches.
This collection places a particular emphasis on
anti-pornography feminism, a movement which has
been experiencing a revival since the mid-2000s.
Drawing on the experiences of activists alongside
academics, Everyday Pornography offers an opportunity
to explore the intellectual and political challenges of
anti-pornography feminism and consider its relevance
for contemporary academic debate.
2010: 208pp
Hb: 978-0-415-48203-5: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-48204-2: £22.99
eBook: 978-0-203-85548-5
2010: 256pp
Hb: 978-0-415-54378-1: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-54379-8: £23.99
eBook: 978-0-203-84755-8
May 2011: 272pp
Hb: 978-0-415-58682-5: £85.00
Pb: 978-0-415-58683-2: £26.99
eBook: 978-0-203-81788-9
25
m ed ia st u die s
26
Paranormal Media
Audiences, Spirits and Magic in Popular
Culture
Annette Hill, Lund University, Sweden
Paranormal Media offers a unique, timely exploration of
the extraordinary, unexplained and supernatural in
popular culture, looking in unusual places in order to
understand this phenomenon. Early spirit forms such as
magic lantern shows or the spirit photograph are
re-imagined as a search for extraordinary experiences in
reality TV, ghost tourism, and live shows. Through a
popular cultural ethnography, and critical analysis in
social and cultural theory, this ground-breaking book by
Annette Hill presents an original and rigorous
examination of people’s experiences of spirits and magic.
In popular culture, people are players in an orchestral
movement about what happens to us when we die. In a
very real sense the audience is the show. This book is the
story of audiences and their participation in a show
about matters of life and death.
Paranormal Media will be a highly interesting read for
undergraduate and postgraduate students, as well as
academics, on a wide range of television, media, cultural
studies, and sociology courses.
2010: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-54462-7: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-54463-4: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-83639-2
The John Fiske Collection
These revised editions of now classic texts
by John Fiske each include a new
introduction by Henry Jenkins, explaining
‘Why Fiske Still Matters for today’ ís
students, followed by a discussion between
former Fiske students, and now leading
academics in their own right, to introduce
and discuss the individual volumes
specifically. These discussions include
contributions from: Ron Becker, Aniko
Bodroghkozy, Steve Classen, Kevin Glynn,
Jonathan Gray, Elana Levine, Jason Mittell,
Darell Newton, Greg Smith and Pamela
Wilson. All essays underline the continuing
relevance of these foundational texts for the
fields of media and communication studies.
Television Culture
Edited by Vicki Mayer, Tulane University, USA,
Miranda J. Banks, Emerson College, USA and
John T. Caldwell, UCLA, USA
2009: 264pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99795-9: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99796-6: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87959-7
Media Literacy
New Agendas in Communication
Edited by Kathleen Tyner, University of Texas at
Austin, USA
Designed as a companion to
Understanding Popular Culture,
Reading the Popular gives the lie
to theories that portray a mass
audience that mindlessly
consumes every product it is
offered.
2010: 256pp
Hb: 978-0-415-59650-3: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-59651-0: £19.99
eBook: 978-0-203-83725-2
Understanding Popular Culture
John Fiske
A comprehensive introduction to
television studies. Fiske analyzes
both the economic and cultural
aspects of television and
investigates it in terms of both
theory and text based criticism.
2009: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99661-7: £85.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99662-4: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-88343-3
Cultural Studies of Media Industries
John Fiske
John Fiske
Edited by Janet Staiger and Sabine Hake, both at
University of Texas at Austin, USA
Production Studies
Reading the Popular
2nd Edition
2nd Edition
Convergence Media History
2nd Edition
2010: 424pp
Hb: 978-0-415-59646-6: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-59647-3: £19.99
eBook: 978-0-203-83715-3
Designed as a companion to
Reading the Popular,
Understanding Popular Culture
presents a radically different
theory of what it means for
culture to be popular: that it is,
literally, of the people.
2010: 232pp
Hb: 978-0-415-59652-7: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-59653-4: £19.99
eBook: 978-0-203-83717-7
3rd Edition
Introduction to Communication
Studies
John Fiske
Fiske’s essential text aims to
equip the reader with a range of
methods of analysing examples
of communication in our society,
together with a critical
awareness of the theories
underpinning them.
All four classic texts are
available in paperback at a
special price of £65.00.
www.routledge.
com/9780415601191
2009: 256pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87220-1: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-87221-8: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-86727-3
2010: 256pp
Hb: 978-0-415-59648-0: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-59649-7: £19.99
eBook: 978-0-203-83738-2
Companion Website
Communication and Society
Series Editor: James Curran,
Goldsmiths, University of London, UK
This series encompasses the broad field of
media and cultural studies. Its main
concerns are the media and the public
sphere: on whether the media empower or
fail to empower popular forces in society;
media organizations and public policy; the
political and social consequences of media
campaigns; and the role of media
entertainment, ranging from potboilers
and the human interest story to rock music
and TV sport.
New in 2012
Critical Political Economy of
the Media
An Introduction
Media Perspectives for the 21st
Century
Edited by Stylianos Papathanassopoulos,
University of Athens, Greece
Media Perspectives for the 21st
Century brings together key
international scholars to explore
concepts, topics and issues
concerning the communication
environment in contemporary
democratic societies. It
combines qualitative and
quantitative approaches to
provide an interdisciplinary and
truly global perspective that
reflects the trends, theories and
issues in current media and
communication research.
2010: 264pp
Hb: 978-0-415-57498-3: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-57499-0: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-83407-7
Also available in this series:
Jonathan Hardy
What part do the media play in the democratic processes
of society? What influences the media? How do
different societies organise their media systems? Where
does power over the media lie? To what extent do ‘new
media’ change things? Critical Political Economy of the
Media aims to answer these key questions, providing
students with a broad-ranging, accessible introduction to
the international political economy of media.
Hb: 978-0-415-54483-2: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-54484-9: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-13622-5
New
Media and Democracy
Cultural and media studies are now
well-established as important academic
disciplines and are inspiring new research
into a wide range of pertinent issues. This
series presents outstanding research in
international communication, cultural, and
media studies.
New in 2012
Sport Beyond Television
The Internet, Digital Media and the Rise of
Networked Media Sport
Brett Hutchins, Monash University, Australia and
David Rowe, University of Western Sydney, Australia
Computers, the Internet, Web, mobile, and other digital
media are increasingly important technologies in the
production and consumption of sports media. Sport
Beyond Television analyzes the changes that have given
rise to this situation, combining theoretical insights with
original evidence collected through extensive research
and interviews with people working in the media and
sport industries. It locates sports media as a pivotal
component in online content economies and cultures,
and counteracts the scant scholarly attention to sports
media when compared to music, film and publishing in
convergent media cultures.
• Misunderstanding the Internet,
p. 34
• Political Communication and Social Theory, p. 9
• Journalism After September 11,
p. 53
• Changing Journalism,
p. 53
•News and Journalism in the UK,
p. 53
January 2012: 228pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88718-2: £80.00
For a full list of titles in this series, visit:
www.routledge.com/books/series/SE0130.
Cultural Technologies, Mobile
Communication, and the iPhone
James Curran, Goldsmiths, University of London, UK
Routledge Research in Cultural
and Media Studies
Media and Democracy
addresses key topics and
themes in relation to
democratic theory, media and
technology, comparative media
studies, media and history, and
the evolution of media research.
Professor Curran provides both
a clear introduction to media
research, written for university
undergraduates studying in
different countries, and an
innovative analysis written by
one of the field’s leading scholars.
March 2011: 272pp
Hb: 978-0-415-31706-1: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-31707-8: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-40687-8
New in 2012
Studying Mobile Media
Edited by Larissa Hjorth, RMIT University, Australia,
Jean Burgess, Queensland University of Technology,
Australia and Ingrid Richardson, Murdoch
University, Australia
This international, interdisciplinary collection explores a
range of possible theoretical and empirical approaches
to cultural technologies and mobile communication by
treating the iPhone as a case study. As the mobile phone
graduates into a fully web-capable and multi-media
device, the contributors to this volume critically examine
the nature and implications of this shift, considering the
iPhone as a significant moment in media history.
January 2012: 256pp
Hb: 978-0-415-89534-7: £80.00
Turn over for more titles in
this series:
27
m ed ia st u die s
28
Routledge Research in Cultural
and Media Studies continued...
New
New
Science Fiction Film and
Television
Artificial Culture
Identity, Technology, and Bodies
New in 2012
Adaptation Across the Screens
Tama Leaver, Curtin University, Australia
Forensic Science in
Contemporary American
Popular Culture
Edited by Jay Telotte and Gerald Duchovnay,
Texas A&M University, USA
Artificial Culture is an examination of the articulation,
construction, and representation of ’the artificial’ in
contemporary popular cultural texts, especially science
fiction films and novels. The book argues that mapping
our cultural understanding of the artificial simultaneously
reveals a great deal about what it means to be human.
Gender, Crime and Science
Lindsay Steenberg, University of East Anglia, UK
This book identifies, traces, and interrogates contemporary
American culture’s seemingly endless fascination with
forensic science, looking specifically at the gendered nature
of expert scientific knowledge, as embodied by the
ubiquitous character of the female investigator.
June 2012: 256pp
Hb: 978-0-415-89188-2: £80.00
New
Global Perspectives on Tarzan
From King of the Jungle to International Icon
Selected Contents: Introduction: Across the Screens:
Adaptation, Boundaries, and Science Fiction Film and Television,
J. P. Telotte Part I: Cross-Screen Dynamics 1. Domesticating
Space: Science Fiction Serials Come Home, Cynthia J. Miller 2.
The Cinematic Zone of The Twilight Zone, J. P. Telotte 3. Voyage
to the Bottom of the Sea: Big-Screen Spectacle and Compressed
Television Images, Mary Pharr Part II: Case Studies: Film to
Television 4. Finding Sanctuary: Adapting Logan’s Run to
Television, Gerald Duchovnay 5. Stargate SG-1 and the
Visualization of the Imagination, Sherryl Vint 6. She’s Just a Girl:
A Cyborg Passes in The Sarah Conner Chronicles, Lorrie Palmer
Part III: Case Studies: Television to Film 7. Star Trek and the
Birth of a Film Franchise, M. Keith Booker 8. ’I want to believe
the truth is out there’: The X-Files and the Impossibility of
Knowing, Rodney F. Hill 9. Serenity, Genre, and Cinematization,
J. P. Telotte Part IV: Issues in Science Fiction Adaptation 10.
Doctor Who: Adaptations and Flows, Mark Bould 11. Dèjà Vu
All Over Again? Cowboy Bebop’s Transformation to the Big
Screen, Michelle Onley Pirkle 12. Fan Films, Adaptations, and
Media Literacy, Chuck Tryon
August 2011: 242pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88719-9: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-80572-5
Edited by Annette Wannamaker, Eastern Michigan
University, USA and Michelle Abate, Hollins
University, USA
The essays in this volume, written by scholars from
Japan, Australia, Singapore, Canada, Israel, India and the
United States seek to understand the long-lasting and
global appeal of Tarzan as an enduring, multi-faceted
global pop culture icon.
New
Hb: 978-0-415-89724-2: £80.00
Simone Murray, Monash University, Australia
Audiobooks, Literature,
and Sound Studies
Edited by Matthew Rubery, Queen Mary, University
of London, UK
Selected Contents: Foreword, Charles Bernstein
Introduction: Talking Books, Matthew Rubery Part 1: Sound
Experiments 1. The Three-Minute Victorian Novel:
Remediating Dickens into Sound, Jason Camlot 2. A Library
on the Air: Literary Dramatization and Orson Welles’s
Mercury Theatre, James Jesson 3. The Audiographic Impulse:
Doing Literature with the Tape Recorder, Jesper Olsson 4.
Poetry by Phone and Phonograph: Tracing the Influence of
Giorno Poetry Systems, Michael S. Hennessey 5.
Soundtracking the Novel: Willy Vlautin’s Northline as Filmic
Audiobook, Justin St. Clair Part 2: Close Listenings 6.
Novelist as “Sound-Thief”: The Audiobooks of John le Carré,
Garrett Stewart 7. Hearing Hardy, Talking Tolstoy: The
Audiobook Narrator’s Voice and Reader Experience, Sara
Knox 8. Talking Books, Toni Morrison, and the
Transformation of Narrative Authority: Two Frameworks, K.C.
Harrisson 9. Obama’s Voices: Performance and Politics on
the Dreams from My Father Audiobook, Jeffrey Severs 10.
Bedtime Storytelling Revisited: Le Père Castor and Children’s
Audiobooks, Brigitte Ouvry-Vial 11. Learning from LibriVox,
Michael Hancher 12. A Preliminary Phenomenology of the
Audiobook, D.E. Wittkower
March 2011: 266pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88352-8: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-81803-9
The Adaptation Industry
The Cultural Economy of Contemporary
Literary Adaptation
Adaptation constitutes the driving force of contemporary
culture, with stories adapted across an array of media
formats. However, adaptation studies have been
concerned almost exclusively with textual analysis, in
particular with compare-and-contrast studies of
individual novel and film pairings. This has left almost
completely unexamined crucial questions of how
adaptations come to be made, what are the industries
with the greatest stake in making them, and who the
decision-makers are in the adaptation process. This book
constructs an overdue sociology of contemporary literary
adaptation, never losing sight of the material and
institutional dimensions of this powerful process.
August 2011: 272pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99903-8: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-80712-5
Building on the rich foundational work on the figures of
the cyborg and posthuman, this book situates the
artificial in similar terms, but from a nevertheless
distinctly different viewpoint.
Hb: 978-0-415-89916-1: £80.00
New
Art Platforms and Cultural
Production on the Internet
Olga Goriunova, London Metropolitan University, UK
In this book, Goriunova offers a
critical analysis of the processes
that produce digital culture. In
order to understand the
processes that produce culture,
the author introduces the
concept of the art platform, a
specific configuration of creative
passions, codes, events,
individuals and works that are
propelled by cultural currents
and maintained through digitally
native means. Goriunova
provides a new means of understanding the
development of cultural forms on the Internet, placing
the phenomenon of participatory and social networks in
a conceptual and historical perspective, and offering
powerful tools for researching cultural phenomena
overlooked by other approaches.
Hb: 978-0-415-89310-7: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-80214-4
New in 2012
Queer Representation,
Visibility, and Race in American
Film and Television
Screening the Closet
Melanie Kohnen, Georgia Institute of Technology,
USA
This book examines the proliferation of gay, lesbian, and
queer representations in mainstream American media
over the past forty years. Kohnen argues that queer
media visibility has become a narrowly defined category
that upholds normative ideas about sexuality, race, and
the American nation.
April 2012: 228pp
Hb: 978-0-415-89414-2: £80.00
Companion Website
New in 2012
New
Letters, Postcards, Email
Cultural Technologies
Branding Post-Communist
Nations
Technologies of Presence
Marketizing National Identities in the ’New’
Europe
Selected Contents: Introduction: Cultural Technologies in
Cultures of Technology, Göran Bolin Part I. Histories of
Cultural Technologies 1. Reflections on the Algorithmic
Turn in Contemporary Media Systems, William Uricchio 2.
The Compact Disc and Its Culture: Notes on Melancholia, Eric
Rothenbuhler Part II. Epistemologies of Cultural
Technologies 3. Spotting the Satellite Dish: Popularist
Approaches to Infrastructure, Lisa Parks 4. Preserving,
Enclosing, Processing: The Importance of Archives for
Cybernetic Capitalism, Peter Jakobsson and Fredrik
Stiernstedt 5. Search Engines in Practice: Structure and
Culture in Technical Development, Elizabeth van Couvering
6. Peer-to-peer File-sharing Systems: Files, Objects,
Distribution, Mats Bjorkin 7. Epistemology, Culture, and
Technology, Sandra Braman Part III. Uses of Cultural
Technologies 8. Web 2.0 Technologies of the Self, Maria
Bakardjeva and Georgia Gaden 9. Technologies of the
Nation: Building Institutions in Virtual Worlds, Stina
Bengtsson 10. TV Audiences and Surveillance: The Leading
Edge of Disciplining Viewers, Toby Miller 11. The Promise of
Technology: Developing New Forms of Audience Research,
Joke Hermes
2010: 280pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99328-9: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-86215-5
Edited by Nadia Kaneva, University of Denver, USA
April 2012: 256pp
Hb: 978-0-415-89311-4: £80.00
August 2011: 240pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88275-0: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-80681-4
The Shaping of Culture in Media
and Society
Edited by Göran Bolin, Sodertorn University, Sweden
New
Emotions, Genre, and Justice in
Film and Television
Detecting Feeling
Deidre E. Pribram, Molloy College, USA
Emotions, Genre, and Justice in Film and Television
explores textual representations of emotions from a
cultural perspective. It considers emotions as structures of
feeling that are collectively shared and historically
developed, focusing on the justice genres – the generic
network of film and television programs that are
concerned with crime, law, and social order – to examine
how fictional police, detective, and legal stories
participate in collectively realized conceptions of emotion.
April 2011: 162pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99828-4: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-81913-5
Selected Contents:Preface Part I: Promises and Problems
of Post-communist Nation Branding 1. Nation Branding in
Post-communist Europe: Identities, Markets, and Democracy,
Nadia Kaneva 2. Systemic Propaganda and State Branding in
Post-Soviet Eastern Europe, Gerald Sussman 3. Brand
Interrupted: The Impact of Alternative Narrators on Nation
Branding in the Former Second World, Robert A. Saunders
Part II: Agents, Institutions, Practices 4. Redesigning a
Nation: Welcome to E-stonia, 2001-2018, Sue Curry Jansen
5. Who Can Play this Game? The Rise of Nation Branding in
Bulgaria, 2001–2005, Nadia Kaneva 6. Towards Corponationalism: Poland as a Brand, Pawel Surowiec Part III.
Representations, Mediations, Narrations 7. Branding
Slovenia: “You Can’t Spell Slovenia Without Love...”, Zala
Volčič 8. Vampire Branding: Romania’s Dark Destinations,
Alice Bardan and Anikó Imre 9. One Nation, One Brand?
Nation Branding and Identity Reconstruction in Postcommunist Hungary, Laszlo Kulcsár and Young-ok Yum 10.
The Musical (Re)branding of Serbia: Srbija Sounds Global,
Guča, and EXIT, Branislava (Brana) Mijatović.
Aesthetic Practices and Politics
in Media, Music, and Art
Performing Migration
Edited by Rocio G. Davis, Dorothea FischerHornung, Heidelberg University, Germany and
Johanna C. Kardux, University of Leiden, the
Netherlands
2010: 270pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88290-3: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-84472-4
Esther Milne, Swinburne University, Australia
Cognitive Poetics and Cultural
Memory
Russian Literary Mnemonics
Mikhail Gronas, Dartmouth College, USA
2010: 188pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99737-9: £80.00
Violence, Visual Culture, and
the Black Male Body
Cassandra Jackson, The College of New Jersey, USA
2010: 152pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88042-8: £80.00
Cities, Citizens, and
Technologies
Urban Life and Postmodernity
Paula Geyh, Yeshiva University, USA
2009: 264pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99172-8: £80.00
Dynamics and Performativity
of Imagination
International Journalism and
Democracy
The Image Between the Visible and the
Invisible
Civic Engagement Models from Around the
World
Edited by Bernd Huppauf, New York University,
USA and Christoph Wulf, Free University of Berlin,
Germany
Edited by Angela Romano, Queensland University
of Technology, Australia
2009: 386pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99093-6: £90.00
2010: 266pp
Hb: 978-0-415-96110-3: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-85204-0
Trauma and Media
Landscapes of Holocaust
Postmemory
Allen Meek, Massey University, New Zealand
Brett Ashley Kaplan, University of Illinois, USA
2010: 272pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87476-2: £85.00
eBook: 978-0-203-84227-0
Theories, Histories, and Images
2009: 232pp
Hb: 978-0-415-80123-2: £80.00
29
glo ba l media
30
Global Media
New in 2012
Global Media
A Critical Introduction
Joe Straubhaar, University of Texas at Austin, USA, John Jirik, Lehigh University, USA and Shanti Kumar
The authors take as their starting point the assumption that media can only be analyzed in the context of the political, economic, cultural and
technological conjunctures in which they develop, are produced, distributed and consumed. Therefore the focus of this book is on ownership, regulation,
production, distribution and consumption of different electronic media – radio, television, film, the Internet – at the global level, including the various
sub-levels – transnational, cultural-linguistic, regional, national and local – which constitute the global.
This critical textbook:
•develops a new theory of media globalization
•investigates the often very different paths and degrees of globalization of the four main extant forms of electronic mass media – film, radio, television
and the Internet
•analyzes how media globalization plays out in the BRIC countries – Brazil, Russia, India and China – to assess local, national and regional characteristics
of media globalization within the broader theoretical and political economic, cultural and technological contexts introduced in parts I to III of the book.
While the authors believe that on one level the dominance of the global media system embedded in the power of Hollywood, and the US military,
industrial entertainment complex must be recognized as a reality today, they also see that a multi-polar world is developing and that more attention must be played to developing
countries if the emerging trajectory in media globalization is to be recognized, tracked and understood. Thus this text pays special attention to the BRIC countries because, despite
a great deal of economic analysis of their potential to change or perhaps even dominate the future global media landscape, little has been written about them as a group in
media studies.
Aimed at upper level undergraduate and beginning postgraduate students, this text will offer a sophisticated, wide ranging introduction to global media in the twenty-first century.
Hb: 978-0-415-59186-7: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-59187-4: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14367-4
New
New in 2012
NEW
Global Media, Culture, and
Identity
Fifty Key Thinkers on
Globalization
Digital Development in Korea
Theory, Cases, and Approaches
William Coleman, McMaster University, Canada
and Alina Sajed
Myung Oh, Konkuk University, South Korea and
James Larson
Series: Routledge Advances in Korean Studies
This book explores the role of digital information and
communications technology in South Korea’s
development, starting with and building upon the crucial
developments of the 1980s. Its perspective draws on the
information society concept and on a conceptual model
of strategic restructuring of telecommunications. It also
draws on firsthand experience in formulating and
implementing policies. The analysis identifies aspects of
the Korean experience from which developing countries
around the world might benefit.
Edited by Rohit Chopra, Santa Clara University, USA
and Radhika Gajjala, Bowling Green University, USA
This edited volume examines
the ways that global media
shapes relations between place,
culture, and identity. Through
the included essays, Chopra and
Gajjala offer a mix of theoretical
reflections and empirical case
studies that will help readers
understand how the media can
shape cultural identities and,
conversely, how cultural
formations can influence the
political economy of global
media. The interdisciplinary, international scholars
gathered here push the discussion of what it means to
do global media studies beyond uncritical celebrations of
global media technologies (or globalization) as well as
beyond perspectives that are a priori dismissive of the
possibilities of global media.
April 2011: 280pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87790-9: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-87791-6: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14828-0
Fifty Key Thinkers on
Globalization is an outstanding
guide to often-encountered
thinkers whose ideas have
shaped, defined and influenced
this new and rapidly growing
field. The authors clearly and
lucidly survey the life, work and
impact of fifty of the most
important theorists of
globalization.
Each thinker’s contribution to the
field is evaluated and assessed,
and each entry includes a helpful guide to further reading.
Fully cross-referenced throughout, this remarkable
reference guide is essential reading for students of politics
and international relations, economics, sociology, history,
anthropology and literary studies.
Building an Information Society
This book will be of interest to students, scholars and
policy makers interested in communications technologies,
Asian/Korean Studies and development studies.
March 2011: 272pp
Hb: 978-0-415-60646-2: £75.00
eBook: 978-0-203-82912-7
Hb: 978-0-415-55931-7: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-55932-4: £14.99
Companion Website
g lobal m ed i a
New
New
Mobile Communication and
Greater China
China’s Assimilationist
Language Policy
Edited by Rodney Wai-chi Chu, Hong Kong
Polytechnic University, Leopoldina Fortunati,
University of Udine, Italy, Patrick Pui-Lam Law, also
at Hong Kong Polytechnic University and
Shanhua Yang, Peking University, China
The Impact on Indigenous/Minority Literacy
and Social Harmony
Edited by Stephanie Hemelryk Donald,
RMIT University, Melbourne, Australia
Edited by Gulbahar H. Beckett, University of
Cincinnati, USA and Gerard A. Postiglione,
University of Hong Kong
This series includes original, high-quality
work by both new and established scholars
in the West and the East, on all aspects of
media, culture and social change in Asia.
Unlike most studies on ICT development in China this
book argues for the importance of the cultural realm as
captured in mobile phone usage in reflecting the
normative basis and struggle of the people. It stresses
how the mobile phone is in fact an important means by
which one can understand a rapidly changing China. A
key concern of the book is to assert the uniqueness of
China’s experience in mobile phone usage. This
uniqueness is encapsulated by the phrase ’riding the
double juggernaut’, in that Chinese society is exposed to
a rapid process of industrialization and cyberization in a
short period of time. The contributors maintain that such
density of experience under a compressed period when
the society has a thick cultural heritage of its own and
yet is still under a dictating rule all come together to
provide a unique situation in China.
Series: Comparative Development and Policy in Asia
This book assesses the current state of indigenous and
minority language policy in China. It considers language
policy in the education system, including higher
education, and provides detailed case studies of how
particular ethnic minorities are being affected by the
integrationist approach.
Hb: 978-0-415-59605-3: £85.00
eBook: 978-0-203-80407-0
Japan’s Local Newspapers
Anthony Rausch, Hirosaki University, Japan
Freedom of Information
Reform in China
Information Flow Analysis
Weibing Xiao, Shanghai University of Political
Science and Law, China
Series: Routledge Law in Asia
Although Freedom of Information (FOI) in China is often
perceived as a recent and intriguing phenomenon, this
book presents a complex and detailed understanding of
the evolution of FOI in China, using information flow
analysis to explore the gradual development of
government receptivity to FOI in an information
environment through time.
HIV/AIDS, Health and the
Media in China
Imagined Immunity Through Racialized
Disease
Johanna Hood, University of Technology, Australia
New
Hb: 978-0-415-67871-1: £75.00
New
Media, Culture and Social
Change in Asia
Series: Routledge Contemporary Japan Series
This book examines Japan’s local newspapers. It charts
how they have developed, describes their current nature,
and discusses the kind of journalism from which they are
formed. It demonstrates how local newspapers
contribute greatly to the development of local
communities, providing many examples of newspapers’
civic role. It compares Japanese local newspapers to the
current state of newspapers worldwide, and concludes
by assessing how Japanese local newspapers are likely to
develop in future.
Hb: 978-0-415-69398-1: £85.00
October 2011: 240pp
Hb: 978-0-415-67778-3: £90.00
eBook: 978-0-203-80299-1
Communication Arena
The Communication Arena is a one stop portal containing
information about our entire portfolio of Communication
Studies journals, visit the Communication Arena to:
•Find out more about the portfolio of communications
studies journals
•View free articles, news and offers
•Register to receive monthly eUpdates
HIV/AIDS is an increasingly
serious problem in China. This
book explores HIV/AIDS, its
portrayal in China’s media, and
the implications for public
health policy. It discusses how
many Chinese wrongly believe
themselves to be immune, with
infection only a possibility for
other ethnic groups with
perceived lower moral
standards.
Hb: 978-0-415-47198-5: £90.00
eBook: 978-0-203-83281-3
New
New Media and Human Rights
in Southeast Asia
Edited by Mike Hayes, Mahidol University, Thailand
and James Gomez, Keio University, Japan
This book examines the ways in which the new media in
South East Asia is challenging views of democracy and
human rights, how it both enables and violates human
rights standards and how it is being used by organizations
and individuals to support human rights and democracy.
Hb: 978-0-415-56111-2: £80.00
New
Contemporary Chinese Print
Media
Cultivating Middle Class Civility
•Register to receive table of contents alerts
Zheng Yi, University of Sydney, Australia
•Request sample copies
This book describes and analyses the role of post-reform
social stratification in the media, focusing particularly on
how the changing practices and institutions of the
industry correspond to and accelerate the emergence of
a relatively affluent urban leisure-reading market.
•Subscribe to the journals
•Submit your research
•Order back issues
www.communicationarena.com
Hb: 978-0-415-55969-0: £80.00
31
glo ba l media
32
Global Mobile Media
Gerard Goggin, University of New South Wales,
Australia
Global Mobile Media offers an
overview of the complex topic of
mobile media, looking at the
emerging industry structures,
new media economies, mobile
media cultures and network
politics of mobiles as they move
centre-stage in media industries.
2010: 240pp
Hb: 978-0-415-46917-3: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-46918-0: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-84280-5
International Media
Communication in a Global Age
Edited by Guy Golan, Seton Hall University, USA,
Thomas Johnson, Texas Tech University, USA and
Wayne Wanta, University of Missouri, USA
With contributions from many of the leading scholars in
the field of international media communication research,
this collection presents a valuable resource for advancing
knowledge and understanding of the complicated
international communication phenomenon. It will be of
value to upper-level undergraduates and graduate
students in mass media and communication programs,
and to scholars whose research focuses on global
communication research.
2009: 488pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99899-4: £85.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99900-7: £27.99
eBook: 978-0-203-88128-6
International Communication:
A Reader
Edited by Daya Kishan Thussu, University of
Westminster, UK
This comprehensive Reader brings together seminal texts
in media and communication from both traditional as
well as more recent scholarship. Readings are drawn
from an international range of scholars and organized to
reflect the growing internationalization of the field, with
clearly defined sections covering key aspects of global
communication. In addition to the core academic
readings, key policy documents are also included to
demonstrate the development of the political, economic
and technological infrastructure that underpins the
global system of media and communication.
2009: 616pp
Hb: 978-0-415-44455-2: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-44456-9: £24.99
Also available:
Media Events in a Global Age
Routledge Advances in
Internationalizing Media Studies
New in 2012
Media Power and
Democratization in Brazil
Series Editor: Daya Kishan Thussu,
University of Westminster, UK
TV Globo and the Dilemmas of Political
Accountability
Through publishing comparative and
region-specific studies, this series aims to
bring Asian, Latin American, African, and
Middle Eastern media and cultural studies
scholarship to the English speaking world
and to promote cutting edge research on
the globalization of media, culture, and
communication.
Mauro Porto, Tulane University, USA
New in 2012
Understanding Media and
Culture in Turkey
Structures, Spaces, Voices
In this book, Porto analyzes the role of TV Globo, one of
the world’s largest media conglomerates, in Brazil’s
process of democratization. Specifically, Porto uses the
case of TV Globo to analyze more broadly the links
between democratization, civil society mobilization, and
media change in transitional societies.
May 2012: 256pp
Hb: 978-0-415-89721-1: £80.00
Iranian Media
The Paradox of Modernity
Gholam Khiabany, London Metropolitan University, UK
Edited by Christian Christensen and Miyase
Christensen, both at Karlstad University, Sweden
2009: 264pp
Hb: 978-0-415-96289-6: £85.00
eBook: 978-0-203-87641-1
The contributors to this timely new volume move away
from essentialist dichotomies, providing readers with
nuanced, comprehensive investigations into the
relationship between media, politics and culture in this
complex and increasingly important country. The text will
be essential reading for scholars within Middle and Near
Eastern Studies, Media Studies and Sociology.
April 2012: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87592-9: £80.00
New
Media Globalization and the
Discovery Channel Networks
Ole J. Mjös, University of Bergen, Norway
2009: 236pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99246-6: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-87294-9
Music, Social Media and Global
Mobility
Audience Studies
MySpace, Facebook, YouTube
Toshie Takahashi, Rikkyo University, Japan
Ole J. Mjös, University of Bergen, Norway
This book is about the relationship between media,
communication and globalization, explored through a
unique empirical study of electronic music practitioners’
engagement with social media such as MySpace, Facebook
and YouTube. The book suggests that the nature of this
activity alters aspects of our practical and theoretical
understanding of the processes of media globalization.
Hb: 978-0-415-88274-3: £80.00
A Japanese Perspective
2009: 250pp
Hb: 978-0-415-80013-6: £80.00
New
Popular Television in Eastern
Europe During Socialism
Edited by Anikö Imre, University of Southern
California, USA, Timothy Havens, University of
Iowa, USA and Kati Lustyik, Ithaca College, USA
Global Media Ecologies
This collection of essays responds to the recent surge of
interest in popular television in Eastern Europe. This is a
region where television’s transformation has been
especially spectacular, shifting from a state-controlled
broadcast system delivering national, regional, and
heavily filtered Western programming to a deregulated,
multi-platform, transnational system delivering
predominantly American and Western European
entertainment programming.
Networked Production in Film and Television
Doris Baltruschat, Carleton University, Canada
2010: 252pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87478-6: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-85098-5
Hb: 978-0-415-89248-3: £80.00
Companion Website
m e di a an d s o c i e t y
Routledge Advances in
Internationalizing Media Studies
Series Editor: Daya Kishan Thussu,
University of Westminster, UK
This series of comparative and regionspecific studies are written especially for
undergraduate and postgraduate students.
Books in the series bring Asian, Latin
American, African, and Middle Eastern
media and cultural studies scholarship to
the English speaking world and aim to
promote teaching on the globalization of
media, culture, and communication.
Popular Media, Democracy and
Development in Africa
Edited by Herman Wasserman, Rhodes University,
South Africa
Media and
Society
5th Edition
A Cognitive Psychology of
Mass Communication
Richard Jackson Harris, Kansas State University, USA
In this fifth edition of A
Cognitive Psychology of Mass
Communication, author Richard
Jackson Harris continues his
examination of how our
experiences with media affect
the way we acquire knowledge
about the world, and how this
knowledge influences our
attitudes and behavior.
Presenting theories from
psychology and communication
along with reviews of the
corresponding research, this text covers a wide variety of
media and media issues, ranging from the commonly
discussed topics – sex, violence, advertising – to
lesser-studied topics, such as values, sports, and
entertainment education.
•highly accessible and engaging writing
•contemporary references to all types of media familiar
to students
Internationalizing Media
Studies
Edited by Daya Kishan Thussu, University of
Westminster, UK
Coverage
Media Spaces and Security after 9/11
Lisa Parks, University of California, USA
The fifth and fully updated edition offers:
2010: 304pp
Hb: 978-0-415-57793-9: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-57794-6: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-84326-0
New in 2012
Since the 9/11 attacks, media and security are
increasingly intertwined as the media technologies of
filtering, sorting and keywording have become essential
elements of national defense. In this book, Lisa Parks
explores the complex relations between media and
security and uses the term ’coverage’ to develop a
conceptual framework for understanding them. At the
heart of Park’s argument is the way that seemingly
benign media technologies, such as PowerPoint,
YouTube, and Google Earth, are often behind the scenes
of larger media systems such as television news, and
have been used to extend the security regime into the
spaces of everyday life. Each chapter explores a different
media through the lens of a post-9/11 security culture.
The first chapter, for example, looks at the ways that
television airwaves came to be regarded as public
property in the US, and then how the airwaves became
a space to be defended, for example, by bombing
campaigns against Arab satellite television stations after
9/11. Coverage is a major contribution to media studies
that offers a bold, new understanding of how media
technologies shape our perceptions of global space and
power relations.
May 2012: 192pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99981-6: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99982-3: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87964-1
•substantial discussion of theories and research,
including interpretations of original research studies
New
•a balanced approach to covering the breadth and
depth of the subject
Crime, Policy and the Media
•discussion of work from both psychology and media
disciplines.
The text is appropriate for Media Effects, Media and
Society, and Psychology of Mass Media coursework, as it
examines the effects of mass media on human
cognitions, attitudes, and behaviors through empirical
social science research; teaches students how to examine
and evaluate mediated messages; and includes mass
communication research, theory and analysis.
2009: 480pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99311-1: £95.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99312-8: £39.99
eBook: 978-0-203-89271-8
The Shaping of Criminal Justice, 1989–2010
Jon Silverman, University of Bedfordshire, UK
Crime, Policy and the Media is the first academic text to
map the relationship between a rapidly changing media
and policymaking in criminal justice. Spanning the
period, 1989–2010, it examines a number of case
studies – terrorism, drugs, sentencing, policing and
public protection, amongst others – and interrogates key
policy-makers (including six former Home Secretaries, a
former Lord Chief Justice, Attorney-General, senior
police officers, government advisers and leading
commentators) about the impact of the media on their
thinking and practice.
Written by a former BBC Home Affairs Correspondent,
with unrivalled access to the highest reaches of
policy-making, it is both academically rigorous and
accessible and will be of interest to both scholars and
practitioners in media and criminal justice.
October 2011: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-67231-3: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-67232-0: £25.99
eBook: 978-0-203-15693-3
2009: 336pp
Hb: 978-0-415-45529-9: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-45530-5: £22.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87738-8
33
m ed ia and so c ie ty
34
New in 2012
New in 2012
New in 2012
Misunderstanding the Internet
Google and the Culture
of Search
Participatory Cultures
Ken Hillis, University of North Carolina, USA,
Michael Petit, University of Toronto, Canada and
Kylie Jarrett, National University of Ireland, Ireland
Edited by Aaron Delwiche and Jennifer
Henderson, both at Trinity University, USA
James Curran, Goldsmiths, University of London,
UK, Natalie Fenton, Loughborough University, UK
and Des Freedman, also at Goldsmiths, University
of London, UK
Misunderstanding the Internet
is a short introduction,
encompassing the history,
sociology, politics and
economics of the Internet and
its impact on society. The book
has a simple three part
structure:
•Part 1 looks at the history of
the Internet, and offers an
overview of the Internet’s place
in society
•Part 2 focuses on the control and economics of the
Internet
•Part 3 examines the Internet’s political and cultural
influence.
This will be a polemical, sociologically and historically
informed textbook that aims to challenge both popular
myths and existing academic orthodoxies around the
Internet.
June 2012: 400pp
Hb: 978-0-415-57956-8: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-57958-2: £18.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14648-4
New in 2012
Digital Labor
The Internet as Playground and Factory
Edited by Trebor Scholz, The New School, USA
Digital Labor asks whether life on the Internet is mostly
work, or play. We tweet, we tag photos, we link, we
review books, we comment on blogs, we remix media,
and we upload video to create much of the content that
makes up the web. And large corporations profit on our
online activity by tracking our interests, affiliations, and
habits, and then collecting and selling the data. What is
the nature of this interactive ’labor’ and the new forms of
digital sociality that it brings into being?
The international, interdisciplinary contributors to Digital
Labor suggest that there is no longer a clear divide
between ’the personal’ and ’work,’ as every aspect of
life drives the digital economy: sexual desire, boredom,
friendship – all become fodder for speculative profit.
They argue that we are living in a total labor society and
the way in which we are commoditized, racialized, and
engendered is profoundly and disturbingly normalized by
the dominant discourse of digital culture.
May 2012: 256pp
Hb: 978-0-415-89694-8: £85.00
Pb: 978-0-415-89695-5: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14579-1
Google and the Culture of Search examines the role of
search technologies in shaping the contemporary digital
and informational landscape. Ken Hillis and Michael Petit
shed light on a culture of search in which our increasing
reliance on search engines like Google, Yahoo! and Bing
influences the way we navigate Web content, and how
we think about ourselves and the world around us, online
and off. Even as it becomes the number one Internet
activity, the very ubiquity of search technology naturalizes
it as utilitarian and transparent, an assumption that Hillis
and Petit explores in this innovative study.
This comprehensive study of search technology’s broader
implications for knowledge production and social
relations is an indispensable resource for students and
scholars of Internet and new media studies, the digital
humanities, and information technology.
June 2012: 240pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88300-9: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88301-6: £23.99
eBook: 978-0-203-84626-1
The Routledge Handbook of Participatory Cultures will
help students and scholars navigate this rapidly changing
media and cultural terrain. Composed of newly
commissioned essays from contributors across
disciplines, this Handbook will introduce students to the
concept of participatory culture, explain how researchers
approach participatory culture studies, and provide
original examples of participatory culture in action. The
wide range of topics explored include crowdsourcing,
citizen journalism, fanfiction, wikis, video games, video
sharing, transmedia storytelling, and much more.
January 2012: 472pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88223-1: £125.00
Pb:978-0-415-50609-0: £50.00
New in 2012
Media and the Creation of
Babe Ruth
Patrick Adam Trimble, Penn State University, USA
Series: Studies in American Popular History and Culture
New
Foundations of Critical Media
and Information Studies
Christian Fuchs, Uppsala University, Sweden
Series: Routledge Advances in Sociology
Foundations of Critical Media and Information Studies lays
down foundations for the analysis of media, information,
and information technology in twenty-first century
information society, as well as introducing the theoretical
and empirical tools necessary for the critical study of
media and information. Christian Fuchs shows the role
classical critical theory can play for analyzing the
information society and the information economy, as well
as analyzing the role of the media and the information
economy in economic development, the new imperialism,
and the new economic crisis. The book critically discusses
transformations of the Internet (’Web 2.0’), introduces the
notion of alternative media as critical media, and shows
the critical role media and information technology can
play in contemporary society.
Babe Ruth is among the most lasting of American icons. A
baseball player who emerged from the sports pages of the
Jazz Age, he has become one of the dominant symbols of
traditional cultural values, nationalism, and masculine
identity. His is a media persona that has changed drastically
over the years and is one that allows each new generation
of people discovering him to take what they need from the
stories of the Babe and reinvent them for their own uses.
Patrick Adam Trimble carefully unpacks Ruth’s legacy,
examining how mass communications, with the assistance
of the political and economic systems that rely on that
media, help to shape the evolution of Babe Ruth from his
creation as a media icon in the 1920s to his continuing
presence in the new millennium.
May 2012: 240pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99407-1: £80.00
Hb: 978-0-415-58881-2: £90.00
eBook: 978-0-203-83086-4
Want more
information on a book?
Visit the direct URL found at the
bottom of the title description.
Companion Website
New in 2012
New
Celebrity Society
Communicating Social Change
Robert van Krieken, University of Sydney, Australia
and University College, Dublin
Structure, Culture, and Agency
Celebrity Society brings a new dimension to our
understanding of celebrities, capturing the way in which
the figure of ’the celebrity’ is bound up with emergence
of modernity. It outlines how the ’celebrification of
society’ is not just the twentieth century product of
Hollywood and television, but a long-term historical
process, beginning with the printing press, theatre and
art. The book goes beyond the accounts of celebrity
’culture’ to develop the analysis of ’celebrity society’,
with its own, constantly changing, social practices and
structures, moral grammar, construction of self and
identity, legal order and political economy organized
around the distribution of visibility, attention and
recognition. It draws on the work of Norbert Elias to
explain how contemporary celebrity society is the heir to
court society, taking on but also democratising many of
the functions of the aristocracy. Readers will learn what
Obama and Paris have in common, and why we should
see all celebrity as driven by the ’economics of
attention’, because attention has become a vital and
increasingly valuable resource in the information age.
January 2012: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-58149-3: £90.00
Pb: 978-0-415-58150-9: £24.99
NEW
Celebrity Culture and the
American Dream
Stardom and Social Mobility
Karen Sternheimer, University of Southern
California, USA
’A good book to add to an introduction to
sociology course if you want to give your students
a good sense of how sociology analyzes culture
and media.’ – Global Sociology
Using examples from the first
celebrity fan magazines of 1911
to the present, Celebrity Culture
and the American Dream
considers how major economic
and historical factors shaped
the nature of celebrity culture as
we know it today. Equally
important, the book explains
how and why the story of
Hollywood celebrities matters,
sociologically speaking, to an
understanding of American
society, to the changing nature of the American Dream,
and to the relation between class and culture.
January 2011: 304pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88678-9: £100.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88679-6: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-83149-6
Mohan J. Dutta, Purdue University, USA
Communicating Social Change:
Structure, Culture, and Agency
explores the use of
communication to transform
global, national, and local
structures of power that create
and sustain oppressive
conditions. Author Mohan J.
Dutta describes the social
challenges that exist in current
globalization politics, and
examines the communicative
processes, strategies, and tactics
through which social change interventions are
constituted in response to the challenges. Using
empirical evidence and case studies, he documents the
ways through which those in power create conditions at
the margins, and he provides a theoretical base for
discussing the ways in which these positions of power
are resisted through communication processes,
strategies, and tactics. The interplay of power and
control with resistance is woven through each of the
chapters in the book.
March 2011: 360pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87873-9: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-87874-6: £29.99
eBook: 978-0-203-83434-3
2nd Edition
Communication as Culture,
Revised Edition
Routledge New Developments
in Communication and Society
Research
Series Editor: James Curran, Goldsmiths,
University of London, UK
This series is devoted to innovative
research in media and cultural studies. It
will prioritize new directions of research,
with an orientation towards work that is
critical of contemporary media and society
and that seeks to integrate theory and
empirical research.
New
How Media Inform Democracy
A Comparative Approach
Edited by Toril Aalberg, Norwegian University of
Science and Technology, Norway and James Curran,
Goldsmiths, University of London, UK
This study undertaken by leading researchers in six
countries, makes a vital contribution to media and
theory, comparative media system and political
communication courses. Its principal conclusion is that
Americans are less politically informed than their
counterparts in five European countries because
Americans are less well briefed about public affairs by
their market-based media system.
August 2011: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88908-7: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-80344-8
Essays on Media and Society
James W. Carey
James W. Carey maintains that
communication is not merely
the transmission of information;
reminding the reader of the link
between the words
“communication” and
“community,” he broadens his
definition to include the
drawing-together of a people
that is culture. The revised
edition of this classic text
includes a new critical foreword
by G. Stuart Adam that explains
Carey’s fundamental role in transforming the study of
mass communication to include a cultural perspective
and connects his classic essays with contemporary media
issues and trends. This edition also adds a new, complete
bibliography of all of Carey’s writings.
2008: 240pp
Hb: 978-0-415-98975-6: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-98976-3: £23.99
eBook: 978-0-203-92891-2
For a full listing of titles in this series,
visit: www.routledge.com/u/NDCSR
35
m ed ia and so c ie ty
36
New
New
New
Sports Media
Media and Religion
God, Jews and the Media
Transformation, Integration, Consumption
Foundations of an Emerging Field
Religion and Israel’s Media
Edited by Andrew C. Billings, Clemson University,
USA
Daniel A. Stout, University of Nevada, USA
Yoel Cohen
Series: Routledge Jewish Studies Series
Series: Electronic Media Research Series
Looking toward a future with
increasingly hybridized media
offerings, Sports Media:
Transformation, Integration,
Consumption examines sports
media scholarship and its role in
facilitating understanding of the
increasingly complex world of
sports media.
Acknowledging that consumer
demand for sports media
content has influenced nearly
every major technology
innovation of the past several decades, chapters
included herein assess existing scholarship while positing
important future questions about the role sports media
will play in the daily lives of sports fans worldwide.
Contributions from well-known scholars are
supplemented by work from younger researchers doing
new work in this area.
Developed for the Broadcast Education Association’s
Electronic Media Research series, this volume will be
required reading for graduate and undergraduate
students in media, communication, sociology, marketing,
and sports management, and will serve as a valuable
reference for future research in sports media.
March 2011: 232pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88368-9: £70.00
eBook: 978-0-203-83279-0
This text examines the history,
theory, cultural context, and
professional aspects of media
and religion. While religion has
been explored more fully in
psychology, sociology,
anthropology, and the
humanities, there is no clear
bridge of understanding to the
communication discipline.
Daniel A. Stout tackles this issue
by providing a roadmap for
examining this understudied
area so that discussions about media and religion can
more easily proceed.
Offering great breadth, this text covers key concepts and
historical highlights; world religions, denominations, and
cultural religion; and religion and specific media genres.
The text also includes key terms and questions to ponder
for every chapter, and concludes with an in-class
learning activity that can be used to encourage students
to explore the media – religion interface and review the
essential ideas presented in the book.
Media and Religion is an ideal introduction for
undergraduate students in need of a foundation for this
emerging field.
Hb: 978-0-8058-6383-3: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-8058-6384-0: £21.99
eBook: 978-1-4106-1841-2
New in 2012
New
Sport, Public Broadcasting, and
Cultural Citizenship
Promoting Peace, Inciting
Violence
The Role of Religion and Media
Signal Lost?
Jolyon Mitchell, University of Edinburgh, UK
Edited by Jay Scherer, University of Alberta, Canada
and David Rowe, University of Western Sydney,
Australia
Series: Media, Religion and Culture
Series: Routledge Research in Sport, Culture and Society
This volume charts the debates over the provision of
free-to-air telecasts of sport as a right of cultural
citizenship, analyzing the complex economic, political,
and sociological questions surrounding the increasingly
tenuous ability of public broadcasters to compete for the
broadcasting rights to the most popular and desirable
sports and sporting events. Through comparative case
studies, the contributors to this edited volume explore
these issues in various locales across the globe.
Hb: 978-0-415-88603-1: £80.00
This book is about the role that media and religion play
in promoting peace and inciting violence. Using a wide
range of examples drawn from around the world, it
explores:
•how different media contribute to the creation of
communicative environments where violence can be
incited
•how various media are used to promote peacebuilding
•the ambivalent role of religion in these processes.
It is sometimes suggested that through skilful packaging
of religious messages audiences can be turned into more
violent or more peaceful citizens. Jolyon Mitchell paints a
more complex picture in order to tease out the
’ambivalence of the sacred’ in a number of different
communicative contexts.
January 2012: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-55746-7: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-55747-4: £19.99
Yoel Cohen examines the interactions between Jewish
identity and mass media. As such, it covers the Diaspora
populations of the US and UK as well as Israel itself. Also
included are chapters on journalism, broadcasting,
advertising and the Internet.
Hb: 978-0-415-47503-7: £75.00
New
Religion, Media and Culture: A
Reader
Edited by Gordon Lynch, University of Kent, UK,
Jolyon Mitchell, University of Edinburgh, UK and
Anna Strhan
This Reader brings together a
selection of key writings to
explore the relationship
between religion, media and
cultures of everyday life. It
provides an overview of the
main debates and
developments in this growing
field, focusing on four major
themes:
•religion, spirituality and
consumer culture
•media and the transformation of religion
•the sacred senses: visual, material and audio culture
•religion and the ethics of media and culture.
This collection is an invaluable resource for students,
academics and researchers wanting a deeper
understanding of religion and contemporary culture.
August 2011: 296pp
Hb: 978-0-415-54954-7: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-54955-4: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-80565-7
New
Transnational Migration, Media
and Identity of Asian Women
Diasporic Daughters
Youna Kim, The American University of Paris, France
Series: Routledge Research in Gender and Society
Drawing on a wide range of perspectives from media and
communications, sociology, cultural studies and
anthropology, this volume provides an empirically grounded
and theoretically insightful investigation into the mediated
identies of women in the East Asian diaspora.
October 2011: 176pp
Hb: 978-0-415-89038-0: £80.00
Companion Website
New
New
Migration, Diaspora and
Information Technology in
Global Societies
Entering the Picture
Edited by Leopoldina Fortunati, University of
Udine, Italy, Raul Pertierra, Ateneo de Manila
University, the Philippines and Jane Vincent,
University of Surrey, UK
Series: Routledge Research in Information Technology
and Society
Migrants and diaspora communities are shaped by their
use of information and communication technologies.
This book explores the multifaceted role played by new
media in the re-location of these groups of people,
assisting them in their efforts to defeat nostalgia,
construct new communities, and keep connected with
their communities of origin. Drawing on contributions
from a range of disciplines including sociology,
anthropology, psychology and linguistics, it offers a more
profound understanding of one of the most significant
phenomena of contemporary international societies –
the migration of nearly a billion people worldwide – and
the relationship between technology and society.
Hb: 978-0-415-88709-0: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-14860-0
New
Fighting the Future War
An Anthology of Science Fiction War
Stories, 1914-1945
Judy Chicago, The Fresno Feminist Art
Program, and the Collective Visions of
Women Artists
Edited by Jill Fields, California State University, USA
Series: New Directions in American History
Augmented by thirty-seven
illustrations and color plates,
this interdisciplinary collection
of essays by artists and scholars,
many of whom were eye
witnesses to landmark events,
relates how feminists produced
vibrant bodies of art in Fresno
and other locales where similar
collaborations flourished.
Articles on topics such as
African American artists in New
York and Los Angeles, San
Francisco’s Las Mujeres Muralistas and Asian American
Women Artists Association, and exhibitions in Taiwan
and Italy showcase the artistic trajectories that
destabilized traditional theories and practices and
reshaped the art world. An engaging editor’s
introduction explains how feminist art emerged within
the powerful women’s movement that transformed
America. Entering the Picture is an exciting collection
about the provocative contributions of feminists to
American art.
Hb: 978-0-415-88768-7: £95.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88769-4: £26.99
Edited by Frederic Krome
2nd Edition
Entertainment and Society
The period between World War
I and World War II was one of
intense change. Everything was
modernizing, including
technology for making war –
witness machine guns, trench
warfare, biological agents, and
ultimately The Final Solution.
This modernization and eye
toward the future was reflected
in many facets of pop culture,
including fashion, home-wear design, and the popular
literature of the time. In sci-fi, a specific genre emerged,
that of the ’future war.’
Frederic Krome has collected many of these future war
stories together for the first time in Fighting the Future
War. Bolstered by a comprehensive introduction, and
introduced with historical information about both the
authors of the stories and the historical time period,
these stories provide a view into the field of pulp science
fiction writing, the issues that informed the time period
between the world wars, and the way people envisioned
the wars of tomorrow. Revealing anxieties about society,
technology, race and politics, the genre of the future
war story is important material for students of history
and literature.
Influences, Impacts, and Innovations
Shay Sayre and Cynthia King, both at California
State University, USA
The second edition of this innovative textbook
introduces students to the ways that society shapes our
many forms of entertainment and in turn, how
entertainment shapes society. Entertainment and Society
examines a broad range of types of entertainment that
we enjoy in our daily lives – covering new areas like
sports, video games, gambling, theme parks, travel, and
shopping, as well as traditional entertainment media
such as film, television, and print. A primary emphasis is
placed on the impact of technological and cultural
convergence on innovation and the influence of
contemporary entertainment.
2010: 600pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99806-2: £120.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99807-9: £45.00
eBook: 978-0-203-88293-1
July 2011: 428pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87950-7: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-87951-4: £39.99
eBook: 978-0-203-81059-0
Emotions and Mass Media
Edited by Katrin Doveling and Christian von
Scheve, both at Free University of Berlin, Germany
and Elly A. Konijn, Vrije Universiteit Amsterdam,
the Netherlands
This Handbook provides a comprehensive overview of
mass media impacts on human emotions and vice versa.
Multidisciplinary in scope, leading scholars analyze the
various facets of this mutual influence, ranging from
individual up to socio-cultural levels of analysis. It is a
standard reference work for students and researchers in
the social sciences and media and communication studies.
2010: 448pp
Hb: 978-0-415-48160-1: £110.00
eBook: 978-0-203-88539-0
Media Choice
A Theoretical and Empirical Overview
Edited by Tilo Hartmann
2009: 320pp
Hb: 978-0-415-96456-2: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-96458-6: £25.99
eBook: 978-0-203-93865-2
7th Edition
Power Without Responsibility
Press, Broadcasting and the Internet in Britain
James Curran, Goldsmiths, University of London,
UK and Jean Seaton, University of Westminster, UK
Power Without Responsibility is
a classic introduction to the
history, sociology, theory and
politics of the media in Britain.
2009: 448pp
Hb: 978-0-415-46698-1: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-46699-8: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87140-9
37
m ed ia et hi cs
38
Media Ethics
New
Doing Ethics in Media
Theories and Practical Applications
Jay Black, University of South Florida, USA and Chris Roberts, University of Alabama, USA
Doing Ethics in Media: Theories and Practical Applications is an accessible, comprehensive introduction to media ethics. Its theoretical framework
and grounded discussions engage students to think clearly and systematically about dilemmas in the rapidly changing media environment.
The 13-chapter text is organized around six decision-making questions, the ’5Ws and H’ of media ethics. The questions encourage students to
articulate the issues; apply codes, policies or laws; consider the needs of stakeholders; sift and sort through conflicting values; integrate philosophic
principles; and pose a ’test of publicity.’ Specifically, the questions ask:
• What’s your problem?
• Why not follow the rules?
• Who wins, who loses?
• What’s it worth?
• Who’s whispering in your ear?
• How’s your decision going to look?
As they progress through the text, students are encouraged to resolve dozens of practical applications and increasingly complex case studies relating to journalism, new media,
advertising, public relations, and entertainment.
Other distinctive features include:
•comprehensive materials on classic moral theory and current issues such as truth telling and deception, values, persuasion and propaganda, privacy, diversity, and loyalty
•a user-friendly approach that challenges students to think for themselves rather than imposing answers on them
•consistent connections between theories and the decision-making challenges posed in the practical applications and case studies
•a Companion Website with online resources for students, including additional readings and chapter overviews, as well as instructor materials with a test bank, instructor’s
manual, sample syllabi and more. Available at: www.routledge.com/textbooks/black
•a second website with continuously updated examples, case studies, and student writing at: www.doingmediaethics.com.
Doing Ethics in Media is aimed at undergraduates and graduate students studying media ethics in mass media, journalism, and media studies. It also serves students in rhetoric,
popular culture, communication studies, and interdisciplinary social sciences.
Selected Contents: Question 1: What’s Your Problem? Ethics and Moral Reasoning Question 2: Why Not Follow the Rules? Codes of Ethics and Justification Models Media Traditions and
the Paradox of Professionalism Question 3: Who Wins, Who Loses? Moral Development and the Expansion of Empathy Loyalty and Diversity Question 4: What’s it Worth? Personal and
Professional Values Truth and Deception Privacy and Public Life Persuasion and Propaganda Question 5: Who’s Whispering in Your Ear? Consequentialism and Utility Deontology and Moral
Rules Virtue, Justice, and Care Question 6: How’s Your Decision Going to Look? Accountability, Transparency, and Credibility
New
3rd Edition
Controversies in Media Ethics
A. David Gordon, University of Wisconsin Eau Claire, USA, John Michael Kittross, Media Ethics magazine,
John C. Merrill, University of Missouri, USA, William Babcock, Southern Illinois University, USA and
Michael Dorsher, also at University of Wisconsin Eau Claire, USA
Controversies in Media Ethics offers students, instructors and professionals multiple perspectives on media ethics issues
presenting vast ’gray areas’ and few, if any, easy answers. This third edition includes a wide range of subjects, and
demonstrates a willingness to tackle the problems raised by new technologies, new media, new politics and new economics.
The core of the text is formed by fourteen chapters, each of which deals with a particular problem or likelihood of ethical
dilemma, presented as different points of view on the topic in question, as argued by two or more contributing authors. The
fifteenth chapter is a collection of ’mini-chapters,’ allowing students to discern first-hand how to deal with ethical problems.
Contributing authors John A. Armstrong, Peter J. Gade, Julianne H. Newton, Kim Sheehan, and Jane B. Singer provide
additional voices and perspectives on various topics under discussion.
This edition has been thoroughly updated to provide:
• discussions of issues reflecting the breadth and depth of the media spectrum
• numerous real-world examples
• broad discussion of confidentiality and other timely topics.
A Companion Website (www.routledge.com/textbooks/9780415963329) supplies resources for both students and instructors.
Developed for use in media ethics courses, Controversies in Media Ethics provides up-to-date discussions and analysis of ethical situations across a variety of media, including
issues dealing with the Internet and new media. It provides a unique consideration of ethical concerns, and serves as provocative reading for all media students.
June 2011: 608pp • Hb: 978-0-415-99247-3: £110.00 • Pb: 978-0-415-96332-9: £44.99 • eBook: 978-0-203-82991-2
Companion Website
m e di a e f f ects
New
Internet and Surveillance
The Challenges of Web 2.0 and Social
Media
Edited by Christian Fuchs, Uppsala University,
Sweden, Kees Boersma, Vrije Universiteit
Amsterdam, the Netherlands, Anders
Albrechtslund, Aalborg University, Denmark and
Marisol Sandoval, University of Salzburg, Austria
Series: Routledge Studies in Science, Technology and
Society
The Internet has been transformed in the past years
from a system primarily oriented on information
provision into a medium for communication and
community-building. The notion of ’Web 2.0’, social
software, and social networking sites such as Facebook,
Twitter and MySpace have emerged in this context. With
such platforms comes the massive provision and storage
of personal data that are systematically evaluated,
marketed, and used for targeting users with advertising.
In a world of global economic competition, economic
crisis, and fear of terrorism after 9/11, both corporations
and state institutions have a growing interest in
accessing this personal data. The contributions in this
book provide a comprehensive look at issues that are
redefining our entire concept of privacy and surveillance.
August 2011: 304pp
Hb: 978-0-415-89160-8: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-80643-2
New
On Privacy
Annabelle Lever, University of Geneva, Switzerland
Series: Thinking in Action
This book explores the Janus-faced features of privacy,
and seeks to understand whether and, if so, why privacy
is valuable in a democratic society, and what implications
privacy has for the ways we see and treat each other.
Hb: 978-0-415-39569-4: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-39570-0: £13.99
eBook: 978-0-203-15666-7
Media Ethics Beyond Borders
Comparative Media Law
and Ethics
Media Effects
Tim Crook, Goldsmiths, University of London, UK
Providing practical and
theoretical resources on
media law and ethics for the
United Kingdom and United
States of America and other
legal jurisdictions such as
France, Japan, India, China
and Saudi Arabia,
Comparative Media Law and
Ethics is suitable for upper
undergraduate and
postgraduate study in higher
education and is of use to professionals in the media
who need to work internationally.
2009: 496pp
Hb: 978-0-415-55157-1: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-55161-8: £34.99
eBook: 978-0-203-86596-5
2nd Edition
Mixed Media
Moral Distinctions in Advertising, Public
Relations, and Journalism
Tom Bivins, University of Oregon, USA
Mixed Media, Second Edition,
introduces readers to the
tools necessary for making
moral and ethical decisions
regarding the use of mass
media. New to the second
edition is a focus on the three
mass media industries most
pervasive in today’s society:
the news media (journalism),
advertising, and public
relations, with individual
chapters giving equal coverage to each.
2009: 328pp
Pb: 978-0-8058-6321-5: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87488-2
A Global Perspective
Edited by Stephen J.A. Ward, University of
Wisconsin – Madison, USA and Herman
Wasserman, University of Sheffield, UK
This volume explores the construction of an ethics for
news media that is global in reach and impact. Essays by
international media ethicists provide leading theoretical
perspectives on major issues and applies the ideas to
specific countries, contexts and problems, and the result
is a rich source of ethical thought and analysis on
questions raised by contemporary global media.
2010: 192pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87887-6: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-87888-3: £18.99
eBook: 978-0-203-85307-8
3rd Edition
Media Effects
Advances in Theory and Research
Edited by Jennings Bryant and Mary Beth Oliver
With contributions from some
of the finest scholars in the
discipline, Media Effects serves
not only as a comprehensive
reference volume for media
effects study but also as an
exceptional textbook for
advanced courses in media
effects. Covering the breadth of
the media effects arena, this
third edition provides updated
material as well as new
chapters focusing on effects of mobile media and other
technologies. As this area of study continues to evolve,
Media Effects will serve as a benchmark of theory and
research for current and future generations of scholars.
2008: 656pp
Hb: 978-0-8058-6449-6: £108.00
Pb: 978-0-8058-6450-2: £46.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87711-1
New in 2012
2nd Edition
Media Effects and Society
Elizabeth M. Perse and Jennifer Lambe, both at
University of Delaware, USA
Media Effects and Society provides an in-depth look at
media effects and offers a theoretical foundation for
understanding mass media’s impact on individuals and
society. Working from the assumption that media effects
are common and are often underestimated, the text
focuses on dominant areas of media effects, providing a
synthesis of those key areas of research. With an
emphasis on the theoretical explanations for media
effects, the text provides readers with explanations of
how media effects occur, so they can understand how to
mitigate harmful effects and enhance positive ones.
New for the second edition are a new chapter on effects
of entertainment, text boxes with examples in each
chapter, discussion of new technology effects integrated
throughout the chapters, expanded pedagogy, a glossary
of key terms, and updates to theory and research
throughout.
March 2012: 304pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87819-7: £140.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88591-1: £39.99
eBook: 978-0-203-85469-3
39
new med ia an d cybe rc ultur e
40
New Media and Cyberculture
New
The New Media and Technocultures Reader
Edited by Seth Giddings and Martin Lister, both at University of the West of England, UK
The study of new media has developed within a wide range of academic disciplines and theoretical paradigms and has generated a great deal of
excitement, hype, and confusion. The New Media and Technocultures Reader gathers texts which map the cultural implications of new media,
encapsulating and challenging key debates, theoretical positions, and approaches to research.
The New Media and Technocultures Reader offers students further reading on and exploration of key issues and topics raised in the textbook
New Media: A Critical Introduction. The Reader draws on various disciplinary stances (including visual culture; media and cultural history; media
theory; media production; philosophy and the history of the sciences; political economy and sociology), offering readers a rich and
interdisciplinary resource. Critical and accessible editorial commentary guides the reader between the extracts and through the debates.
February 2011: 528pp • Hb: 978-0-415-46913-5: £80.00 • Pb: 978-0-415-46914-2: £26.99
2nd Edition
New Media
Martin Lister, University of the West of England, UK, Jon Dovey, Seth Giddings, also at University of the West of England, UK, Iain
Grant and Kieran Kelly
New Media: A Critical Introduction is a comprehensive introduction to the culture, history, technologies and theories of new media. Written
especially for students, the book considers the ways in which ’new media’ really are new, assesses the claims that a media and technological
revolution has taken place and formulates new ways for media studies to respond to new technologies. Substantially updated from the first
edition to cover recent theoretical developments, approaches and significant technological developments, this is the best and by far the most
comprehensive textbook available on this exciting and expanding subject.
2008: 464pp • Hb: 978-0-415-43160-6: £75.00 • Pb: 978-0-415-43161-3: £21.99 • eBook: 978-0-203-88482-9
A Networked Self
Identity, Community, and Culture on Social Network Sites
Edited by Zizi Papacharissi, University of Illinois, USA
‘In this book, the field’s top scholars address the wide range of issues raised by contemporary online social networks. Bridging
social scientific and critical approaches, the authors offer sharp data-driven analyses that will be of keen interest to students
and researchers.’ – Nancy Baym, University of Kansas, USA
‘This is an insightful treatment of social networking networks in general.’ – B.G. Turner, Faulkner University, USA
A Networked Self examines self presentation and social connection in the digital age. This collection brings together new work on online
social networks by leading scholars from a variety of disciplines. The volume is structured around the core themes of identity, community, and
culture, the central themes of social network sites. Contributors address theory, research, and practical implications of the many aspects of
online social networks.
2010: 336pp
Hb: 978-0-415-80180-5: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-80181-2: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87652-7
Companion Website
n e w m e di a an d cybe rc ult u re
Routledge Studies in New
Media and Cyberculture
This series is our home for innovative
research in the fields of new media and
cyberculture. It includes monographs and
targeted edited collections that provide new
insights into these ever-evolving subjects
as their influence and significance grow
into the twenty-first century.
New in 2012
Online Games, Social
Narratives
Esther MacCallum-Stewart, University of
Chichester, UK
This book looks at different types of games in the online
gaming genre; MacCallum-Stewart studies the different
ways in which online games create social environments
and how players choose to interpret these. These games
vary from the immensely popular social networking
games on Facebook such as Farmville to Massively
Multiplayer Online Roleplaying Games (MMORPG) to
“Free to Play” online gaming and to console communities
such as players of Xbox Live and PS3 games. Each chapter
deals with a different aspect of social gaming online,
examining a central issue: When are games social, and
what narrative devices make them so?
May 2012: 228pp
Hb: 978-0-415-89190-5: £80.00
New in 2012
Worldplay and the Discourse
of Video Games
Analysing Words, Design and Play
Christopher Paul, Seattle University, USA
In this timely new book, Christopher Paul analyzes how
the words we use to talk about video games and the
structures that are produced within games shape a
particular way of gaming by focusing on how games
create meaning, lead to identification and division,
persuade, and circulate ideas. Paul examines the broader
social discourse about gaming, including: the way players
are socialized into games; the impact of the lingering
association of video games as kid’s toys; the dynamics
within specific games (including Grand Theft Auto and EA
Sports Games); and the ways in which players participate
in shaping the discourse of games, demonstrated through
examples like the reward system of World of Warcraft and
the development of theorycraft.
Hb: 978-0-415-89306-0: £80.00
Creating Second Lives
Gaming Cultures and Place in
Asia-Pacific
Community, Identity and Spatiality as
Constructions of the Virtual
Edited by Larissa Hjorth, RMIT University, Australia
and Dean Chan, Edith Cowan University, Australia
New
Edited by Astrid Ensslin and Eben Muse, both at
Bangor University, UK
Selected Contents: Introduction, Eben Muse and Astrid
Ensslin Part I: Creating Second Communities 1. Liberate
your Avatar: The Revolution Will Be Socially Networked, Paul
Sermon and Charlotte Gould 2. An Imagined Community of
Avatars – A Theoretical Interrogation of Second Life as
Nation through the Lens of Benedict Anderson’s Imagined
Communities, Kevin Miguel Sherman 3. Programming
Processes: Controlling Second Lives, Elizabeth Burgess
Part II: Creating Second Identities 4. Embodiment and
Gender Identity in Virtual Worlds: Reconfiguring our ’Volatile
Bodies’, Sonia Fizek and Monika Wasilewska 5. The Body of
the Avatar: Constructing Human Presence in Virtual Worlds,
Denise Doyle 6. The Grips of Fantasy: The Construction of
Female Characters In and Beyond Virtual Game Worlds,
Isamar Carrillo Masso Part III: Creating Second Spaces
7. Second Chances: Depictions of the Natural World in
Second Life, Joseph S. Clark 8. Avatar Needs and the
Remediation of Architecture in Second Life, Astrid Ensslin
9. The Event of Space: Defining Place in a Virtual Landscape,
Eben Muse Afterword, Tom Boellstorff
April 2011: 240pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88420-4: £80.00
New
Mobile Technology and Place
Edited by Gerard Goggin, University of New South
Wales, Australia and Rowan Wilken, Swinburne
University of Technology, Australia
An international roster of contributors come together in
this comprehensive volume to examine the complex
interactions between mobile media technologies and
issues of place. Balancing philosophical reflection with
empirical analysis, this book examines the specific
contexts in which place and mobile technologies come
into focus, intersect, and interact. Given the far-reaching
impact of contemporary mobile technology use, and
given the lasting importance of the concept and
experiences of place, this book will appeal to a wide
range of scholars in media and cultural studies,
sociology, and philosophy of technology.
Hb: 978-0-415-88955-1: £80.00
Disability and New Media
Katie Ellis, Murdoch University, Australia and Mike
Kent, Curtin University of Technology, Australia
It has been argued that the Internet will not be fully
accessible until disability is considered a cultural identity
in the same way that class, gender and sexuality are.
Kent and Ellis build on this notion and apply it to more
recent Web 2.0 phenomena, social networking sites,
virtual worlds and file sharing.
2010: 184pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87135-8: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-83191-5
This collection explores the politics of game play and its
cultural context by focusing on the Asia-Pacific region.
Drawing from micro ethnographic studies to macro
political economy analysis of techno-nationalisms and
transcultural flows of cultural capital, it provides an
interdisciplinary model for thinking through the politics
of gaming.
2009: 314pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99627-3: £85.00
eBook: 978-0-203-87595-7
Virtual English
Queer Internets and Digital Creolization
Jillana B. Enteen, Northwestern University, USA
Virtual English examines the online communication
practices of underserved communities in the United
States and overlooked participants in several Asian
diaspora communities. Enteen locates instances where
users resist popular understandings of cyberspace,
nation, and community, presenting unexpected
responses to the forces of globalization.
2009: 208pp
Hb: 978-0-415-97724-1: £90.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99429-3: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87950-4
41
42
New in 2012
New in 2012
New in 2012
Heritage and Social Media
Online@AsiaPacific
Understanding and Experiencing Heritage in
a Participatory Culture
Networked Sociality, Creativity and Politics
in the Asia-Pacific Region
Mobile Interfaces in Public
Spaces
Edited by Elisa Giaccardi, Universidad Carlos IIII de
Madrid, Spain
Larissa Hjorth, RMIT University, Australia and
Michael Arnold, University of Melbourne, Australia
Heritage and Social Media explores how social media
reframes our understanding and experience of heritage
by opening up novel, more participatory ways of
interacting around heritage objects and concerns.
Through the idea of participatory culture the book
begins to explore how social media can be brought to
bear on the encounter with heritage artefacts and
settings and on the socially produced meanings and
values that individuals and communities ascribe to them.
Series: Asia’s Transformations/Asia.com
Adriana De Souza E. Silva and Jordan Frith,
North Carolina State University, USA
How does the online activity distort, or shape the offline
world? And what are the emerging modes of
community, sociality, media literacy, creativity and politics
traversing online and offline spaces as Web 2.0 and
social networked media burgeon? This book seeks to
consider these questions by drawing on case studies
which all describe ’a day in the life’ in a crossgenerational, cross-class familial context at six locations,
Manila, Tokyo, Seoul, Singapore, Shanghai and
Melbourne, bringing new insights into localized and
regional online communities that are as dynamic and
ever-evolving as the Internet itself.
This book focuses on the social and political implications
of using location-aware technologies in public spaces. It
aims at analyzing not only how our traditional ideas of
public space and social interactions are challenged by
the use of these technologies, but also how existing
concepts of privacy and sociability determine the design
and use of these types of technology. The authors frame
the development of location-aware mobile devices
within the history of previous media, looking at the way
the book, the walkman, and the iPod have also helped
individuals manage their interactions with public spaces.
August 2012: 240pp
Hb: 978-0-415-67216-0: £75.00
Hb: 978-0-415-88823-3: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-50600-7: £24.99
New in 2012
New
Social Media
Mobile Interface Theory
Edited by Theresa M. Senft, University of East London,
UK and Jeremy Hunsinger, Virginia Tech, USA
Jason Farman, University of Maryland, USA
Heritage and Social Media provides readers with a
framework to understand how the participatory culture
fostered by social media changes the way in which we
experience and think of heritage. By introducing
readers to how social media are theorized and used,
particularly outside the institutional domain, the
volume reveals through groundbreaking case studies
the emerging heritage practices unique to social media
and illuminate what can be done in this burgeoning
sector of heritage work.
July 2012: 272pp
Hb: 978-0-415-61662-1: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-61667-6: £24.99
New in 2012
Understanding Digital
Literacies
A Practical Introduction
Assuming no knowledge of linguistics, Understanding
Digital Literacies provides an accessible and timely
introduction to new literacies for university students. It
supplies readers with the theoretical and analytical tools
with which to explore the discursive structures, linguistic
features and the social impact of a host of new media
practises. Each chapter in the volume covers a different
topic, presenting an overview of the major concepts,
issues, problems and debates surrounding the topic,
while also encouraging students to reflect on and
critically evaluate their own language and
communication practices.
This book will provide a key resource for undergraduate
and graduate students studying courses in new media
and digital literacies.
March 2012: 208pp
Hb: 978-0-415-67316-7: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-67315-0: £20.99
The Routledge Handbook of Social Media explores how
social media are changing disciplinary understandings of
the nature of the Internet, and reshaping our everyday
lives. In addition to person-to-person social networking
services like Facebook and Twitter, this volume considers
a broad range of networked information services that
support in-depth social interaction, community
formation, and collaboration. The Handbook features a
set of keywords that looks to provide a common
language and platform for future analysis of social media
as texts.
Hb: 978-0-415-88680-2: £125.00
New
Stories and Social Media
Identities and Interaction
Ruth E. Page, University of Leicester, UK
Series: Routledge Studies in Sociolinguistics
This book examines everyday stories of personal
experience that are published online in contemporary
forms of social media. Taking examples from discussion
boards, blogs, social network sites, microblogging sites,
wikis, collaborative and participatory storytelling
projects, Ruth Page explores how new and existing
narrative genres are being (re)shaped in different online
contexts and how the characteristics of social media,
which emphasize recency, interpersonal connection and
mobile distribution, amplify or reverse different aspects
of canonical storytelling.
Locational Privacy, Control and Urban
Sociability
Embodied Space and Locative Media
In Mobile Interface Theory,
Jason Farman demonstrates
how the worldwide adoption of
mobile technologies is causing a
re-examination of the core ideas
about what it means to live our
everyday lives. He argues that
mobile media’s pervasive
computing model, which allows
users to connect and interact
with the Internet while moving
across a wide variety of
locations, has produced a new
sense of self among users, a new embodied identity that
stems from virtual space and material space regularly
enhancing, cooperating or disrupting each other.
Exploring a range of mobile media practices, including
mobile maps and GPS technologies, location-aware
social networks, urban and alternate reality games that
use mobile devices, performance art, and storytelling
projects, Farman illustrates how mobile technologies are
changing the ways we produce lived, embodied spaces.
Hb: 978-0-415-87890-6: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-87891-3: £20.99
eBook: 978-0-203-84766-4
Hb: 978-0-415-88981-0: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-14861-7
Companion Website
n e w m e di a an d cybe rc ult u re
New
New
New
Net Works
Migration and New Media
Language and Technology
Case Studies in Web Art and Design
Transnational Families and Polymedia
xtine burrough, California State University, USA
Mirca Madianou, University of Cambridge, UK and
Daniel Miller, University College London, UK
Angela Goddard and Beverly Geesin, both at York
St. John University, UK
Net Works offers an inside look
into the process of successfully
developing thoughtful,
innovative digital media. In
many practice-based art texts
and classrooms, technology is
divorced from the socio-political
concerns of those using it.
Although there are many
resources for media theorists,
practice-based students
sometimes find it difficult to
engage with a text that fails to relate theoretical
concerns to the act of creating. Net Works strives to fill
that gap.
Using websites as case studies, each chapter introduces
a different style of web project – from formalist play to
social activism to data visualization – and then includes
the artists’ or entrepreneurs’ reflections on the particular
challenges and outcomes of developing that web
project. Scholarly introductions to each section apply a
theoretical frame for the projects. A Companion Website
offers further resources for hands-on learning.
Combining practical skills for web authoring with critical
perspectives on the web, Net Works is ideal for courses
in new media design, art, communication, critical
studies, media and technology, or popular digital/
Internet culture.
How do parents and children care and look after each
other when they are separated because of migration?
The way in which families maintain long distance
communication has been revolutionised by the
emergence of a variety of Internet – and mobile
phone-based platforms including email, instant
messaging, social networking sites, videocalling and
texting. These have created a new communicative
environment, termed ’polymedia’. We are now in an era
when it is possible to maintain intimacy and care at a
distance and such communicative opportunities may
even play a role in shaping decisions relating to
migration and settlement. This book draws on a
long-term ethnographic study of prolonged separation
between transnational Filipino migrant mothers in the
UK and their left-behind children in the Philippines. The
authors seek to go beyond both media studies and
anthropology to construct a new theory of mediated
relationships that combines findings from both
disciplines and has considerable importance for the
social sciences more generally.
Hb: 978-0-415-67928-2: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-67929-9: £22.99
eBook: 978-0-203-15423-6
Series: Intertext
’This publication provides a clear introduction to
the field of language and technology and examines
the way in which language is used and affected by
the new technologies that are springing up around
us.’ – Ruth Payne-Woolridge, University of Leeds, UK
This accessible textbook in the
Routledge Intertext series offers
students hands-on practical
experience of textual analysis
focused on language and
technology. Written in a clear,
user-friendly style, it combines
practical activities with texts,
accompanied by commentaries
and suggestions for further
study.
May 2011: 128pp
Pb: 978-0-415-60416-1: £14.99
NEW
July 2011: 264pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88221-7: £90.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88222-4: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-84794-7
Language and Learning in the
Digital Age
New
James Paul Gee and Elisabeth R. Hayes, both at
Arizona State University, USA
A Student Guide
Internet Linguistics
David Crystal
New
Race After the Internet
Edited by Lisa Nakamura, University of Illinois at
Urbana-Champaign, USA and Peter Chow-White,
Simon Fraser University, USA
Investigating how racialization
and racism are changing in Web
2.0 digital media culture, Race
After the Internet contains
interdisciplinary essays on the
shifting terrain of racial identity
and its connections to digital
media, including Facebook and
MySpace, YouTube and viral
video, WiFi infrastructure, the
One Laptop Per Child (OLPC)
program, genetic ancestry
testing, DNA databases in
health and law enforcement, and popular online games
like World of Warcraft. Ultimately, the collection
broadens the definition of the ’digital divide’ in order to
convey a more nuanced understanding of usage,
meaning, participation, and production of digital media
technology in light of racial inequality.
Hb: 978-0-415-80235-2: £85.00
Pb: 978-0-415-80236-9: £25.00
eBook: 978-0-203-87506-3
The Internet is now an integral
part of contemporary life, and
linguists are increasingly
studying its influence on
language. In this studentfriendly guidebook, leading
language authority Professor
David Crystal follows on from
his landmark bestseller
Language and the Internet and
presents the area as a new field:
Internet linguistics.
In his engaging trademark style,
Crystal addresses the online linguistic issues that affect
us on a daily basis, incorporating real-life examples
drawn from his own studies and personal involvement
with Internet companies. He provides new linguistic
analyses of Twitter, Internet security, and online
advertising, explores the evolving multilingual character
of the Internet, and offers illuminating observations
about a wide range of online behaviour, from spam to
exclamation marks.
Including many activities and suggestions for further
research, this is the essential introduction to a critical
new field for students of all levels of English language,
linguistics and new media.
January 2011: 192pp
Hb: 978-0-415-60268-6: £60.00
Pb: 978-0-415-60271-6: £16.99
eBook: 978-0-203-83090-1
In Language and Learning in the
Digital Age, linguist James Paul
Gee and educator Elisabeth
Hayes deal with the forces
unleashed by today’s digital
media, forces that are
transforming language and
learning for good and ill. They
argue that the role of oral
language is almost always
entirely misunderstood in
debates about digital media.
Like the earlier inventions of
writing and print, digital media actually power up or
enhance the powers of oral language.
Gee and Hayes deal, as well, with current digital
transformations of language and literacy in the context
of a growing crisis in traditional schooling in developed
countries. With the advent of new forms of digital
media, children are increasingly drawn towards video
games, social media, and alternative ways of learning.
Gee and Hayes explore the way in which these
alternative methods of learning can be a force for a
paradigm change in schooling.
This is an engaging, accessible read both for
undergraduate and graduate students and for scholars
in language, linguistics, education, media and
communication studies.
January 2011: 168pp
Hb: 978-0-415-60276-1: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-60277-8: £18.99
eBook: 978-0-203-83091-8
43
44
NEW
New
Web 2.0
Godwired
Sam Han
Religion, Ritual and Virtual Reality
Series: Shortcuts
Rachel Wagner, Ithaca College, USA
Web 2.0 is a highly accessible introductory text examining
all the crucial discussions and issues which surround the
changing nature of the World Wide Web. It not only
contextualises the Web 2.0 within the history of the Web,
but also goes on to explore its position within the broader
dispositif of emerging media technologies.
Series: Media, Religion and Culture
Godwired offers an engaging exploration of religious
practice in the digital age. It considers how virtual
experiences, like stories, games and rituals, are forms of
world-building or ’cosmos construction’ that serve as a
means of making sense of our own world. Such creative
and interactive activity is, arguably, patently religious.
The book uncovers the connections between diverse
media technologies including mobile smart phones,
hand-held multimedia players, ’netbooks’ and electronic
book readers such as the Amazon Kindle, all of which are
made possible only by the Web 2.0. In addition, Web 2.0
makes a valuable contribution towards understanding the
new developments in mobile computing as it integrates
various aspects of social networking, whilst also tackling
head-on the recent controversial debates that have arisen
in a backlash to the Web 2.0.
•whether it is possible to gather for worship in online
space.
Providing valuable insight into this emerging area of the
World Wide Web, Web 2.0 is a key supplementary text
for undergraduate students of media studies, sociology,
philosophy and other related disciplines, as well as being
an informative read for anyone with an interest in this key
contemporary issue.
Rachel Wagner suggests that whilst our engagement
with virtual reality can be viewed as a form of religious
activity, today’s virtual religion marks a radical departure
from traditional religious practice – it is ephemeral,
transient, rapid, disposable, hyper-individualized, hybrid,
and in an ongoing state of flux.
April 2011: 144pp
Hb: 978-0-415-78039-1: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-78040-7: £17.99
eBook: 978-0-203-85522-5
Hb: 978-0-415-78144-2: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-78145-9: £24.99
New
Muslim Women Online
Faith and Identity in Virtual Space
Anna Piela
Series: Islamic Studies Series
While issues surrounding Muslim women are common in
the international media, the voices of Muslim women
themselves are largely absent from media coverage and
despite the rapidly increasing presence of Muslim
women in online groups and discussions, it is still a
relatively unexplored topic. This book examines Muslim
women in transnational online groups, and their views
on education, culture, marriage, sexuality, work,
dress-code, race, class and sisterhood.
Looking at both egalitarian and traditionalist Muslim
women’s views, the author considers their
interpretations of Islam and identifies a new category of
holists who focus on developing the Islamic sisterhood.
Drawing on detailed analysis of online transcripts, she
highlights women’s rhetorical techniques and the
thorough knowledge of Islamic sources which they use
to justify their points in online discussions. She details
how in the online context, as opposed to offline
interactions, Muslim women are much more willing to
cross boundaries between traditionalist and egalitarian
interpretations of Islam and women’s Islamic rights and
responsibilities and to develop collaborative
interpretations with supporters of different views.
Shedding light on a candid and forthright global
community, this book is an important contribution to the
debate on women in Islam, and as such will be of
interest to scholars and students of Islamic studies,
gender studies, media studies and the Middle East.
October 2011: 160pp
Hb: 978-0-415-59697-8: £75.00
This book examines:
•the nature of sacred space
•technology as a vehicle for sacred texts
•who we are when we go online
•how religious ritual works online
LGBT Identity and Online New
Media
Edited by Christopher Pullen, Bournemouth
University, UK and Margaret Cooper, Southern
Illinois University, USA
LGBT Identity and Online New Media examines
constructions of LGBT identity within new media. The
contributors consider the effects, issues, influences,
benefits and disadvantages of these new media
phenomena with respect to the construction of LGBT
identities. A wide range of mainstream and independent
new media are analyzed, including MySpace, Facebook,
YouTube, gay men’s health websites, message boards,
and Craigslist ads, among others. This is a pioneering
interdisciplinary collection that is essential reading for
anyone interested in the intersections of gender,
sexuality, and technology.
Contributors include: Jonathan Alexander, Ben Aslinger,
Trudy Barber, Richard Berger, Joseph Clift, Margaret
Cooper, Ian Davies, Bruce E. Drushel, Kristina Dzara,
Monica Edwards, Daniel Farr, Mary L. Gray, Ronald Gregg,
Rosalind Hanmer, Damon Lindler Lazzara, Elizabeth Losh,
Mark McHarry, Eleanor Morrison, Sharif Mowlabocus,
Noah Tsika, Nikki Usher and Jason Whitesel.
2010: 328pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99866-6: £85.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99867-3: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-85543-0
Immersed in Media
New
Telepresence in Everyday Life
Digital Drama
Edited by Cheryl Campanella Bracken and Paul
Skalski, both at Cleveland State University, USA
Art, Culture and Multimedia in Tanzania
Paula Uimonen, Stockholm University, Sweden
The aim of this book is to explore digital media and
intercultural interaction at an arts college in Tanzania
through innovative forms of ethnographic
representation. The book and the series website weave
together visual and aural narratives, interviews and
observations, life stories and video documentaries, art
performances and productions. It paints a vivid portrayal
of everyday life in East Africa’s only institute for practical
art training, while tracing the rich cultural history of a
state that has mixed tribalism, nationalism, PanAfricanism, and cosmopolitanism in astonishingly
creative ways.
While following the anthropological tradition of thick
description, Digital Drama employs a more artistic and
accessible style of writing. Dramatic, ethnographic
details are interspersed with theoretical reflections and
postulations to explain and make sense of the unfolding
narratives. The Companion Website visualizes and
sensualizes the stories narrated in the book, unfolding a
dramatic world of African dance, music, theater, and
digital culture.
Immersed in Media highlights the increasing significance
of telepresence in the media field. With contributions
representing diverse disciplines, this volume delves into
the topic through considerations of popular media types
and their effects on users. Chapters in the work explain
how the experience of presence can be affected by
media technologies, including television, video games,
film, and the Internet. They also discuss how presence
experience mediates or moderates commonly studied
media effects, such as enjoyment, persuasion, and
aggression. These discussions are accompanied by
overviews of the current state of presence research and
its future. Ultimately, this work establishes the crucial
role of telepresence in gaining a complete understanding
of the uses and effects of popular media technologies.
2009: 272pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99339-5: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99340-1: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-89233-6
Hb: 978-0-415-89410-4: £100.00
Pb: 978-0-415-89411-1: £21.99
3rd Edition
A Student Guide
Producing for Web 2.0
Jason Whittaker, Falmouth College of Arts, UK
2009: 272pp
Hb: 978-0-415-48621-7: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-48622-4: £19.99
eBook: 978-0-203-88203-0
Companion Website
v i de o Ga m e s
Video Games
New in 2012
2nd Edition
Understanding Video Games
The Essential Introduction
Jonas Heide Smith, Simon Egenfeldt-Nielsen and Susana Pajares Tosca, all al IT University of Copenhagen, Denmark
Understanding Video Games traces the history of video games, introduces the major theories used to analyze games such as ludology and narratology, reviews the economics of
the game industry, examines the aesthetics of game design, surveys a broad range of game genres, explores player culture, and addresses the major debates surrounding the
medium, from educational benefits to the effects of violence.
Throughout the book, the authors ask students to consider larger questions, including:
•What defines a video game?
•Who plays games?
•Why do we play games?
•How do games affect the player?
Extensively illustrated, Understanding Video Games is an indispensable and comprehensive resource for those interested in the ways video games are reshaping entertainment and
society. A Companion Website features student resources including discussion questions for each chapter, a glossary of key terms, a video game timeline, and links to other video
game studies resources for further study.
June 2012: 304pp
Hb: 978-0-415-89696-2: £95.00
Pb: 978-0-415-89697-9: £34.99
New in 2012
New in 2012
New
Best Before
2nd Edition
Videogames
Video Gamers
Videogames, Obsolescence and Cultural
Heritage
James Newman
James Newman
This lucid and engaging introduction guides the reader
through the world of videogaming, providing a history of
the videogame, from its origins in the computer lab to its
contemporary status as a global entertainment industry.
Despite record sales and an ever-growing global industry,
the simple fact is that videogames are disappearing. Best
Before examines the ways in which the obsessions with
technological obsolescence and supersession and an
industry defined by continual innovation have effectively
closed down the possibility of valuing old videogames in
any way other than curiosities or waypoints along the
teleological journey to the next generation of hardware
and software.
James Newman presents videogames as new media in
need of preservation and discusses the practical and
conceptual challenges faced by the emerging group of
memory and heritage organisations dedicated to saving
and interpreting these rich, complex and mutable texts
and the cultures of gameplay and fandom that surround
and support them.
In addition, Best Before offers a series of in-depth case
studies that explore aspects of videogame preservation
such as the efficacy of hardware and software emulation,
the place of the artefact in an increasingly virtual world,
the role of the fan as archivist and researcher, and the
challenges of exhibiting videogame materials.
June 2012: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-57791-5: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-57792-2: £19.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14426-8
Sept 2012: 208pp
Hb: 978-0-415-66915-3: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-66916-0: £19.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14342-1
New in 2012
Videogames and Virtual
Realities in East Asia
Edited by Dixon Wong, University of Hong Kong
and William H. Kelly, Tama University, Japan
Videogames are extremely popular in East Asia. This
book examines the phenomenon, showing how the
structure of the games business, and therefore the
engagement between consumers and games, varies
considerably between different parts of East Asia, with
game consoles dominating in Japan and online gaming
prevailing in Korea.
June 2012: 256pp
Hb: 978-0-415-69422-3: £85.00
Garry Crawford
Video gaming is economically,
educationally, culturally, socially
and theoretically important, and
has, in a relatively short period of
time, firmly cemented its place
within contemporary life. It is fair
to say, however, that the majority
of research to date has focused
most specifically on either the
video games themselves, or the
direct engagement of gamers
with a specific piece of game
technology.
In contrast, Video Gamers is the first book to explicitly
and comprehensively address how digital games are
experienced and engaged with in the everyday lives,
social networks and consumer patterns of those who
play them. In doing so, the book provides a key
introduction to the study of gamers and the games they
play, whilst also reflecting on the current debates and
literatures surrounding gaming practices.
August 2011: 200pp
Hb: 978-0-415-56368-0: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-67441-6: £25.99
eBook: 978-0-203-86337-4
45
vid eo ga m es
46
m us i c , s oun d an d ra d i o
New
Serious Games
Online Gaming in Context
Mechanisms and Effects
The Social and Cultural Significance of
Online Games
Edited by Garry Crawford and Victoria K. Gosling
and Ben Light, both at University of Salford, UK
Edited by Ute Ritterfeld, Free University of
Amsterdam, the Netherlands, Michael Cody,
University of Southern California, USA and
Peter Vorderer, also at Free University of
Amsterdam, the Netherlands
Series: Routledge Advances in Sociology
There is little question of the social, cultural and
economic importance of video games in the world today,
with gaming now rivalling the movie and music sectors
as a major leisure industry and pastime. The significance
of video games within our everyday lives has certainly
been increased and shaped by new technologies and
gaming patterns, including the rise of home-based
games consoles, advances in mobile telephone
technology, the rise in more ’sociable’ forms of gaming,
and of course the advent of the Internet.
This book explores the opportunities, challenges and
patterns of gameplay and sociality afforded by the
Internet and online gaming. Bringing together a series of
original essays from both leading and emerging
academics in the field of game studies, many of which
employ new empirical work and innovative theoretical
approaches to gaming, this book considers key issues
crucial to our understanding of online gaming and
associated social relations, including: patterns of play,
legal and copyright issues, player production, identity
construction, gamer communities, communication,
patterns of social exclusion and inclusion around
religion, gender and disability, and future directions in
online gaming.
Hb: 978-0-415-55619-4: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-86959-8
The Poetry of Radio
2009: 552pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99369-2: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99370-8: £32.99
eBook: 978-0-203-89165-0
This book explores the idea of the poetic in radio and
sound and the concept of sound as poetry both historically
and within a contemporary perspective, examining
examples of makers and works internationally. Alongside
audio poetry, the book discusses the spoken word including
documentaries and public announcements, soundscapes,
film sound design and sonic art. It considers technologies
and platforms for listening including podcasts, radio
broadcasts and sonic art installations.
March 2012: 192pp
Hb: 978-0-415-60410-9: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-14348-3
Also available:
That’s the Joint!
The Politics of Play in Military Video Games
Edited by Nina B. Huntemann, Suffolk University,
USA and Matthew Thomas Payne, University of
Texas at Austin, USA
This collection features all new
essays that explore how modern
warfare has been represented in
and influenced by video games.
The contributors explore the
history and political economy of
video games and the “militaryentertainment complex;” present
textual analyses of militarythemed video games such as
Metal Gear Solid; and offer
reception studies of gamers,
fandom, and political activism
Jenny Sundén, Södertörn University, Sweden and
Malin Sveningsson, Karlstad University, Sweden
Series: Routledge Advances in Feminist Studies and
Intersectionality
Seán Street, Bournemouth University, UK
Joystick Soldiers
Passionate Play
Hb: 978-0-415-89766-2: £80.00
The Colour of Sound
Gender and Sexuality in Online
Game Cultures
How do gender and sexuality come to matter in online
game cultures? This book is about female players’
passionate encounters within the online game World of
Warcraft and its player cultures. Through a ’twin
ethnography,’ the authors develop two parallel stories of
’straight’ versus ’queer’ cultures of play.
New in 2012
Anchored primarily in social
science research, the reader will
be introduced to approaches that
focus on the gaming process and
the users’ experiences. Additional
perspectives will be provided in
the concluding chapters, written
from non-social science
approaches by experts in
academic game design and
representatives of the gaming
industry. The editors
acknowledge the necessity for a
broader interdisciplinary study of the phenomena and work
to overcome the methodological divide in games research
to look ahead to a more integrated and interdisciplinary
study of digital games.
New
Music, Sound
and Radio
within online gaming.
2009: 328pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99659-4: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99660-0: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-88446-1
The Video Game Theory
Reader 2
Edited by Bernard Perron and Mark J.P. Wolf
2008: 456pp
Hb: 978-0-415-96282-7: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-96283-4: £27.99
eBook: 978-0-203-88766-0
New in 2012
The Sound Studies Reader
Edited by Jonathan Sterne, McGill University,
Canada
The Sound Studies Reader is a
groundbreaking anthology
blending recent work that
self-consciously describes itself
as ’sound studies’ along with
earlier and lesser known
scholarship on sound.
The collection begins with an
introduction to welcome novice
readers to the field and
acquaint them the main issues
in sound studies, followed by a
new essay by the editor providing an intellectual history
of sound studies. Individual section introductions give
readers further background on the essays and an
extensive up-to-date bibliography for further reading in
’sound studies’ make this an original and accessible
guide to the field.
June 2012: 496pp
Hb: 978-0-415-77130-6: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-77131-3: £24.99
Companion Website
m us i c s oun d an d r a d i o
New in 2012
New
Programme Making for Radio
Sound Production
Network Nations
Jim Beaman
A Guide to Critical Practice
Series: Media Skills
Andrew Lansley, University of Gloucestershire, UK
A Transnational History of British and
American Broadcasting
Michele Hilmes, University of Wisconsin, USA
Sound Production introduces
students to applying the
processes of audio techniques
within the sphere of media
production. Presuming no prior
technical knowledge, Andrew
Lansley focuses on universal
techniques that will work across
all contemporary software and
be of use to those needing to
work with sound for radio, TV,
film, videogames and websites.
The format of the text follows a simple structure broken
down into three main parts:
•Part 1: Theory and Technical Information – including a
brief history of sound, basic audio theory – digital and
biological, equipment and software
•Part 2: Techniques and Processes – including recording,
digitising and organising, editing, equalisation, dynamic
processes, FX processes, mixing, fixing and mastering
•Part 3: Industry Specific Applications and Exercises
– including the radio, film/TV, web and gaming industries.
The book includes masterclasses from professionals in each
field including amongst others:
•BBC Wildlife audio producer and editor Peter Butler
•Record Producer George Shilling, who has worked with
artists such as Blur and James Brown
•BBC Trails Editor Rob Champion
•Grammy nominated producer, James Towler.
It is supported by a Companion Website providing further
source material and exercises.
March 2012: 256pp
Hb: 978-0-415-55482-4: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-55483-1: £26.99
In Network Nations, Michele
Hilmes reveals and reconceptualizes the roots of
media globalization through a
historical look at the productive
transnational cultural
relationship between British and
American broadcasting. Though
frequently painted as opposites
– the British public service
tradition contrasting with the
American commercial system
– in fact they represent two
sides of the same coin. Neither could have developed
without the constant presence of the other, in terms not
only of industry and policy but of aesthetics, culture, and
creativity, despite a long history of oppositional rhetoric.
Based on primary research in British and American
archives, Network Nations argues for a new
transnational approach to media history, looking across
the traditional national boundaries within which media is
studied to encourage an awareness that media
globalization has a long and fruitful history. Placing
media history in the framework of theories of
nationalism and national identity, Hilmes examines
critical episodes of transnational interaction between the
US and Britain.
Programme Making for Radio examines the individual
roles and responsibilities of the whole production team
and the importance of team-working skills. Chapters
focus on the specific requirements of specialist
programmes and offer advice from a range of
programme makers working in local and national
broadcasting. There is a case study example that follows
the progress of a feature programme from pitching the
original idea, through assembling material to final
transmission.
2006: 152pp
Hb: 978-0-415-36571-0: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-36572-7: £18.99
eBook: 978-0-203-96943-4
For more titles in:
The Media Skills Series
See page 57
New
As the global circuits of television grow and as global
regions, particularly Europe, attempt to define a
common culture, the historical role played by the British/
US media dialogue takes on new significance.
2nd Edition
August 2011: 376pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88384-9: £95.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88385-6: £27.99
eBook: 978-0-203-84320-8
Edited by Martin Clayton and Trevor Herbert,
both at The Open University, UK and Richard
Middleton, University of Newcastle, UK
What is the relationship between music and culture? The
first edition of The Cultural Study of Music: A Critical
Introduction explored this question with groundbreaking
rigor and breadth. Now this second edition refines that
original analysis while examining the ways the field has
developed in the years since the book’s initial
publication.
The Biographical Encyclopedia
of American Radio
Edited by Christopher H. Sterling, George
Washington University, USA and Cary O’Dell
Scholarly but accessible, The Biographical Encyclopedia of
American Radio provides an unrivaled guide to the voices
behind radio for students and general readers alike.
2010: 480pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99549-8: £110.00
eBook: 978-0-203-85489-1
The Concise Encyclopedia of
American Radio
Edited by Christopher H. Sterling, George
Washington University, USA and Cary O’Dell
2009: 940pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99533-7: £110.00
eBook: 978-0-203-86355-8
The Cultural Study of Music
Including contributions from scholars of music, cultural
studies, anthropology and sociology, this anthology
provides a comprehensive introduction to the study of
music and culture. It includes both pioneering theoretical
essays and exhaustively researched case studies on
particular issues in world musics. For the second edition,
the original essays have been revised and nine new
chapters have been added, covering themes such as
gender and sexuality, the politics of music, ecology and
race. With an even broader scope and a larger roster of
world-renowned contributors, The Cultural Study of
Music is certain to remain a canonical text in the field of
cultural musicology.
Hb: 978-0-415-88190-6: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88191-3: £27.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14945-4
47
m u si c, so u nd an d r adio
48
Media Practice
The Media Practice Handbooks are
comprehensive resource books for students
of media and journalism, and for anyone
planning a career as a media professional.
Each Handbook combines a clear
introduction to understanding how the
media work with practical information
about the structure, processes and skills
involved in working in today’s media
industries, providing not only a guide on
‘how to do it’ but also a critical reflection
on contemporary media practice.
New
The Sound Handbook
Tim Crook, Goldsmiths, University of London, UK
’Tim Crook has written an important and
much-needed book, and its arrival on our shelves
has come at a highly appropriate time.’ – Professor
Sean Street, Bournemouth University, UK
The Sound Handbook maps
theoretical and practical
connections between the
creation and study of sound
across the multi-media
spectrum of film, radio, music,
sound art, websites, animation
and computer games
entertainment, and stage
theatre.
Using a cross-disciplinary
approach Tim Crook explores
the technologies, philosophies
and cultural issues involved in making and experiencing
sound, investigating soundscape debates and providing
both intellectual and creative production information.
The book covers the history, theory and practice of
sound and includes practical production projects and a
glossary of key terms.
The Sound Handbook is supported by a Companion
Website, signposted throughout the book, with further
practical and theoretical resources dedicated to bridging
the creation and study of sound across professional
platforms and academic disciplines.
Hb: 978-0-415-55150-2: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-55152-6: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-15320-8
m e di a l aw
New
The Music Industry Handbook
Paul Rutter, Southampton Solent University, UK
Drawing on a range of music
industry research sources,
personal experience and
consultation with key industry
professionals, The Music
Industry Handbook explains
how the industry in its broadest
sense is structured, and how its
various elements work in
practice.
May 2011: 320pp
Hb: 978-0-415-58680-1: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-58681-8: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-81685-1
3rd Edition
The Radio Handbook
Carole Fleming, Nottingham Trent University, UK
The Radio Handbook is a
comprehensive guide to radio
broadcasting in Britain.
Featuring two entirely new
chapters for this edition, You
Radio and Sport on Radio, this
text offers a thorough
introduction to radio in the
twenty-first century. Using new
examples, case studies and
illustrations, it examines the
various components that make
radio, from music selection to
news presentation, and from phone-ins to sport
programmes. Discussing a variety of new media such as
podcasts, digital radio and web-linked radio stations,
Carole Fleming explores the place of radio today, the
extraordinary growth of commercial radio and the
importance of community radio.
The Radio Handbook shows how communication theory
informs everyday broadcasts and encourages a critical
approach to radio listening and to radio practice.
Addressing issues of regulation, accountability and
representation, it offers advice on working in radio and
outlines the skills needed for a career in the industry.
2009: 232pp
Hb: 978-0-415-44507-8: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-44508-5: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87377-9
Media Law
New
4th Edition
Media Law and Ethics
Roy L. Moore, Middle Tennessee State University, USA
and Michael D. Murray, University of Missouri, USA
This textbook explicitly
integrates both media law and
ethics within one volume. A
truly comprehensive overview,
this text is a thoughtful
introduction to media law
principles and cases and the
related ethical concerns relevant
to the practice of professional
communication. With special
attention made to key cases and
practices, authors Roy L. Moore
and Michael D. Murray revisit
the most timely and incendiary issues in modern
American media.
Exploring where the law ends and ethics begin, each
chapter includes a discussion of the ethical dimensions
of a specific legal topic. The Fourth Edition includes new
legal cases and emerging issues in media law and ethics
as well as revised subject and case indexes. In addition to
a separate chapter devoted exclusively to media ethics
by Michael Farrell, a new chapter on international and
foreign law by Dr. Kyu Ho Youm has also been added.
Resources on the Companion Website include updated
PowerPoint presentations, an instructor manual, and a
sample syllabus for instructors, and study guides,
practice quizzes, and all seven of the bookís original
appendices for students.
An excellent integration of both law and ethics, this is
the ideal text for undergraduate and graduate courses in
media law and ethics.
Hb: 978-0-415-89462-3: £140.00
Pb: 978-0-415-89463-0: £64.99
Also available:
Advertising and Public
Relations Law, See page 18
Publishing Law, See page 61
For more titles in:
Visit: www.routledge.com/u/media_practice
Companion Website
m e di a m an ag e m e n t an d e con o mi cs
New
Ursula Smartt, Thames Valley University, UK
presents a contemporary
analysis of the law relating to
the media and entertainment
industry both in terms of its
practical application and its
theoretical framework. Looking
at key aspects such as TV and
radio broadcasting, the print
press, the music industry, online
news and entertainment and
social networking sites, this
textbook provides students with detailed coverage of the
key principles, cases and legislation as well as a critical
analysis of regulatory bodies such as the Press
Complaints Commission and OFCOM.
Drawing on principles from public law, tort, contract law
and human rights, Media and Entertainment Law
explores all the central themes of the subject including
privacy and confidentiality, contempt of court,
defamation and intellectual property, as well as helping
students to gain an awareness of ethical issues
surrounding journalistic practice.
With integrated coverage of Scots and Northern Irish
law, Media and Entertainment Law also highlights
comparisons with similar overseas jurisdictions (such as
US and European law) in order to help students
demonstrate an awareness of media laws which may
influence UK legislation.
Media
Management
and Economics
The Handbook of Spanish
Language Media
Alan B. Albarran, University of North Texas, USA
This volume draws on the
expertise of authors and
collaborators across the globe.
The book is an essential
reference work for graduate
students, scholars, and media
practitioners interested in
Spanish language media, and is
certain to influence the course
of future research in this
growing and increasingly
influential area.
The Media Economy
Alan B. Albarran, University of North Texas, USA
Series: Media Management and Economics Series
The Media Economy analyzes the media industries and
their activities from macro to micro levels, using concepts
and theories to demonstrate the role the media plays in
the economy as a whole. It includes examples from both
developed and developing nations, as well as data and
trends from these countries. It is essential reading for
students and practitioners in media management and
economics who need to understand the role of media in
the global economy.
2009: 336pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99044-8: £115.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99101-8: £39.95
eBook: 978-0-203-92647-5
2010: 216pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99045-5: £56.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99046-2: £19.99
eBook: 978-0-203-92771-7
A Companion Website accompanies the book, offering a
Flashcard Glossary of all the key terms in media and
entertainment law, a list of links to useful websites and
annual updates to the text.
April 2011: 544pp
Hb: 978-0-415-66515-5: £85.00
Pb: 978-0-415-57756-4: £29.99
eBook: 978-0-203-81847-3
Routledge Communication and Media
Studies on Facebook and Twitter
Did you know that we are on Facebook and Twitter? Follow us and join the conversation.
Our social media sites are a great way of following what’s new from Routledge in these subject
areas. We’ll share news about the latest books published and special issues from journals, you can
read recent book reviews or share your own, plus there are regular links to lots of free articles,
special offers and useful information. Whether you’re interested in a specific area or just have a
general interest in media and communications, we hope to offer something for everyone.
Start following us today and say hello.
Routledge Communication Studies
Routledge Media Studies
Facebook: www.facebook.com/RoutledgeCommunication Facebook: www.facebook.com/RoutledgeMedia
Twitter: http://twitter.com/Routledge_Comms
Twitter: http://twitter.com/Routledge_MandC
Find Routledge on Facebook
Follow Routledge on Twitter
Like Us
Like us. Learn from us.
49
j ou rna lis m
50
Journalism
New
Journalism
Studies
Andrew Calcutt, University of East London, UK
and Philip Hammond, South Bank University, UK
As the world of politics and public affairs has gradually changed beyond recognition over the past two decades, journalism too has been transformed. Yet
the study of news and journalism often seems stuck with ideas and debates which have lost much of their critical purchase. Journalism is at a crossroads:
it needs to reaffirm core values and rediscover key activities, almost certainly in new forms, or it risks losing its distinctive character as well as its
commercial basis. Journalism Studies is a polemical textbook that rethinks the field of journalism studies for the contemporary era.
Organised around three central themes – ownership, objectivity and the public – Journalism Studies addresses the contexts in which journalism is
produced, practised and disseminated. It outlines key issues and debates, reviewing established lines of critique in relation to the state of contemporary
journalism, then offering alternative ways of approaching these issues, seeking to reconceptualise them in order to suggest an agenda for change and
development in both journalism studies and journalism itself.
Journalism Studies is a concise and accessible introduction to contemporary journalism studies, and will be highly useful to undergraduate and
postgraduate students on a range of Journalism, Media and Communications courses.
Selected Contents: Acknowledgements Introduction: Journalism in Question Part I: Ownership Chapter 1. Ownership and the News Industry Chapter 2. Media
and Mediating Activity Part II: Objectivity Chapter 3. The Rise and Fall of Objectivity Chapter 4. The Future of Objectivity Part III: The Public Chapter 5. The
Fragmenting Public Conclusion: Journalism and Journalism Studies Notes References Index
January 2011: 200pp • Hb: 978-0-415-55430-5: £70.00 • Pb: 978-0-415-55431-2: £19.99 • eBook: 978-0-203-83174-8
Multimedia
Journalism
A Practical Guide
Split into three levels – getting started, building proficiency and professional standards
– this book builds on the knowledge attained in each part, and ensures that skills are
introduced one step at a time until professional competency is achieved. This three
stage structure means it can be used from initial to advanced level to learn the key skill
areas of video, audio, text, and pictures and how to combine them to create
multimedia packages. Skills covered include:
•writing news reports, features, email bulletins and blogs
•building a website using a content management system
•measuring the success of your website or blog
Andy Bull
’A great textbook for undergraduate journalists with a well thought out mix of
practical exercises and tips and hints as well as plenty of real-world examples.
It covers the essential technical skills they will need. Very impressive.’ – Mary
Williams, Portsmouth University, UK
Multimedia Journalism: A Practical Guide offers clear advice on working across multiple
media platforms and includes guides to creating and using video, audio, text and
pictures.
It contains all the essentials of good practice and is supported by a Companion Website
at: www.multimedia-journalism.co.uk which demonstrates how to apply the skills
covered in the book, gives examples of good and bad practice, and keeps the material
up-to-date and in line with new hardware, software, methods of working and
legislation. The book is fully cross-referenced and interlinked with the website, which
offers the chance to test your learning and send in questions for industry experts to
answer in their masterclasses.
•shooting, cropping, editing and captioning pictures
•recording, editing and publishing audio reports and podcasts
•shooting, editing and streaming video and creating effective packages
•creating breaking news tickers and using Twitter
•using and encouraging user generated content
•interviewing and conducting advanced online research
•subediting, proofreading and headlining, including search engine optimisation
•geo-tagging, geo-coding and geo-broadcasting.
Website access is free when the book or ebook is purchased. The registration key is on
the final page of all editions of the book and ebook and is also on the inside front
cover of the paperback edition.
2010: 512pp
Hb: 978-0-415-47822-9: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-47823-6: £29.99
eBook: 978-0-203-86603-0
Companion Website
j our n al i s m
New
New in 2012
New
The Routledge Companion to
News and Journalism
Journalism Studies: The Basics
3rd Edition
Martin Conboy, University of Sheffield, UK
Magazine Editing
Revised Edition
Series: The Basics
In Print and Online
Edited by Stuart Allan, Bournemouth University, UK
Journalism Studies: The Basics provides an introductory
overview of the emerging field of Journalism Studies,
discussing key issues and contemporary debates.
Drawing on Conboy’s extensive experience in the field,
the changing nature of journalism and its future
directions are addressed, through chapters covering:
John Morrish and Paul Bradshaw, Birmingham
City University, UK
News and Journalism presents
an authoritative, comprehensive
assessment of diverse forms of
news media reporting – past,
present and future. Including
sixty chapters, written by an
outstanding team of
internationally respected
authors, the book provides
scholars and students with a
reliable, historically informed
guide to news media and journalism studies.
The new paperback edition includes four new chapters
focussing on news framing, news magazines, digital
radio news and social media, such as Twitter.
2011: 688pp
Hb: 978-0-415-46529-8: £130.00
Pb: 978-0-415-66953-5: £29.99
eBook: 978-0-203-86946-8
The Handbook of Journalism
Studies
Edited by Karin Wahl-Jorgensen and Thomas
Hanitzsch
This Handbook charts the
growing area of journalism
studies, exploring the current state
of theory and setting an agenda
for future research in an
international context. The volume
is structured around theoretical
and empirical approaches, and
covers scholarship on news
production and organizations;
news content; journalism and
society; and journalism in a global
context.
2008: 472pp
Hb: 978-0-8058-6342-0: £160.00
Pb: 978-0-8058-6343-7: £54.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87768-5
•the history and development of Journalism Studies
•how journalists are created through training and
education
•changing research methods and processes in
journalism
•the impact of the ’end product’ in wider society
•global perspectives on journalism
•technology and the future of the discipline.
Situated within a fast growing and dynamic field of
study, this engaging introduction will be valuable reading
for students of journalism, media and communication.
July 2012: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-58793-8: £55.00
Pb: 978-0-415-58794-5: £11.99
New in 2012
Magazines
A Guide to Critical Practice
Brendan Martin, City University, UK
From Horse and Hound to
Vogue; covering subjects as
diverse as charities, cheesemaking, and Cheshire; magazines
cover everything and there is a
magazine aimed at everyone.
This textbook covers the
business of magazine
publishing from initial idea to
product launch, and offers
practical guidelines on working
within the magazine industry. Written by an experienced
editor, with contributions from professional journalists,
this text and its Companion Website give you all the
knowledge you need to understand and create
successful magazines. Topic covered include:
•a brief history of magazine publishing
•planning the publication
•job roles within the industry
•feature writing
•design and layout
•blogs, e-zines and websites
•publicity
•advertising
•circulation
•law and ethics.
Essential reading for anyone studying magazine
journalism or publishing or wanting to work within this
exciting field.
Hb: 978-0-415-55724-5: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-55725-2: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14363-6
Including comprehensive
coverage on both print and
online, consumer and free
magazines, Magazine Editing
looks at how magazines work
and explains the dual role of the
magazine editor. John Morrish
and Paul Bradshaw consider the
editor as both a journalist,
having to provide information
and entertainment for readers,
and as a manager, expected to
lead and supervise successfully
the development of a magazine or periodical.
Looking at the current state of the magazine market in
the twenty-first century, the third edition explains how
this has developed and changed in recent years with
specific attention being paid to the explosion of apps,
e-zines, online communities and magazine websites.
Featuring case studies, interviews with successful editors,
examples of covers and spreads and useful tables and
graphs, the book discusses the editor’s many roles and
details the skills needed to run a publication.
Hb: 978-0-415-60834-3: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-60835-0: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-80464-3
New in 2012
5th Edition
The Newspapers Handbook
Richard Keeble, University of Lincoln, UK
’Something quite unique in its attempt to unite
theory and practice within a single volume...
Keeble is doing to journalism what John Berger did
to art appreciation with the aim here of developing
the reflective journalist in a global world... The
Newspapers Handbook will remain the definitive
work because of the range, quality and depth of its
content.’ – Rob Melville, Journalism Practice
Fully revised and updated, The Newspapers Handbook
remains the essential guide to working as a newspaper
journalist. It examines the ever-changing, everyday skills of
newspaper reporting and explores the theoretical, ethical
and political dimensions of a journalist’s job.
Using a range of new examples from tabloid, compact and
broadsheet newspapers, non-mainstream and local
publications, Richard Keeble examines key journalistic skills
such as the art of interviewing, news reporting, reviewing,
feature writing, using the Internet and freelancing.
New chapters from John Turner, Nick Nuttall and Mark
Hanna explore the specialisms of local and national
government reporting, investigative journalism and
covering the courts.
Hb: 978-0-415-66651-0: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-66652-7: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14361-2
51
j ou rna lis m
52
New in 2012
African American Women in
the News
Gender, Race, and Class in Journalism
Marian Meyers, Georgia State University, USA
African American Women in the News offers the first
in-depth examination of the varied representations of
black women in American journalism, from analyses of
coverage of domestic abuse and ’crack mothers’ to
exploration of new media coverage of Michelle Obama
on YouTube. Marian Meyers interrogates the varied,
complex, and often contradictory images of African
American women in various news media through
detailed case studies of both national and local news,
the mainstream and black press, and traditional news
outlets as well as new digital news platforms.
African American Women in the News is ideal for courses
on race and news media, and for professional journalists
and students of journalism who seek to improve the
diversity and sensitivity of their journalistic practice.
June 2012: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87572-1: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-87573-8: £18.99
eBook: 978-0-203-85994-0
New in 2012
The Global Journalist in the
21st Century
Edited by David H. Weaver and Lars Willnat, both
at Indiana University, USA
The Global Journalist in the 21st Century systematically
assesses the demographics, education, socialization,
professional attitudes and working conditions of
journalists in various countries around the world. This
book updates the original Global Journalist (1998)
volume with new data, adding more than a dozen new
countries, and provides material on comparative research
about journalists that will be useful to those interested in
doing their own studies.
The editors put together this collection working under
the assumption that journalists’ backgrounds, working
conditions and ideas are related to what is reported (and
how it is covered) in the various news media round the
world, in spite of societal and organizational constraints,
and that this news coverage matters in terms of world
public opinion and policies.
As the most comprehensive and reliable source on
journalists around the world, The Global Journalist will
serve as the primary source for evaluating the state of
journalism. As such, it promises to become a standard
textbook among journalism, media, and communication
students and researchers around the world.
Hb: 978-0-415-88576-8: £125.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88577-5: £46.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14867-9
New in 2012
New
Key Issues in Journalism
Race and News
Tom Goldstein, University of California, USA
Critical Perspectives
Key Issues in Journalism introduces students to the most
pressing issues facing today’s journalists, from debates
about bloggers versus professional reporters, to shifting
ideas about newsworthiness, to the ways the digital age
challenges journalistic standards of privacy. Tom
Goldstein provides a concise overview of journalism’s
hot-button issues and asks students to consider what
the future of reporting may look like.
Christopher P. Campbell, Kim LeDuff and Cheryl
D. Jenkins, all at University of Southern Mississippi,
USA and Rockell A. Brown, Texas Southern
University, USA
Hb: 978-0-415-99984-7: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99985-4: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87961-0
New in 2012
War Reporting
Kevin Williams, University of Wales, UK
War Reporting focuses of the practice and performance
of journalism in different societies and how the problems
and issues of getting the story determine the
representation of war.
Kevin Williams examines the debates and arguments
around changes to war reporting in the global era,
focussing on four themes: technological development, the
growing emphasis on victims, the increased reflexivity of
the media on how war is reported and greater emphasis
on the visualisation of war.
War Reporting will provide students with a thematically
organised, but historically rich introduction to the nature
and practice of war reporting, placing writing and
representation of war in the context of the structural
and institutional pressures which are exerted on
journalists in the field.
Hb: 978-0-415-69497-1: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-69498-8: £21.99
New in 2012
The history of American
journalism is marked by
disturbing representations of
people and communities of color,
from the disgraceful stereotypes
of pre-civil rights America, to the
more subtle myths that are
reflected in routine coverage by
journalists all over the country.
Race and News: Critical
Perspectives aims to examine
these journalistic representations
of race, and in doing so to
question whether or not we are living in a post-racial
world. By looking at national coverage of stories like the
Don Imus controversy, Hurricane Katrina, Barak Obama’s
presidential candidacy, and even the Virginia Tech
shootings, readers are given an opportunity to gain insight
into both subtle and overt forms of racism in the
newsroom and in national dialogue.
The book itself is divided into two sections, with the first
examining the journalistic routine and the decisions that go
into covering a story with, or without, relation to race. The
second section, comprised of case studies, explores the
coverage of national stories and how they have impacted
the dialogue on race and racism in the United States. As a
whole, the collection of essays and studies also reflects a
variety of research approaches. With a goal of contributing
to the discussion about race and its place in American
journalism, this broad examination makes Race and News
an ideal text for courses on cultural diversity and the media,
as well as making it valuable to professional journalists and
journalism students who seek to improve their approach to
coverage of diverse communities.
August 2011: 272pp
Hb: 978-0-415-80096-9: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-80097-6: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87685-5
Race, Racism and Sports
Journalism
New in 2012
Black, White and Read All Over
Edited by Elliot King, Loyola University Maryland,
USA and Jane Chapman, Lincoln University, UK
Neil Farrington, Daniel Kilvington, John Price
and Amir Saeed, all at University of Sunderland, UK
Beginning with a theoretical discussion of race, sport
and media, this book critically examines issues of race,
racism and sports journalism and offers practical advice
on sports reporting including a discussion of
international guidelines for ethical journalism.
In a series of case studies, representations of race are
explored through historical and contemporary analysis of
international media coverage, including online and
digital platforms.
Finally, the book analyses a range of international
journalistic guidelines on the reporting of ’race’ and
discuss the ethical and social implications of how they
are applied in a sporting context.
Key Readings in Journalism
Key Readings in Journalism brings together thirty
essential writings that every student of journalism
should know. This volume places critical and historical
studies of journalism alongside canonical reporting by
Woodward and Bernstein, Capote, Liebling, and others,
arranged thematically to enable students to think
deeply and broadly about journalism: its social impact,
its history, key individuals and institutions, its practice,
and its future.
Hb: 978-0-415-88027-5: £95.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88028-2: £29.99
May 2012: 192pp
Hb: 978-0-415-67639-7: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-67640-3: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14630-9
Companion Website
j our n al i s m
Communication and Society
This series encompasses the broad field of
media and cultural studies. Its main
concerns are the media and the public
sphere: on whether the media empower or
fail to empower popular forces in society;
media organizations and public policy; the
political and social consequences of media
campaigns; and the role of media
entertainment, ranging from potboilers
and the human interest story to rock music
and TV sport.
New
New
Changing Journalism
Journalism and Free Speech
Peter Lee-Wright and Angela Phillips, both at
Goldsmiths, University of London, UK and
Tamara Witschge, Cardiff University, UK
John Steel, University of Sheffield, UK
Journalism is in transition.
Irrevocable decisions are being
made, often based on flimsy
evidence, which could change
not only the future of
journalism, but also the future
of democracy. This book, based
on extensive research, provides
the opportunity to reflect upon
these decisions and considers
how journalism could change
for the better and for the good
of democracy. It covers:
•the business landscape
•work and employment
•the regulatory framework
New
•audiences and interaction
2nd Edition
Journalism After September 11
USA and Stuart Allan, Bournemouth University, UK
Praise for the first edition:
’A thoughtful and engaging examination of the
effects of 9/11 on the field of journalism. Its unique
aim is to discuss the impact of the attack as a
personal trauma and its current and future effects
on journalism and the reporting of the news [...]
highly recommended.’ – Library Journal
Journalism After September 11
examines how the traumatic
attacks of that day continue to
transform the nature of
journalism, particularly in the
United States and Britain. Familiar
notions of what it means to be a
journalist, how best to practice
journalism, and what the public
can reasonably expect of
journalists in the name of
democracy, were shaken to their
foundations.
Ten years on, however, new questions arise regarding the
lasting implications of that tragic day and its aftermath.
Bringing together an internationally respected collection of
scholars and media commentators, Journalism After
September 11 addresses topics such as: journalism and
public life at a time of crisis; broadsheet and tabloid
newspaper coverage of the attacks; the role of sources in
shaping the news; reporting by global news media such as
CNN; Western representations of Islam; current affairs
broadcasting; news photography and trauma; the
emotional well-being of reporters; online journalism; as
well as a host of pertinent issues around news, democracy
and citizenship.
•the impact of technology on practices and content
•ethics in a converged world.
The book analyses research in both national and local
journalism, broadsheet and tabloid papers, and broadcast,
newspaper and online journalism, drawing comparisons
between these different outlets in the field of news
journalism, thus making this essential reading for scholars
and students of journalism and media studies.
July 2011: 192pp
Hb: 978-0-415-57954-4: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-57955-1: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-80903-7
5th Edition
Journalism and Free Speech
brings together for the first time
an historical and theoretical
exploration of journalism and its
relationship with the idea of free
speech. Though freedom of the
press is widely regarded as an
essential ingredient to
democratic societies, the
relationship between the idea of
freedom of speech and the
practice of press freedom is one
that is generally taken for
granted. Censorship, in general terms is an anathema.
This book explores the philosophical and historical
development of free speech and critically examines the
ways in which it relates to freedom of the press in
practice. The main contention of the book is that the
actualisation of press freedom should be seen as
encompassing modes of censorship which place pressure
upon the principled connection between journalism and
freedom of speech.
This book introduces students to a wide range of issues
centred around freedom of speech, press freedom and
censorship, providing an accessible text for courses on
journalism and mass media.
Hb: 978-0-415-49325-3: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-49326-0: £19.99
eBook: 978-0-203-80461-2
New
Changing the News
News and Journalism in the UK
The Forces Shaping Journalism in Uncertain
Times
Brian McNair, Queensland University of Technology,
Australia
Edited by Wilson Lowrey, University of Alabama,
USA and Peter J. Gade, University of Oklahoma, USA
News and Journalism in the UK is an accessible and
comprehensive introduction to the political, economic
and regulatory environments of press and broadcast
journalism in Britain and Northern Ireland.
2009: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-41071-7: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-41072-4: £18.99
eBook: 978-0-203-88141-5
For more titles in this
series, see p. 27
This second edition includes four new chapters – examining
Arabic newspaper reporting of the attacks, the perceptions
of television audiences, national magazine coverage of the
ensuing crisis, and the media politics of ’othering’ – as well
as revised chapters from the first edition and an updated
introduction by the co-editors. A foreword is provided by
Victor Navasky and an afterword by Phillip Knightley.
April 2011: 368pp
Hb: 978-0-415-46014-9: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-46015-6: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-81896-1
Changing the News examines
the difficulties in changing news
processes and practices in
response to the evolving
circumstances and struggles of
the journalism industry. The
editors have put together this
volume to demonstrate why the
prescriptions employed to
salvage the journalism industry
to date haven’t worked, and to
explain how constraints and
pressures have influenced the
field’s responses to challenges in an uncertain, changing
environment.
Changing the News details the forces that shape and
challenge journalism and journalistic culture, and explains
why journalists and their organizations respond to
troubles, challenges and uncertainties in the way they do.
April 2011: 320pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87157-0: £95.00
Pb: 978-0-415-87158-7: £32.99
eBook: 978-0-203-86857-7
53
j ou rna lis m
54
Making Hard Choices in
Journalism Ethics
Communicating Science
Read All About It!
A History of the British Newspaper
Cases and Practice
Edited by LeeAnn Kahlor and Patricia Stout, both
at University of Texas at Austin, USA
Kevin Williams, University of Swansea, UK
David E. Boeyink, Indiana University, USA and
Sandra L. Borden, Western Michigan University, USA
This textbook traces the
evolution of the newspaper,
documenting its changing form,
style and content as well as
identifying the different roles
ascribed to it by audiences,
government and other social
institutions.
This book teaches students how
to make the difficult ethical
decisions that journalists
routinely face. By taking a
case-based approach, the
authors argue that the best way
to make an ethical decision is to
look closely at a particular
situation, rather than looking
first to an abstract set of ethical
theories or principles. This book
goes beyond the traditional
approaches of many other
journalism textbooks by using cases as the starting point
for building ethical practices. Casuistry, the technical
name of such a method, develops provisional guidelines
from the bottom up by reasoning analogically from an
’easy’ ethical case (the ’paradigm’) to ’harder’ ethical
cases. Thoroughly grounded in actual experience, this
method admits more nuanced judgments than most
theoretical approaches.
Gatekeeping Theory
Peter Lee-Wright, Goldsmiths, University of
London, UK
2010: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-98999-2: £85.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99000-4: £26.99
eBook: 978-0-203-92819-6
Pamela J. Shoemaker, Syracuse University, USA and
Timothy Vos, University of Missouri, USA
The American Journalism
History Reader
Edited by Bonnie S. Brennen, Marquette University,
USA and Hanno Hardt, University of Ljubljana,
Slovenia
The American Journalism
History Reader presents
important primary texts news
articles and essays about
journalism from all stages of the
history of the American press
alongside key works of
journalism history and criticism.
The volume aims to place
journalism history in its
theoretical context, to
familiarize the reader with
essential works of and about journalism, and to chart
the development of the field.
2010: 512pp
Hb: 978-0-415-80186-7: £95.00
Pb: 978-0-415-80187-4: £34.99
Encyclopedia of American
Journalism
Science communication has
become increasingly popular in
journalism and mass
communication as the media
offer more scientific and
technological information to
the public. This volume explores
the evolution of science
communication, addressing key
issues and offering substance
for future study.
2009: 288pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99958-8: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99959-5: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-86763-1
2009: 184pp
Hb: 978-0-415-98138-5: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-98139-2: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-93165-3
2009: 320pp
Hb: 978-0-415-34623-8: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-34624-5: £19.99
eBook: 978-0-203-59689-0
The Documentary Handbook
2009: 432pp
Hb: 978-0-415-43401-0: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-43402-7: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-86719-8
Journalism as Practice
For more titles in:
MacIntyre, Virtue Ethics and the Press
Sandra L. Borden, Western Michigan University, USA
See page 48
2009: 180pp
Pb: 978-0-415-87767-1: £24.95
Public Journalism 2.0
Doing News Framing Analysis
Empirical and Theoretical Perspectives
The Promise and Reality of a Citizen
Engaged Press
Edited by Paul D’Angelo, The College of New
Jersey, USA and Jim A. Kuypers, Virginia Tech, USA
Edited by Jack Rosenberry, St John Fisher College,
USA and Burton St John, Old Dominion University,
USA
2009: 392pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99235-0: £95.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99236-7: £27.99
eBook: 978-0-203-86446-3
2009: 216pp
Hb: 978-0-415-80182-9: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-80183-6: £27.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87677-0
Edited by Stephen L. Vaughn, University of
Wisconsin, USA
2009: 664pp
Pb: 978-0-415-99908-3: £43.99
Companion Website
j our n al i s m
Journalism and Citizenship
Edited by Zizi Papacharissi, University of Illinois, USA
2009: 232pp
Hb: 978-0-415-80499-8: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-80498-1: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87126-3
New
Routledge Research in
Journalism
International News in the
Digital Age
This series is our home for innovative
research in journalism as the field faces the
challenges of an ever-changing news and
media environment.
New
New
Network Journalism
Jesse Owens, the Press, and
the 1936 Berlin Olympic Games
Journalistic Practice in Interactive Spheres
Pamela C. Laucella, Indiana University, USA
Drawing on current theoretical debates in journalism
studies, and grounded in empirical research, Heinrich
here analyzes the interplay between journalistic practice
and processes of globalization and digitalization. She
argues that a new kind of journalism is emerging,
characterized by an increasingly global flow of news as
well as a growing number of news deliverers. Within this
transformed news sphere the roles of journalistic outlets
change. They become nodes, arranged in a dense net of
information gatherers, producers, and disseminators.
The interactive connections among these news providers
constitute what Heinrich calls the sphere of ’network
journalism.’
Series: Studies in African American History and Culture
Jesse Owens secured his place as one of the most
celebrated athletes of the twentieth-century after
winning four gold medals at the 1936 Olympics in
Berlin. This book examines the press coverage of the
time, which helped to elevate Owens to such status.
Pamela C. Laucella utilizes examples not just from the
mainstream press, but also from the black and
Communist press, and reveals critical differences in the
tone, emphasis, and type of coverage. She offers
exceptional insight into the potency of language and
discourse in influencing readers’ perceptions of events
and individuals and demonstrates how the press
coverage of the 1930s continues to shape our
understandings of Owens’ legacy.
Hb: 978-0-415-99614-3: £80.00
2nd Edition
The Business of Sports
A Primer for Journalists
Mark Conrad, Fordham University, USA
This book explores the business aspect of sports with an
orientation to those topics that are most relevant to
journalists, providing the foundation for understanding
the various parts of the sports business. Moving beyond
sports writing, this text offers a distinct perspective on
professional, college, and international sports
organizations – structure, governance, labor issues, and
other business factors within the sports community.
Written clearly and compellingly, The Business of Sports
includes cases (historical, current, and hypothetical) to
illustrate how business concerns play a role in the
reporting of sports.
Ansgard Heinrich, University of Groningen, the
Netherlands
eBook: 978-0-203-83530-2
Edited by Michael Bromley, University of
Queensland, Australia and Judith Clarke, Hong
Kong Baptist University, Hong Kong
The new research presented in this volume suggests that
general perceptions (cultural, psychological,
geographical), allied to the customs and values of
journalism, and underpinned by the uses of technology,
significantly shape international news. The uptake of
technology has contributed to fundamental changes in
style and form, and has greatly facilitated cross-cultural
exchanges. The category ‘international news’ is now
more of a hybrid, as recognized by the BBC and others.
The chapters in this book demonstrate that this hybridity
is unevenly distributed across geo-political domains, and
often across time. Nevertheless, as the contributors to this
volume show, the concept of ‘international news’ relies
on tightly interwoven elements of orthodox journalism,
social media, civic expression and public assembly.
August 2011: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88722-9: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-80467-4
April 2011: 282pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88270-5: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-83045-1
Journalism Education, Training
and Employment
Edited by Bob Franklin, Cardiff University, UK and
Donica Mensing, University of Nevada, USA
Journalists, Sources, and
Credibility
2010: 248pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88425-9: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-83234-9
New Perspectives
Edited by Bob Franklin, Cardiff University, UK and
Matt Carlson, Saint Louis University, USA
2010: 216pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88426-6: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-83570-8
Offering critical insights on the business of sports, this
text is a required resource for sports journalists and
students in sports journalism.
2010: 400pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87652-0: £95.00
Pb: 978-0-415-87653-7: £32.99
East-West Perceptions of A New World Order
Can’t find what
you’re looking for?
Visit our up-to-date website for a complete
listing of all our titles.
55
i n t erviewing an d r e p ortin g
56
Interviewing and Reporting
New in 2012
Practicing Convergence Journalism
An Introduction to Cross-Media Storytelling
Janet Kolodzy, Emerson College, USA
Practicing Convergence Journalism teaches journalists how to make the most of digital technology to tell their stories effectively across multiple media
platforms, in print, audio, video, and online. Janet Kolodzy demonstrates how to organize and coordinate fundamental building blocks, planning,
reporting, and producing, for successful multimedia storytelling.
This book identifies two types of journalistic stories: the short-form, or immediate, quick turn-around story, once called ’spot news,’ and the
longer-form news feature that will involve a narrative and interactive ’arc.’ It addresses multi-media and cross-media thinking, organizing, reporting
and producing for both types of news stories. Kolodzy’s approach focuses on storytelling principles, not just specific technical practices, providing
journalists with the skills to use today’s technology and the tools to adapt their writing and reporting to future developments.
August 2012: 256pp
Hb: 978-0-415-89028-1: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-89030-4: £29.99
New in 2012
New in 2012
New in 2012
Principles of American
Journalism
The Digital Reporter’s
Notebook
Video Journalism for the Web
An Introduction
Reporting with Online Media
Stephanie Craft and Charles Davis, both at
University of Missouri, USA
Mark Blaine and Michael Werner, both at
University of Oregon, USA
Principles of American Journalism introduces students to
the core values of journalism and its singularly important
role in a democracy. From the First Amendment to
Facebook, Stephanie Craft and Charles Davis provide a
comprehensive exploration of the guiding principles of
journalism, the ethical and legal foundations of the
profession, its historical and modern precepts, the
economic landscape of journalism, the relationships
among journalism and other social institutions, and the
key issues and challenges that contemporary journalists
face. Case studies and exercises throughout are
designed to build students’ ability to think critically
about how well journalism performs its function in
society, making students more mindful practitioners of
journalism and more informed media consumers.
The Digital Reporter’s Notebook develops reporting skills
using everyday digital technology to capture the
elements of good stories. Mark Blaine shows students
how applying the basic skills of multimedia storytelling
to their reporting can reinforce the principles of quality
journalism: audio can teach interviewers how to listen,
video can teach reporters how to keep focused on their
subjects. Each media technology has something to offer
our core understanding of storytelling. And each can
reinforce truth telling and accuracy in its own way. By
approaching stories with a multimedia perspective from
the beginning, this book shows students how to build a
strong foundation in text, audio, and visual storytelling.
The Digital Reporter’s Notebook is a toolkit, a training
plan, and an ethics guide for defining interactive
journalism’s best practices.
This textbook is ideal for use in introductory Principles of
Journalism courses, and the Companion Website
provides a full complement of student and instructor
resources to enhance the learning experience and
connect to the latest news issues and events.
August 2012: 320pp
Hb: 978-0-415-89016-8: £95.00
Pb: 978-0-415-89017-5: £29.99
The Digital Reporter’s Notebook is a multimedia learning
tool itself. It is a print textbook with examples, photos,
illustrations, and references. A rich Companion Website
is also available, with examples of multimedia work,
interactive exercises, video tutorials, and a ’workout
plan’ for budding media storytellers. The workout plan
includes daily skills exercises that students can use to
hone their skills in text, audio and visual storytelling.
The Digital Reporter’s Notebook is ideal for online
journalism courses and introductory reporting courses
using a convergence approach.
August 2012: 240pp
Hb: 978-0-415-89860-7: £95.00
Pb: 978-0-415-89861-4: £34.99
A Practical Introduction to Multimedia
Storytelling
Kurt Lancaster, Northern Arizona University, USA
As more newspapers and
broadcast news outlets
transition online, reporters and
photojournalists are being
asked to provide more and
more video for their stories. This
book teaches students and
professional journalists how to
shoot better video and tell
better stories on the web.
Creating multimedia video
journalism requires more than
simply adapting traditional broadcast journalism
techniques, so Kurt Lancaster provides students with a
strong understanding of cinematic storytelling and
documentary production in order to make their videos
stand out.
This book introduces students to all of the basic skills
and techniques of good video journalism and
documentary storytelling, from shots and camera
movements to sound and editing. Shooting exercises
throughout the book ask students to put these
techniques into practice. Case studies and interviews
with multimedia video journalists also offer real-world
perspectives on a career in news video.
Hb: 978-0-415-89266-7: £95.00
Pb: 978-0-415-89267-4: £24.99
Companion Website
Me di a s k i l l s s eri e s
New in 2012
Reporting Disaster on Deadline
Lee Wilkins, Martha Steffens, Esther Thorson,
Greeley Kyle and Kent Collins, all at University of
Missouri, USA and Fred Vultee, Wayne State
University, USA
This book provides an introduction to covering crises,
considering practice issues and providing guidance in
preparing for and responding to calamities. It offers a
concise overview for journalism academics and practitioners
of covering disasters – not a ’how to’ handbook but a ’how
to prepare’ reference to be used before a crisis occurs.
This essential resource is among the first to focus
specifically and comprehensively on journalistic coverage of
disasters. It demonstrates the application of scholarship and
theory to professional practice, and includes a crash book
template with logistical and information-collection
requirements.
As a text for advanced reporting, broadcast journalism,
and journalism ethics, or a reference for professionals,
Reporting Disasters on Deadline provides key information
for keeping on deadline in responding to crises.
March 2012: 200pp
Hb: 978-0-8058-6166-2: £43.99
Pb: 978-0-415-99096-7: £18.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14886-0
2nd Edition
Show Me the Money
Writing Business and Economics Stories for
Mass Communication
Chris Roush, University of North Carolina at Chapel
Hill, USA
Show Me the Money offers instruction, hands-on advice
and examples for doing the job of a business journalist.
With numerous examples of documents and stories in
the text, it is an essential guide for students and
practitioners doing business journalism.
2010: 408pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87654-4: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-87655-1: £34.99
eBook: 978-0-203-84824-1
Media Skills
series
New
2nd Edition
Interviewing for Radio
Jim Beaman, University of Gloucestershire, UK
Media Skills
Series Editor: Richard Keeble, University
of Lincoln, UK
The Media Skills series provides concise
and thorough introductions to a rapidly
changing media landscape. Each book is
written by media and journalism lecturers
or experienced professionals and is a key
resource for a particular industry. Offering
helpful advice and information and using
practical examples from print, broadcast
and digital media, as well as discussing
ethical and regulatory issues, Media Skills
books are essential guides for students and
media professionals.
New
2nd Edition
Designing for Newspapers and
Magazines
Chris Frost, Liverpool John Moores University, UK
A hugely beneficial introduction to students and
professionals in print media and design, Designing for
Newspapers and Magazines offers guidance on how to
produce attractive publications and how to tailor them
to their target audience using colour, text placement,
typography and images,
Written by an experienced journalist and designer, the
book details the elements of good design and provides
instruction on how to get the most of computers and
computer-aided design.
The book examines a broad range of local and national
publications including The Sun, The Daily Mirror and
Glamour magazine and explains the reasoning that
underpins their design choice, including:
•how to set up a new publication
’The book is an excellent guide’ – Trevor Goodchild,
The Journalist
’Jim Beaman’s Interviewing for Radio is a classic
and seminal practice text, brilliantly written and
masterful in its content. Nobody working in
professional radio can do without it. It is a must for
all radio courses and I could not recommend it
more highly’ – Tim Crook, Head of Radio, Goldsmiths,
Interviewing for Radio is a
thorough introduction to the
techniques and skills of the
radio interview. It offers advice
on how to ask the right
question and elicit a response,
and guides the reader through
the use of equipment, the
mechanics of recording, the
studio environment, live
broadcasts, presentation and
pronunciation, and editing
material.
This second edition has been thoroughly updated and
includes advice from a new range of practitioners, and
examples of recent UK and international interviews. The
author critically analyses these interviews and explains
the preparation, organisation and expertise required in
order to produce a successful radio broadcast.
Interviewing for Radio references both new and existing
regulations and guidelines for UK journalists, then offers
a global perspective by drawing on the differences and
similarities with those applicable to other countries.
This invaluable book is supported by a Companion Website
(www.routledge.com/textbooks/9780415561709)
that includes audio interviews with practitioners
accompanied by a range of student exercises, a
comprehensive glossary in the form of interactive
flashcards, and suggested links for further listening.
April 2011: 168pp
Hb: 978-0-415-56169-3: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-56170-9: £18.99
eBook: 978-0-203-83452-7
•typography and working with text
Production Management for
Television
•working with images and technical production
Leslie Mitchell, University of Stirling, UK
•designing pages and how to use colour
•planning an edition of a newspaper or magazine
•design and journalism ethics
•a glossary of journalistic and design terms.
Hb: 978-0-415-66653-4: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-66654-1: £18.99
eBook: 978-0-203-18108-9
2009: 128pp
Hb: 978-0-415-42465-3: £60.00
Pb: 978-0-415-42481-3: £18.99
eBook: 978-0-203-88091-3
57
m ed ia skill s series
58
2nd Edition
2nd Edition
3rd Edition
Interviewing for Journalists
Writing for Broadcast
Journalists
English for Journalists
Rick Thompson, Birmingham City University, UK
Sally Adams and Wynford Hicks
Wynford Hicks
’This is a superb book which combines the rare
mixture of high quality information with humour.
The style of writing engages the reader from the
introduction and the experience and insight of the
author occasionally makes it difficult to put down,
a rare feature of a textbook. I would unreservedly
recommend this book not only to those studying
journalism but to students of language and all who
use the spoken and written word as the ’materials’
of their work.’ – Barry Turner, Nottingham Trent
University, UK
2009: 256pp
Hb: 978-0-415-47774-1: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-47775-8: £18.99
eBook: 978-0-203-88885-8
2nd Edition
Ethics for Journalists
Richard Keeble
Writing for Broadcast Journalists
guides readers through the
significant differences between
the written and the spoken
versions of journalistic English.
It will help broadcast journalists
at every stage of their careers to
avoid such pitfalls as the use of
newspaper-English, common
linguistic errors, and
Americanised phrases, and
gives practical advice on
accurate terminology and
pronunciation, while encouraging writers to capture the
immediacy of the spoken word in their scripts.
2006: 144pp
Hb: 978-0-415-40419-8: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-40420-4: £18.99
eBook: 978-0-203-96766-9
Feature Writing for Journalists
Sharon Wheeler, University of Gloucestershire, UK
2010: 208pp
Hb: 978-0-415-58167-7: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-58168-4: £18.99
eBook: 978-0-203-84577-6
2nd Edition
2008: 328pp
Hb: 978-0-415-43074-6: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-43076-0: £18.99
eBook: 978-0-203-69882-2
Magazine Production
Jason Whittaker
Reporting for Journalists
Chris Frost, Liverpool John Moores University, UK
Reporting for Journalists
explains the key skills needed by
the twenty-first century news
reporter. From the process of
finding a story and tracing
sources, to interviewing
contacts, gathering information
and filing the finished report, it
is an essential handbook for
students of journalism and a
useful guide for working
professionals.
2009: 208pp
Hb: 978-0-415-33634-5: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-33635-2: £18.99
2nd Edition
Writing for Journalists
2008: 208pp
Hb: 978-0-415-46020-0: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-46021-7: £18.99
eBook: 978-0-203-92710-6
2010: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-55319-3: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-55320-9: £18.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87197-3
Wynford Hicks, Sally
Adams, Harriett Gilbert and
Tim Holmes
2008: 208pp
Hb: 978-0-415-43519-2: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-43520-8: £18.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87167-6
For a full listing of titles in the
Media Skills Series, visit: www.
routledge.com/u/media_skills
Companion Website
n e ws an d m e di a wr i t i n g
News and Media Writing
New
4th Edition
MediaWriting
Print, Broadcast, and Public Relations
W. Richard Whitaker, Janet E. Ramsey and Ronald D. Smith, all at Buffalo State College, USA
Designed for those preparing to write in the current multimedia environment, MediaWriting:
• explores the linkages between print, broadcast, and public relations styles
• outlines the nature of good writing
• synthesizes and integrates professional skills and concepts.
Complete with interesting real-world examples and exercises, this textbook gives students progressive writing activities amid an
environment for developing research and interviewing skills. Starting from a basis in writing news and features for print media, it
moves on to writing for broadcast news media, then introduces students to public relations writing in print, broadcast, and digital
media, as well as for news media and advertising venues. Rather than emphasizing the differences among the three writing styles, this
book synthesizes and integrates the three concepts, weaving in basic principles of Internet writing and reporting.
This book provides beginning newswriting students with a primer for developing the skills needed for work in the media industry. As
such, it is a hands-on writing text for students preparing in all professional areas of communication, journalism, broadcasting, media,
and public relations.
Hb: 978-0-415-89180-6: £95.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88803-5: £39.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14897-6
59
news a nd m e dia w r itin g
60
New in 2012
Writing for Digital Media
New in 2012
Specialist Journalism
Brian Carroll, Berry College, USA
Magazine Writing
Edited by Barry Turner, University of Lincoln, UK
and Richard Orange
Combining practical ’how to’
skills with reflection on the place
of each specialism in the
industry, this guide features the
skills needed to cover specialist
areas, including writing match
reports for sport, reviewing the
arts, and dealing with complex
information for science. The
book will also discuss how
specialist journalists have
contributed to the mainstream
news agenda, as well as
analysing how different issues have been covered in each
specialism, such as the credit crunch, global warming,
school league tables and the celebrity culture in sport.
The book includes interviews with professionals talking
about their fields of work and examples from a range of
online, print and broadcast markets, including daily and
weekly papers, specialist and B2B magazines, the ethnic
press and ’alternative’ publications such as gay, feminist
and left-wing press.
April 2012: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-58284-1: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-58285-8: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14664-4
Writing for Digital Media
teaches students how to write
effectively for online audiences,
whether they are crafting a
story for the website of a daily
newspaper or a personal blog.
The lessons and exercises in
each chapter help students
build a solid understanding of
the ways that the Internet has
introduced new opportunities
for dynamic storytelling as
digital media have blurred roles of media producer,
consumer, publisher and reader. Using the tools and
strategies discussed in this book, students are able to
use their insights into new media audiences to produce
better content for digital formats and environments.
For additional resources and exercises, visit the
Companion Website for Writing for Digital Media at:
www.routledge.com/textbooks/9780415992015.
2010: 328pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99200-8: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99201-5: £32.99
eBook: 978-0-203-89431-6
William E. Berry, University of Illinois, USA,
Charles Whitaker, Northwestern University, USA
and Christopher Benson, also at University of
Illinois, USA
What does it take to launch a career writing for
magazines? In this comprehensive, up-to-date
introduction to magazine writing, a team of
experienced magazine writers and editors takes
students from initial story pitches through final
production, emphasizing that success in
magazines is one part creative effort and one part
marketing savvy. Magazine Writing offers
time-tested rules for good writing alongside
twenty-first century tools for digital storytelling.
Examples of published work, conversations with
successful magazine contributors and bloggers,
and interviews with editors on what they’re
looking for give students all the skills and
practical insights they need to jumpstart a
magazine writing career.
October 2012: 416pp
Hb: 978-0-415-89276-6: £95.00
Pb: 978-0-415-89277-3: £37.99
5th Edition
Professional Feature Writing
Bruce Garrison, University of Miami, USA
New in 2012
Financial Journalism
Money Matters
Marie Kinsey, Sheffield University, UK
Financial Journalism covers the essentials of finance,
business and economics in a user friendly yet
authoritative way. It explains key concepts and
specialised terms in plain English and draws on the
expertise of some of the best known financial journalists
in Britain.
Hb: 978-0-415-58389-3: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-58390-9: £19.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14350-6
New in 2012
Professional Feature Writing
provides the basics of news
media feature writing and
establishes a solid foundation
for students and writers making
feature writing their career. This
fifth edition offers a thorough
and up-to-date look at
newspaper, magazine,
newsletter, and online
publications, with emphasis on
daily newspapers and consumer magazines. It serves as a
comprehensive introduction to feature writing,
emphasizing writing skills, article types, and the
collegiate and professional writing life.
2009: 448pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99898-7: £105.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99897-0: £45.00
Popular Music Journalism
Martin James, Southampton Solent University, UK
This book explores arguments and perspectives on the
role of the music journalist and the wider popular music
press within the cultural and operational contexts of
popular music. By exploring the roles of the journalist as
freelance, member of an editorial team and a part of the
editorial production process, readers will be introduced
to the skills required to recognise, source, research and
write thoughtful, critical and well-crafted music features
and reviews for print, online and broadcast outlets.
March 2012: 288pp
Hb: 978-0-415-56066-5: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-56067-2: £19.99
eBook: 978-0-203-83442-8
Companion Website
p ubl i s h i n g
Publishing
New in 2012
2nd Edition
Int r od uc t i o n t o B o o k H i sto ry
David Finkelstein, Queen Margaret University, UK and Alistair McCleery, Napier University, UK
’David Finkelstein and Alistair McCleery have written an excellent introduction to the history of the book. This
concise volume covers the major aspects of book history to introduce the novice or to refresh the memory of the
scholar... the book as a whole provides a starting place for further discussion and exploration into the history of
literacy, the book, and ideas about reading and text.’ – Millie Jackson, Libraries and the Cultural Record
This is a comprehensive introduction to books and print culture which examines the move from the spoken word to written
texts, the book as commodity, the power and profile of readers, and the future of the book in an electronic age.
Hb: 978-0-415-68805-5: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-68806-2: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-15025-2
Also available:
The Book History Reader
By David Finkelstein and Alistair McCleery
Visit, www.routledge.com/9780415359481
for more information
New in 2012
NEW
6th Edition
Book Production
4th Edition
Selling Rights
A Manual of Project and Production
Management in Book Publishing
Publishing Law
Lynette Owen
Hugh Jones and Christopher Benson
Adrian Bullock
’Every company – whether a trade or academic
publishing house, a literary agency or a company
at the electronic interface – should have a copy.’
– Publishing News
The digital revolution has brought with it a wider range
of options for creating and producing print on paper
products than ever seen before. With the growing
demand for skills and knowledge with which to exploit
the potential of digital technology, comes the need for a
comprehensive book that not only makes it possible for
production staff, editors, and designers to understand
how the technology affects the industry they work in,
but also provides them with the skills and competencies
they need to work in it smartly and effectively.
This book is designed to satisfy this need.
Book Production falls into two parts:
•the first part deals with the increasingly important role
of production as project managers
•the second part deals with the processes and raw
materials used in developing and manufacturing print
on paper products. Case studies are used to illustrate
why and how some processes or raw materials may or
may not be appropriate for a particular job.
With expert opinions and case studies, and a
consideration of the practices and issues involved, this
offers a comprehensive overview of book production for
anyone working, or training to work in or in conjunction
with the books industry.
May 2012: 288pp
Hb: 978-0-415-59379-3: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-59380-9: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14635-4
This fully updated fourth edition
of Publishing Law continues in
its status as a comprehensive
guide to the law as it affects
the publishing process. Written
by the Copyright Counsel of the
Publishers Association and a
practising solicitor with many
years experience of the
publishing trade, this work will
serve as a comprehensive
handbook for all those who
need a practical understanding
of where and how the law may apply, including
publishers, authors and agents, and all those involved
with published material.
April 2011: 384pp
Hb: 978-0-415-57513-3: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-57517-1: £34.99
eBook: 978-0-203-83817-4
4 Volume Set
Book Publishing
Edited by John Feather, Loughborough University, UK
As serious academic work on and around publishing and
the printed book continues to flourish as never before, this
new title meets the need for an authoritative reference
work to make sense of a growing and ever more complex
corpus of literature, and to provide a map of the area as it
has emerged and developed. It is a landmark collection of
foundational and the best cutting-edge scholarship in the
field and is organized in four volumes.
April 2011: 1816pp
Hb: 978-0-415-49009-2: £650.00
Selling Rights is a practical and
accessible guide to all aspects
of selling rights and copublications throughout the
world. The sixth edition of this
authoritative handbook has
been updated to include the
changes which have taken
place in technology, sales and
distribution, and legislation in
the United Kingdom and
overseas, especially relating to
Web 2.0. Selling Rights covers
the full range of potential rights, from English-language
territorial rights, book club and paperback sales through
to serial rights, translation rights, dramatization and
documentary rights, and electronic publishing and
multimedia.
2010: 448pp
Pb: 978-0-415-49692-6: £45.00
eBook: 978-0-203-86366-4
61
f i l m st u d ie s
62
Film Studies
New
5th Edition
Introduction to Film Studies
Edited by Jill Nelmes, University of East London, UK
‘Introduction to Film Studies is an excellent overview that provides a useful reference and introduction to key topics in Film Studies.’ – John Caro, University of
Portsmouth, UK
Introduction to Film Studies is a comprehensive textbook for students of cinema.
This completely revised and updated fifth edition guides students through the key issues and concepts in film studies, traces the historical
development of film and introduces some of the worlds key national cinemas. A range of theories and theorists are presented from
Formalism to Feminism, from Eisenstein to Deleuze. Each chapter is written by a subject specialist, including two new authors for the fifth
edition. A wide range of films are analysed and discussed. It is lavishly illustrated with 150 film stills and production shots, in full colour
throughout. Reviewed widely by teachers in the field and with a foreword by Bill Nichols, it will be essential reading for any introductory
student of film and media studies or the visual arts worldwide.
Key features of the fifth edition are:
•updated coverage of a wide range of concepts, theories and issues in film studies
•in-depth discussion of the contemporary film industry and technological changes
•new chapters on Film and Technology and Latin American Cinema
•new case studies on films such as District 9, Grizzly Man, Amores Perros, Avatar, Made in Dagenham and many others
•marginal key terms, notes, cross-referencing
•suggestions for further reading, further viewing and a comprehensive glossary and bibliography
•a new, improved Companion Website including popular case studies and chapters from previous editions (including chapters on German Cinema and The French New Wave), links to supporting sites, clips, questions and useful resources.
November 2011: 560pp • Hb: 978-0-415-58257-5: £80.00 • Pb: 978-0-415-58259-9: £26.99 • eBook: 978-0-203-82413-9
New
Movie History: A Survey
Second Edition
Douglas Gomery, Emeritus, University of Maryland, USA and Clara Pafort-Overduin, Utrecht University, the Netherlands
’Covering everything from Edison to Avatar, Gomery and Pafort-Overduin have written the
clearest, best organized, and most user-friendly film history textbook on the market. It masterfully
distills the major trends and movements of film history, so that the subject can be taught in one
semester. And each chapter includes a compelling case study that highlights an important moment
in movie history and, at the same time, subtly introduces a methodological approach. This book is a
pleasure to read and to teach.’ – Peter Decherney, University of Pennsylvania, USA
How can we understand the history of film?
Historical facts don’t answer the basic questions of film history. History, as this fascinating book shows, is
more than the simple accumulation of film titles, facts and figures. This is a survey of over 100 years of cinema
history, from its beginnings in 1895, to its current state in the twenty-first century.
An accessible, introductory text, Movie History: A Survey looks at not only the major films, filmmakers, and
cinema institutions throughout the years, but also extends to the production, distribution, exhibition,
technology and reception of films. The textbook is divided chronologically into four sections, using the
timeline of technological changes:
Key pedagogical features include:
• timelines in each section help students to situate the films within a broader historical context
• case study boxes with close-up analysis of specific film histories and a particular emphasis on film reception
• lavishly illustrated with over 450 color images to put faces to names, and to connect pictures to film titles
• margin notes add background information and clarity
• glossary for clear understanding of the key terms described
• references and further reading at the end of each chapter to enhance further study.
A supporting website is available at www.routledge.com/textbooks/moviehistory, with lots of extra materials, useful for the classroom or independent study.
Written by two highly respected film scholars and experienced teachers, Movie History is the ideal textbook for students studying film history.
April 2011: 480pp • Hb: 978-0-415-77544-1: £80.00 • Pb: 978-0-415-77545-8: £24.99 • eBook: 978-0-203-83228-8
Companion Website
f i l m s tud i e s
Film Theory Reader: Debates and Arguments
Edited by Marc Furstenau, Carleton University, Canada
’An excellent collection of provocative and compelling debates, expertly and elegantly arranged. Essays new and old form a dynamic and accessible portrait of
ideas foundational to contemporary thinking about film. This book is sure to inspire.’ – Haidee Wasson, Concordia University, Canada
The Film Theory Reader brings together a range of key theoretical texts, organized thematically to emphasise the development of specific critical concepts
and theoretical models in the field of film theory.
Each section presents well-known or significant texts, which have introduced a particularly influential concept, followed by texts that have developed or
extended the concept, or that have offered explicit critiques or arguments against the original model. The collection thus represents and reproduces the
debates and arguments that have shaped the theoretical landscape of film studies, guiding the reader through the complex terrain of theoretical debate,
and offering suggestions for further reading and research.
An introduction from the editor contextualises the essays and provides a logical guide to the book, clarifying the links between articles and tracing the
development of key arguments. The notes to the introduction include extensive references, for readers to explore and further their own studies, as they
are guided through the history of debate in film theory.
Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Film Theory: A History of Debates, Marc Furstenau Part I: The Future of Film Theory: A Debate 2. An Elegy for Theory, D.N.
Rodowick 3. Theory, Philosophy, and Film Studies, Malcolm Turvey Part II. Arguments With Early Film Theory 4. The Psychology of the Photoplay, Hugo
Münsterberg 5. Film/Mind Analogies: The Case of Hugo Münsterberg, Noël Carroll 6. Visible Man, or the Culture of Film, Béla Bálazs 7. Bálazs: Realist or Modernist?, Malcolm Turvey 8. The
Ontology of the Photographic Image, André Bazin 9. The Evolution of the Language of Cinema, André Bazin 10. Rethinking Bazin: Ontology and Realist Aesthetics, Daniel Morgan Part III:
Classic Debates 11. The Cinema: Language or Language System?, Christian Metz 12. The Semiology of the Cinema, Peter Wollen 13. Recapitulation of Images and Signs, Gilles Deleuze 14.
Visual Pleasure and Narrative Cinema, Laura Mulvey 15. Is the Gaze Male?, E. Ann Kaplan 16. Afterthoughts on ’Visual Pleasure and Narrative Cinema’, Laura Mulvey 17. The Oppositional
Gaze: Black Female Spectators, bell hooks Part IV: Recent Arguments 18. Digital Cinema and the History of a Moving Image, Lev Manovich 19. Moving Away from the Index: Cinema and
the Impression of Reality, Tom Gunning 20. The End of Cinema: Multimedia and Technological Change, Anne Friedberg 21. Digital Cinema: A False Revolution, John Belton
2010: 320pp
Hb: 978-0-415-49317-8: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-49322-2: £26.99
New in 2012
New in 2012
New in 2012
De-Westernizing Film Studies
The Casting Handbook
Feminist Film Studies
Edited by Saer Maty Ba and Will Higbee
For Film and Theatre Makers
Karen Hollinger
This edited collection brings together international scholars
and filmmakers with research expertise across a range of
non-Western film cultures, but who have one shared aim:
to challenge and offer alternatives to Eurocentric
theoretical, historical perspectives in film studies.
Suzy Catliff and Jenny Granville, Leeds
Metropolitan University, UK
July 2012: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-68783-6: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-68784-3: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14424-4
New in 2012
The Screenplay Business
Managing Creativity and the Film Industry
Peter Bloore, UEA and Wingfield College, UK
The development of a film script is a long and complex
process, beginning with the initial story concept,
continuing through drafting and financing, to the start
of the shoot. Although initially creatively driven by the
writer, it is a team effort, and is managed by a producer
or development executive. The Screenplay Business
examines this process and considers how to create the
best processes and environments for developing stories
and concepts for film, how the creative team can work
effectively together and how producers and
development executives can build their businesses.
Casting is one of the most vital and creative areas in the
production of drama – and yet the craft and skills
needed to put together a successful and exciting cast are
often overlooked and ignored. The Casting Handbook
explains the casting process from beginning to end and
covers everything a producer or director needs to know.
The Casting Handbook considers the actors’, producers’
and directors’ relationship with a casting director, the
day to day work that is casting, what makes ’good
casting’ and the difference it makes to the final product.
Including interviews with actors, agents, directors and
producers; case studies; exercises; and a fact file of
useful letters and addresses, this book offers a complete
introduction to the casting process suitable for students
or those just starting out in film, TV or theatre.
Hb: 978-0-415-68822-2: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-68824-6: £19.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14341-4
Feminist Film Studies is a
readable, comprehensive
textbook that can be used in
introductory classes in feminist
film theory and criticism.
Karen Hollinger provides an
accessible overview of the field
of women and film
complemented by analyses of
key texts that illustrate major
topics in the field. The text
covers a wide range of areas in
which women’s representation
and involvement in film are paramount issues.
Hb: 978-0-415-57526-3: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-57528-7: £19.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14680-4
You can now
follow Routledge
Media on
June 2012: 240pp
Hb: 978-0-415-61332-3: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-61333-0: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14371-1
http://twitter.com/
Routledge_MandC
63
f i l m st u d ie s
64
New in 2012
New
New
Film Theory
Multimodal Film Analysis
The Persistence of Hollywood
Rational Reconstructions
How Films Mean
Warren Buckland, Oxford Brookes University, UK
John Bateman, University of Bremen, Germany and
Karl-Heinrich Schmidt, University of Wuppertal,
Germany
Thomas Elsaesser, University of Amsterdam, the
Netherlands
In Film Theory: Rational
Reconstructions, Warren
Buckland asks a series of
questions about how film
theory gets written in the first
place:
•How does it select its objects of study and its methods of inquiry?
•How does it make discoveries and explain filmic phenomena?
• How does it formulate and solve theoretical
problems?
He asks these questions of film theory through a rational
reconstruction and a classical commentary. Both
frameworks clarify and reformulate vague and inexact
expressions, redefine obscure concepts, and examine the
underlying logic of film theory arguments. This not only
subjects film theory to rigorous examination; it also
teaches students how to write theory, by enabling them
to question and critically interrogate the logic of previous
film theory arguments.
Series: Routledge Studies in Multimodality
This book presents a new basis for the empirical analysis
of film. Starting from an established body of work in film
theory, the authors show how a close incorporation of
the current state of the art in multimodal theory,
including accounts of the syntagmatic and paradigmatic
axes of organisation, discourse semantics and advanced
’layout structure’, provides a methodology by which
concrete details of film sequences drive mechanisms for
constructing filmic discourse structures. The book
introduces the necessary background, the open
questions raised, and the method by which analysis can
proceed step-by-step with extensive examples drawn
from a broad range of films. The book aims to provide
an analytic tool kit that will enable the reader to
approach the study of film organisation with new levels
of detail, probing deeply into the fundamental question
of film: just how is it that films reliably communicate
meaning?
Hb: 978-0-415-88351-1: £90.00
The book consists of nine chapters that closely examine
a series of canonical film books and essays in great
detail, by Peter Wollen, Laura Mulvey, Thomas Elsaesser,
Stephen Heath, and Slavoj Žižek, among others.
June 2012: 208pp
Hb: 978-0-415-59097-6: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-59098-3: £19.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14366-7
Feminism at the Movies
New
Understanding Gender in Contemporary
Popular Cinema
Edited by Hilary Radner and Rebecca Stringer,
both at University of Otago, New Zealand
The Language and Style of Film
Criticism
Edited by Andrew Klevan, University of Oxford, UK
and Alex Clayton, Bristol University, UK
New
The Language and Style of Film
Criticism brings together original
essays from an international
range of academics and film
critics highlighting the
achievements, complexities and
potential of film criticism.
Feminism at the Movies:
Understanding Gender in
Contemporary Popular Cinema
examines the way that
contemporary film reflects
today’s changing gender roles.
The book offers a
comprehensive overview of the
central issues in feminist film
criticism with analyses of over
twenty popular contemporary
films across a range of genres,
such as chick flicks, teen pics,
hommecoms, horror, action adventure, indie flicks, and
women lawyer films.
While Hollywood’s success – its
persistence – has remained
constant for almost one hundred
years, the study of its success has
undergone significant expansion
and transformation. Since the
1960s, Thomas Elsaesser’s
research has spearheaded the
study of Hollywood, beginning
with his classic essays on
auteurism and cinephilia,
focused around a director’s
themes and style, up to his
analysis of the ’corporate authorship’ of contemporary
director James Cameron. In between, he has helped to
transform film studies by incorporating questions of
narrative, genre, desire, ideology and, more recently,
Hollywood’s economic-technological infrastructure and its
place within global capitalism.
The Persistence of Hollywood brings together Elsaesser’s
key writings about Hollywood filmmaking. It includes his
detailed studies of individual directors (including
Minnelli, Fuller, Ray, Hitchcock, Lang, Altman, Kubrick,
Coppola, and Cameron), as well as essays charting the
shifts from classic to corporate Hollywood by way of the
New Hollywood and the resurgence of the blockbuster.
The book also presents a history of the different
critical-theoretical paradigms central to film studies in its
analysis of Hollywood, from auteurism and cinephilia to
textual analysis, Marxism, psychoanalysis, and
post-industrial analysis.
Hb: 978-0-415-96813-3: £110.00
Pb: 978-0-415-96814-0: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-15250-8
New
Cinema Audiences and
Modernity
New Perspectives on European Cinema
History
Edited by Daniel Biltereyst, Universiteit Gent,
Belguim, Richard Maltby, Flinders University, USA,
and Philippe Meers, Antwerp Universiteit, Belguim
This book sheds new light on the cinema and modernity
debate by confronting established theories on the role of
the modern cinematic experience with new empirical
work on the history of the social experience of
cinema-going, film audiences and film exhibition.
In recent years, in contrast to the
theoretical, historical and cultural
study of film, film criticism has
been relatively marginalised,
especially within the academy.
This book highlights the
distinctiveness of film criticism and addresses ways in which
it can take a more central place within the academy and
develop in dynamic ways outside it.
Contributors explore issues of femininity as well as
masculinity, reflecting on the interface of popular cinema
with gendered realities and feminist ideas. Topics include
the gendered political economy of cinema, the female
director as auteur, postfeminist fatherhood, consumer
culture, depictions of professional women, transgender,
sexuality, gendered violence, and the intersections of
gender, race, and ethnic identities.
The Language and Style of Film Criticism is essential reading
for academics, teachers, students and journalists who wish
to understand and appreciate the language and style of
film criticism.
Hb: 978-0-415-89587-3: £90.00
Pb: 978-0-415-89588-0: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-15241-6
Hb: 978-0-415-67277-1: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-67278-8: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-80463-6
April 2011: 208pp
Hb: 978-0-415-56095-5: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-56096-2: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-81731-5
The collection’s case studies thus provide a ’how to’
compendium of current methodologies for researchers
and students working on film and media audiences, film
and media experiences, and historical reception.
Companion Website
f i l m s tud i e s
New
New
New
Postcolonial Cinema Studies
The Routledge Concise History
of Science Fiction
Fight Club
Edited by Sandra Ponzanesi, Utrecht University, the
Netherlands and Marguerite Waller, University of
California, USA
This collection of essays
foregrounds the work of
filmmakers in theorizing and
comparing postcolonial
conditions, recasting debates in
both cinema and postcolonial
studies. Postcolonial cinema is
presented, not as a rigid
category, but as an optic
through which to address
questions of postcolonial
historiography, geography,
subjectivity, and epistemology.
October 2011: 288pp
Hb: 978-0-415-78228-9: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-78229-6: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-18147-8
Mark Bould, University of the West of England, UK
and Sherryl Vint, Brock University, Canada
Series: Routledge Concise Histories of Literature
The term ’science fiction’ has an
established common usage, but
close examination reveals that
writers, fans, editors, scholars,
and publishers often use this
word in different ways for
different reasons.
Discussing the place of key
works and looking forward to
the future of the genre, this
book is the ideal starting point
both for students and all those
seeking a better understanding
of science fiction.
2nd Edition
Film and Literature
New
An Introduction and Reader
Science Fiction
Edited by Timothy Corrigan, University of
Pennsylvania, USA
The Routledge new edition of
this classic book functions as
an accessible introduction to
the history and theory of film
and literature and also includes
the key critical readings
necessary for an understanding
of this increasingly vibrant and
popular area.
The new edition has been fully
updated and is usefully
separated into three sections: in
the first Timothy Corrigan guides readers through the
history of film and literature to the present; the second
section has expanded to reprint forty key essays by
leading theorists in the field including André Bazin, Linda
Hutcheon and Robert Stam, as well as new essays by
Timothy Corrigan and William Galperin; the third section
brings the history and debates together offering a
practical overview and useful case studies.
Including an annotated bibliography and glossary of
critical terms, Film and Literature will fill a gap on many
film and literature courses.
October 2011: 528pp
Hb: 978-0-415-56009-2: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-56010-8: £24.99
Series: Philosophers on Film
Released in 1999, Fight Club is
David Fincher’s popular adaption
of Chuck Palahniuk’s cult novel,
and one of the most
philosophically rich films of
recent years. This is the first book
to explore the varied
philosophical aspects of the film.
Beginning with an introduction
by the editor that places the film
and essays in context, each
chapter explores a central theme
of Fight Club from a
philosophical perspective. Topics discussed include:
•Fight Club, Plato’s cave and Descartes’ cogito
•moral disintegration
Hb: 978-0-415-43570-3: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-43571-0: £15.99
eBook: 978-0-203-83016-1
New
Edited by Thomas E. Wartenberg, Mount Holyoke
College, USA
Edited by Mark Bould, University of the West of
England, UK, Andrew M. Butler, Canterbury Christ
Church University, UK, Adam Roberts, Royal
Holloway, University of London, UK and Sherryl
Vint, Brock University, Canada
•identity, gender and masculinity
•visuals and narration.
Including annotated further reading at the end of each
chapter, Fight Club is essential reading for anyone
interested in the film, as well as those studying
philosophy and film studies.
August 2011: 176pp
Hb: 978-0-415-78188-6: £60.00
Pb: 978-0-415-78189-3: £16.99
eBook: 978-0-203-80800-9
New
Screening the Afterlife
Series: Routledge Companions
Theology, Eschatology, and Film
Science Fiction is a
comprehensive overview of the
history and study of science
fiction. It outlines major writers,
movements, and texts in the
genre, established critical
approaches and areas for future
study.
Christopher Deacy, University of Kent, UK
Bringing into dialogue the many
perspectives on the genre, The
Routledge Companion to
Science Fiction is essential reading for anyone interested
in the history and the future of science fiction and the
way it is taught and studied.
•the language of resurrection and immortality
January 2011: 576pp
Hb: 978-0-415-45378-3: £125.00
Pb: 978-0-415-45379-0: £24.99
Screening the Afterlife offers the first comprehensive
examination of death and the afterlife within the
growing field of religion and film. It looks critically at a
range of cinematic works and considers how they
encroach upon theological territory. Topics addressed
include:
•the survival of personhood after death
•near-death experiences and mind-dependent worlds
•the portrayal of ’heaven’ and ’hell’.
Drawing on films from Flatliners and What Dreams May
Come to Working Girl and The Shawshank Redemption,
this book is a unique and fascinating exploration of the
’last things’ as envisaged by modern filmmakers.
Hb: 978-0-415-57258-3: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-57259-0: £19.99
eBook: 978-0-203-35601-2
65
f i l m st u d ie s
66
New
Encyclopedia of Early Cinema
The International Film Business
The Routledge Film Music
Sourcebook
Edited by Richard Abel, University of Michigan, USA
A Market Guide Beyond Hollywood
The Encyclopedia of Early
Cinema, now in a new
paperback edition, is a unique
one-volume reference work
which explores the first
twenty-five years of cinema’s
development, from the early
1890s to the mid-1910s. These
early years of the history of
cinema have lately been the
subject of resurgent interest
and a growing body of
scholarship, and have come to be recognized as an
extraordinarily diverse period, when moving pictures
were quite unlike the kind of cinema that later emerged
as the dominant norm.
Angus Finney, CASS Business School, UK
Edited by James Wierzbicki, University of Sydney,
Australia, Nathan Platte, Roosevelt University of
Chicago, USA and Colin Roust, University of
Michigan, USA
The Routledge Film Music Source Book is an annotated,
thematically organized collection of approximately eighty
source readings pertaining to film music dating from its
beginnings to the present, from the US and other select
countries around the globe. The documents represent a
wide variety of music-related issues that were heatedly
debated during cinema’s early decades and which by
and large remain of concern today.
Hb: 978-0-415-88873-8: £95.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88874-5: £29.99
Neo-Feminist Cinema
Girly Films, Chick Flicks, and Consumer
Culture
Hilary Radner, University of Otago, New Zealand
Neo-Feminist Cinema examines how Hollywood has
responded to women’s changing social roles. Radner pays
particular attention to how the contemporary woman’s
film portrays what some have called postfeminism and
what the author redefines as neo-feminism, represented
by figures such as Helen Gurley Brown, women for whom
work was a necessity, rather than a right or even a
privilege. Popular films explored include He’s Just Not That
Into You, The Devil Wears Prada, Bride Wars, Sex and the
City, and many more.
2010: 240pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87773-2: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-87774-9: £23.99
The Enchanted Screen
The Unknown History of Fairy-Tale Films
Jack Zipes, University of Minnesota, USA
The Enchanted Screen: The Unknown History of
Fairy-Tale Films offers readers a long overdue,
comprehensive look at the rich history of fairy tales and
their influence on film, complete with the inclusion of an
extensive filmography compiled by the author. With this
book, Jack Zipes not only looks at the extensive,
illustrious life of fairy tales and cinema, but he also
reminds us that, decades before Walt Disney made his
mark on the genre, fairy tales were central to the birth
of cinema as a medium, as they offered cheap,
copyright-free material that could easily engage
audiences not only though their familiarity but also
through their dazzling special effects.
Full of insight into some of our most beloved films and
stories, and boldly illustrated with numerous film stills,
The Enchanted Screen, is essential reading for film buffs
and fans of the fairy tale alike.
2010: 456pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99062-2: £120.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99061-5: £32.99
This Encyclopedia covers all aspects of scholarship on early
cinema, both traditional and revisionist. It contains articles
on the technological and industrial developments, the
techniques of film production, the actors and filmmakers
of the time, and on the changing modes of representation
and narration, as well as the social and cultural contexts
within which early films circulated, including topics such
as distribution, exhibition and audience. Beyond the USA
and Europe, attention is also given to the wider
international picture, including those regions in Asia,
Africa, the Middle East, and South and Central America
where filmmaking may have been relatively undeveloped
but movie-going was significant.
The Encyclopedia of Early Cinema is an invaluable and
fascinating resource for students and researchers
interested in the history of cinema.
2010: 832pp
Pb: 978-0-415-77856-5: £29.99
eBook: 978-0-203-48204-9
Analysing the Screenplay
Edited by Jill Nelmes, University of East London, UK
Most producers and directors
acknowledge the crucial role of
the screenplay, yet the film
script has received little
academic attention until
recently, even though the
screenplay has been in existence
since the end of the nineteenth
century.
Analysing the Screenplay is a
comprehensive anthology,
offering a global selection of
contributions from
internationally renowned, specialist authors. Together
they provide readers with an insight into this fascinating
yet complex written form.
This anthology will be of interest to undergraduate and
postgraduate students on a range of Film Studies
courses, particularly those on scriptwriting.
2010: 288pp
Hb: 978-0-415-55633-0: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-55634-7: £22.99
eBook: 978-0-203-84338-3
The International Film Business considers the independent
film sector as a business, and the specific skills and
knowledge that it requires. It describes both the present
state of the independent film industry and the significant
technological developments that have begun to take
place, and what changes these might effect.
Taking an entrepreneurial perspective on what future
opportunities will be available to prepared and informed
business students and emerging practitioners, this text
includes case studies that take students through the
successes and failures of a variety of real film companies/
projects and exclusive interviews with leading
practitioners in all sectors of the industry, from
production to exhibition.
2010: 264pp
Hb: 978-0-415-57584-3: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-57585-0: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-85114-2
2nd Edition
Fifty Contemporary Film
Directors
Edited by Yvonne Tasker, University of East Anglia, UK
Fifty Contemporary Film Directors examines the work of
some of today’s most popular and influential cinematic
figures. It provides an accessible overview of each
director’s contribution to cinema, incorporating a
discussion of their career, major works and impact.
Revised throughout and with twelve new entries, this
second edition is an up-to-date introduction to some of
the most prominent film makers of the present day.
With further reading and a filmography accompanying
each entry, this comprehensive guide is indispensable to
all those studying contemporary film and will appeal to
anyone interested in the key individuals behind modern
cinema’s greatest achievements.
2010: 496pp
Hb: 978-0-415-49766-4: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-55433-6: £16.99
eBook: 978-0-203-84434-2
Film History
Edited by William Guynn, Sonoma State University,
USA
The Routledge Companion to Film History is an
indispensible guide for anyone studying film history for
the first time. Incorporating a series of eleven
introductory, critical essays on key subject areas, with a
dictionary of key names and terms, it serves to introduce
the reader to the field of film history in a comprehensive
and well-rounded manner.
2010: 296pp
Hb: 978-0-415-77656-1: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-77657-8: £18.99
Companion Website
f i l m s tud i e s
Film and Ethics
Foreclosed Encounters
Lisa Downing, University of Exeter, UK and Libby
Saxton, Queen Mary, University of London, UK
Film and Ethics considers a
range of films and texts on film
criticism alongside disparate
philosophical discourses of
ethics by Levinas, Derrida,
Foucault, Lacanian
psychoanalysts and postmodern
theorists.
2009: 160pp
Hb: 978-0-415-40926-1: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-40927-8: £20.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87201-7
Film Theory
An Introduction Through the Senses
Thomas Elsaesser, University of Amsterdam, the
Netherlands and Malte Hagener, Universitat
Luneburg, Germany
What is the relationship
between the cinema and the
spectator? Renowned film
scholars Thomas Elsaesser and
Malte Hagener use this central
question for Film Theory in
order to guide students through
all of the major film theories –
from the classical period to
today – in this brief, insightful,
and engaging book. Every kind
of cinema (and every kind of
film theory) presupposes an
ideal spectator, and then imagines a certain relationship
between the mind and body of that spectator and the
screen. Using seven distinctive configurations of
spectator and screen that move from “exterior” to
“interior” relationships, the authors retrace the most
important stages of film theory from the 1920s onwards,
with special attention paid to theories since 1945, from
neo-realist and modernist theories to psychoanalytic,
apparatus, phenomenological, and cognitivist theories,
while also offering an incisive extension of film theory
through the senses into the digital age.
2009: 232pp
Hb: 978-0-415-80100-3: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-80101-0: £20.99
Routledge Advances in Film
Studies
New in 2012
The Aesthetics of Antifascist
Film
Radical Projection
New in 2012
Jennifer Barker, East Tennessee State University, USA
Postwar Renoir
’Barker’s magisterial treatment of seventy years of
international film history traces the power of
cinematic art to resist the fascinations of fascism.’
– Russell Berman, Stanford University
Film and the Memory of Violence
Colin Davis, Royal Holloway, University of London, UK
This book re-assesses director Jean Renoir’s work
between his departure from France in 1940 and his
death in 1979, and contributes to the debate over how
the medium of film registers the impact of trauma.
March 2012: 208pp
Hb: 978-0-415-80697-8: £80.00
Through a series of detailed film case histories ranging
from The Great Dictator to Hiroshima mon amour to The
Lives of Others, The Aesthetics of Antifascist Film
explores the genesis and recurrence of antifascist
aesthetics as it manifests in the WWII, Cold War and
Post-Wall historical periods.
March 2012: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-89915-4: £80.00
New in 2012
Cinema as Weather
Stylistic Screens and Atmospheric Change
Kristi McKim, Hendrix College, USA
How do cinematic portrayals of the weather reflect and
affect our experience of the world? While weatherly
predictability and surprise can impact our daily
experience, the history of cinema attests to the stylistic
and narrative significance of snow, rain, wind, sunshine,
clouds, and skies. Through analysis of films ranging from
The Wizard of Oz to The Umbrellas of Cherbourg, from
Citizen Kane to In the Mood for Love, Kristi McKim calls
our attention to the ways that we read our atmospheres
both within and beyond the movies.
Hb: 978-0-415-89412-8: £80.00
New in 2012
Popular Music and Masculinity
in Action Films
Amanda Howell, Griffith University, Australia
This book is a study of how popular music has
participated in the cinematic construction of gender,
with a special focus on the action genre and films that
share action cinema’s interest in spectacularly violent
masculinities. Particularly concerned with the aesthetic
and ideological work of popular music in film, Howell
traces the generic exchanges among contemporary
music, music cultures, and filmic representations of
masculinity.
August 2012: 228pp
Hb: 978-0-415-89720-4: £80.00
New in 2012
Japanese Horror Films and
their American Remakes
Valerie Wee, National University of Singapore
This book explores the complex process of adaptation,
paying particular attention to the various
transformations that occur when texts cross cultural
boundaries. Through close readings of a range of
Japanese horror films and their Hollywood remakes, this
study addresses the social, cultural, aesthetic, and
generic features of each national cinema’s approach to
and representation of horror, within the subgenre of the
ghost story, tracing convergences and divergences in the
films’ narrative trajectories, aesthetic style, thematic
focus, and ideological content.
May 2012: 256pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88860-8: £80.00
New in 2012
Stardom and the Aesthetics of
Neorealism
Ingrid Bergman in Rossellini’s Italy
Ora Gelley, North Carolina State University, USA
In this new book, Gelley both considers the significance
of the collaboration between Rossellini and Ingrid
Bergman in light of the neorealist aesthetic, and
re-examines the director’s immediate postwar works in
relation to the contemporary discussions on Italian
national identity. She argues that rather than marking a
radical break with the director’s early neorealist
successes, Rossellini’s films with Bergman in fact extend
the boundaries of the concept of neorealism and
challenge the standard reading of some of its basic
tenets, especially regarding the relationship between
character and depicted settings, both urban and natural.
Hb: 978-0-415-89003-8: £80.00
67
f i l m st u d ie s
68
New
New
Cinema, Memory, Modernity
Neoliberalism and Global
Cinema
Hollywood Melodrama and the
New Deal
The Representation of Memory from the Art
Film to Transnational Cinema
Capital, Culture, and Marxist Critique
Public Daydreams
Edited by Jyotsna Kapur, Southern Illinois
University, USA and Keith B. Wagner, King’s
College London, UK
Anna Siomopoulos, Bentley University, USA
In this edited volume, an international ensemble of
scholars looks at how the worldís various cinemas,
including Asia, Africa, Latin America, Europe, and the
US, have variously performed, contested, and reinforced
the worldwide transition to neoliberalism. Grounded in
Marxist theory, the volume considers how the
contradictions of capital, both as culture and commerce,
have played out globally in contemporary media culture.
This book considers the many different ways that
Hollywood films of the New Deal era addressed the
fundamental concepts of the burgeoning welfare state
– ideas such as liberal empathy, consumer citizenship,
the refeudalization of the state, and, above all, the
welfare state ideal of minimal economic redistribution.
Siomopoulos argues that Hollywood melodrama in
particular became politicized when the New Deal
defined consumption as a civic obligation that could
help end the Depression and create a more united and
democratic nation.
April 2011: 370pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88905-6: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-81363-8
Hb: 978-0-415-88293-4: £80.00
New
New
Korea’s Occupied Cinemas,
1893–1948
The Politics of Loss and Trauma
in Contemporary Israeli Cinema
The Untold History of the Film Industry
Raz Yosef, Tel Aviv University, Israel
Brian Yecies, Centre for Asia Pacific Social
Transformation Studies, Australia and
Ae-Gyung Shim, University of New South Wales,
Australia
This book investigates the dynamic linkages between
foreign film culture, imported films, national cultural
policy and audience reception, and the significant impact
that all these elements had on the transformation of
cinema in Korea between 1893 and 1948.
One of the most striking phenomena in contemporary
Israeli cinema is the number and scope of films dealing
with past traumatic events – events that were repressed
or insufficiently mourned, such as the memory of the
Holocaust, traumas from wars and terrorist attacks, and
the losses entailed by the experience of immigration.
This book examines the complex and crucial role of
Israeli cinema in remembering and restaging traumas
and losses that were denied entry into the shared
national past.
May 2011: 236pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99538-2: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-80933-4
May 2011: 218pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87688-9: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-82575-4
New
New
South Asian Cinema
Transnational Asian Identities
in Pan-Pacific Cinemas
Gender, Justice, and Dissent
Alka Kurian, University of Washington, USA
Using the lenses of post-colonial and feminist theory,
Kurian examines politically engaged, women-centred
South Asian films.
Hb: 978-0-415-96117-2: £80.00
The Reel Asian Exchange
Edited by Philippa Gates and Lisa Funnell, both at
Wilfrid Laurier University, Canada
This collection examines the exchange of Asian identities
at the levels of both film production and film reception
amongst pan-Pacific cinemas. Topics include the
reception of Hollywood films by Asian audiences, the
construction of raced and gendered identity in Thai,
Japanese, and Hong Kong cinemas, and pan-Pacific
co-productions.
Russell J.A. Kilbourn, Wilfrid Laurier University,
Canada
Focusing on European, North and South American, and
Asian films, Kilbourn reads cinema as providing the
viewer with not only the content and form of memory,
but also with its own directions for use: the required
codes and conventions for understanding and
implementing this crucial prosthetic technology.
2010: 288pp
Hb: 978-0-415-80118-8: £85.00
Cinematic Emotion in Horror
Films and Thrillers
The Aesthetic Paradox of Pleasurable Fear
Julian Hanich, Free University Berlin, Germany
In this study, Hanich looks at fear at the movies – its
aesthetics, its experience and its pleasures. With
examples from many famous films, Hanich attempts to
answer the paradox of why we enjoy films that thrill us,
that scare us, that shock us – affects that we otherwise
wish to avoid.
2010: 314pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87139-6: £85.00
eBook: 978-0-203-85458-7
Distributing Silent Film Serials
Local Practices, Changing Forms, Cultural
Transformation
Rudmer Canjels, VU University Amsterdam, the
Netherlands
2010: 284pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87714-5: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-83258-5
Latsploitation, Exploitation
Cinemas, and Latin America
Edited by Victoria Ruétalo, University of Alberta,
Canada and Dolores Tierney, University of Sussex, UK
2009: 344pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99386-9: £90.00
October 2011: 232pp
Hb: 978-0-415-89354-1: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-18139-3
Companion Website
am e r i can f i l m
American Film
New in 2012
The Classical Hollywood Reader
Edited by Steve Neale, University of Exeter, UK
The Classical Hollywood Reader covers the history of Hollywood from the advent of the Motion Picture Patents Company
in 1908 to the beginning of the end of the era of the vertically integrated studio system in 1948.
Section 1 covers the period between 1908 and 1912, focussing on the structure and practices of the US film industry and
developments in acting, stardom and style in the late 1900s and early 1910s.
Section 2 covers the period between 1912 and 1927, including the distribution, exhibition and aesthetic characteristics
of single and multi-reel films and features in the 1910s, the rise of vertical integration and developments in film production,
presentation and exhibition, aspects of film style, and aspects of national and international film distribution in the 1920s.
Section 3 covers the period between 1927 and 1939, which includes the advent and impact of sound, the establishment
and implementation of the Production Code, the nature of the studio system, the nature of cinema-going, the star system,
stylistic and technological innovations of various kinds, Hollywood’s relationship with radio industry, and modes of distribution and exhibition in the 1930s.
Section 4 covers the period between 1940 and 1948, covering developments in sound design, the impact of World War Two on the nature, content and context of Hollywood
and its practices, and the decline in audiences and the nature and impact of the Supreme Court ruling in the late 1940s.
Designed especially for courses, the readings are preceded by a general introduction by the editor, Steve Neale. It concludes with suggestions for further reading and research.
May 2012: 400pp
Hb: 978-0-415-57672-7: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-57674-1: £24.99
New
Horror Noire
Blacks in American Horror Films from the
1890s to Present
Robin R. Means Coleman, University of Michigan,
USA
From King Kong to Candyman,
the boundary-pushing genre of
the horror film has always been
a site for provocative
explorations of race in
American popular culture. In
Horror Noire: Blacks in
American Horror Films from
1890’s to Present, Robin R.
Means Coleman traces the
history of notable
characterizations of blackness in
horror cinema, and examines
key levels of black participation on screen and behind
the camera. She argues that horror offers a
representational space for black people to challenge the
more negative, or racist, images seen in other media
outlets, and to portray greater diversity within the
concept of blackness itself.
Horror Noire presents a unique social history of blacks in
America through changing images in horror films.
Throughout the text, the reader is encouraged to unpack
the genre’s racialized imagery, as well as the narratives
that make up popular culture’s commentary on race.
June 2011: 296pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88019-0: £95.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88020-6: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-84767-1
American History Goes to the
Movies
The Contemporary Hollywood
Reader
Hollywood and the American Experience
Edited by Toby Miller,
University of California, USA
W. Bryan Rommel Ruiz, Colorado College in
Colorado Springs, USA
2009: 576pp
Hb: 978-0-415-45225-0: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-45226-7: £26.99
In American History Goes to the Movies, W. Bryan
Rommel-Ruiz shows how popular representations of
historic events shape the way audiences understand the
history of the United States, including American
representations of race and gender, and stories of
immigration, especially the familiar narrative of the
American Dream.
Using films from many different genres, American
History Goes to the Movies draws together movies that
depict the Civil War, the Wild West, the assassination of
JFK, and the events of 9/11, from The Birth of a Nation
and Gone with the Wind to The Exorcist and United 93,
to show how viewers use movies to make sense of the
past, addressing not only how we render history for
popular enjoyment, but also how Hollywood’s renderings
of America influence the way Americans see themselves
and how they make sense of the world.
2010: 304pp
Hb: 978-0-415-80219-2: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-80220-8: £19.99
eBook: 978-0-203-83373-5
Fifty Key American Films
Edited by John White, Anglia Ruskin University, UK
and Sabine Haenni, Cornell University, USA
2009: 288pp
Hb: 978-0-415-77296-9: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-77297-6: £14.99
New in 2012
American Independent Cinema
Indie, Indiewood and Beyond
Edited by Geoff King, Brunel University, UK,
Claire Molloy, Brighton University, UK and
Yannis Tzioumakis, Liverpool University, UK
Written by some of the leading authors in the field,
American Independent Cinema: Indie, Indiewood and
Beyond will introduce students to recent developments
as well as reviewing, reassessing and revising particular
positions, approaches and arguments concerning
American independent cinema.
October 2012: 240pp
Hb: 978-0-415-68428-6: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-68429-3: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14370-4
69
a meri ca n film
70
AFI Film Readers
Series Editors: Edward Branigan and
Charles Wolfe, University of California,
USA
The AFI Film Readers, published in
cooperation with the American Film
Institute, focus on important issues and
themes in film and media scholarship.
New in 2012
Animation
Edited by Suzanne Buchan
This new addition to the AFI Film Readers series brings
together original scholarship on animation in
contemporary moving image culture, from traditional
animated film shorts to video games. The collection aims
to foreground new critical perspectives on animation
and connect them to current production practice,
particularly with regard to digital animation. Throughout,
contributors from a range of disciplines offer a roadmap
of new directions in Animation Studies, discussing
animation in relationship to aesthetics, ideology,
visualization, representation, information technology,
and archiving.
Hb: 978-0-415-80723-4: £90.00
Pb: 978-0-415-80724-1: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-15257-7
New in 2012
The EcoCinema Reader
Theory and Practice
Edited by Sean Cubitt, University of Southampton,
UK, Salma Monani, Gettysburg College, USA and
Stephen Rust
The EcoCinema Reader is a comprehensive introduction
to the rapidly growing field of eco-film criticism, a
branch of critical scholarship that investigates cinema’s
intersections with environmental understandings. The
book aims to define ecocinema studies, sketch its
development over the past twenty years, provide
theoretical frameworks for moving forward, and present
eloquent examples of the practice of eco-film criticism
through essays written by the field’s leading and
emerging scholars. From Grizzly Man to The Day After
Tomorrow and An Inconvenient Truth to March of the
Penguins, the pieces in this collection comprehensively
interrogate the breadth of ecocinema.
New in 2012
Documentary Testimonies
Color and the Moving Image
Global Archives of Suffering
History, Theory, Aesthetics, Archive
Edited by Bhaskar Sarkar and Janet Walker, both
at University of California, USA
Edited by Simon Brown, Kingston University, UK
and Sarah Street and Liz I. Watkins, both at
University of Bristol, UK
This new AFI Film Reader is the first comprehensive
collection of original essays on the use of color in film.
Contributors from diverse film studies backgrounds
consider the importance of color throughout the history
of the medium, assessing not only the theoretical
implications of color on the screen, but also the ways in
which developments in cinematographic technologies
transformed the aesthetics of color and the nature of
film archiving and restoration.
May 2012: 296pp
Hb: 978-0-415-89263-6: £90.00
Pb: 978-0-415-89264-3: £24.99
Arnheim for Film and Media
Studies
2009: 296pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99663-1: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99664-8: £20.99
eBook: 978-0-203-88341-9
Film Theory and Contemporary
Hollywood Movies
Edited by Warren Buckland, Oxford Brookes
University, UK
2009: 368pp
Hb: 978-0-415-96261-2: £90.00
Pb: 978-0-415-96262-9: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-03076-9
Edited by Scott Higgins, Wesleyan University, USA
Society for
Cinema and Media
Studies 2011
Award for Best
Edited Collection
2010: 304pp
Hb: 978-0-415-80107-2: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-80108-9: £23.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87691-6
Slapstick Comedy
Edited by Tom Paulus, University of Antwerp,
Belgium and Rob King, University of Toronto, Canada
2010: 288pp
Hb: 978-0-415-80178-2: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-80179-9: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87676-3
World Cinemas, Transnational
Perspectives
Edited by Natasa Durovicova and Kathleen E.
Newman, University of Iowa, USA
The Epic Film in World Culture
2009: 384pp
Hb: 978-0-415-97653-4: £90.00
Pb: 978-0-415-97654-1: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-88279-5
Edited by Robert Burgoyne, Wayne State University,
USA
2010: 408pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99017-2: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99018-9: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-92747-2
Hb: 978-0-415-89942-0: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-89943-7: £24.99
Companion Website
wor l d ci n e m a
b r i t i sh f il m
British Film
British Popular Cinema
World Cinema
British Comedy Cinema
Edited by I.Q. Hunter and Laraine Porter, De
Montfort University, UK
British comedy cinema has been
a mainstay of domestic
production since the beginning
of the last Century and
arguably the most popular and
important genre in British film
history.
This edited volume will offer the
first comprehensive account of
the rich and popular history of
British comedy cinema from
silent slapstick and satire to
contemporary romantic
comedy. Using a loosely chronological approach, essays
cover successive decades of the twentieth and
twenty-first Century with a combination of case studies
on key personalities, production cycles and studio output
along with fresh approaches to issues of class and
gender representation. It will present new research on
familiar comedy cycles such as the Ealing Comedies and
Carry On films as well as the largely undocumented
silent period along with the rise of television spin offs
from the 1970s and the development of animated
comedy from 1915 to the present.
Films covered include: St Trinians, A Fish Called Wanda,
Brassed Off, Local Hero, The Full Monty, Four Lions and
In the Loop.
May 2012: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-66665-7: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-66667-1: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14633-0
British Women’s Cinema
Edited by Melanie Bell, University of Newcastle, UK
and Melanie Williams, University of Hull, UK
2009: 240pp
Hb: 978-0-415-46696-7: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-46697-4: £20.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87200-0
Culture, Diaspora and Border Crossings in
Popular Hindi Cinema
Rajinder Dudrah, University of Manchester, UK
Series: Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series
This book offers a cultural and social analysis of
contemporary Bollywood films over the past decade,
exploring the ideas of nation, race, religion, gender and
sexuality, cinema and public spaces, diaspora and
globalization.
June 2012: 208pp
Hb: 978-0-415-44740-9: £80.00
New in 2012
4 Volume Set
Chinese Cinema
Edited by Chris Berry, Goldsmiths, University of
London, UK
A new title in the Routledge Major Works series, Critical
Concepts in Media and Cultural Studies, this is a
four-volume collection of landmark and cutting-edge
research on Chinese cinema. The materials gathered by
the editor, a leading scholar in the field, include major
works that explore: aesthetics through key films and
directors; film cultural practices, such as consumption,
distribution, exhibition, reception and criticism; production
practices, for instance, genres, stars, studio structures, and
marketing; and cinemaís connection to society and its
relationship to issues such as the nation-state, revolution,
and gender. The collection’s temporal scope extends from
the arrival of cinema via the Lumière Brothers in 1895 to
the present day, and it ranges widely across all territories
to include full coverage of the films produced by the
ethnic Chinese diaspora.
June 2012: 1736pp
Hb: 978-0-415-60323-2: £800.00
New in 2012
Women and Turkish Cinema
Gender Politics, Cultural Identity and
Representation
Eylem Atakav, University of East Anglia, UK
For more information and a
full listing of titles in:
The British Popular Cinema Series
Visit: www.routledge.com/u/series/bpc
After the Holocaust
Challenging the Myth of Silence
New in 2012
Bollywood Travels
New in 2012
New
This book focuses on women and Turkish cinema in the
context of gender politics, cultural identity and
representation. Examining issues of gender politics, cultural
identity and representation in relation to women in Turkish
cinema within three main historical periods – the
pre-1980s, the 1980s and post-1980s – the book provides
a comprehensive view of cinema’s approach to women in a
country which straddles European and Middle Eastern
cultural conceptions, identities and religious values.
August 2012: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-67465-2: £75.00
Edited by David Cesarani, Royal Holloway,
University of London, UK and Eric J. Sundquist,
For the last decade scholars
have been questioning the idea
that the Holocaust was not
talked about in any way until
well into the 1970s. After the
Holocaust: Challenging the
Myth of Silence is the first
collection of authoritative,
original scholarship to expose a
serious misreading of the past
on which, controversially, the
claims for a ’Holocaust industry’
rest. Taking an international
approach this bold new book exposes the myth and
opens the way for a sweeping reassessment of Jewish
life in the postwar era, a life lived in the pervasive,
shared awareness that Jews had narrowly survived a
catastrophe that had engulfed humanity as a whole but
claimed two-thirds of their number.
A breakthrough volume in the debate about the ’Myth
of Silence’, this is a must for all students of Holocaust
and genocide.
Hb: 978-0-415-61675-1: £85.00
Pb: 978-0-415-61676-8: £26.99
eBook: 978-0-203-80314-1
New in 2012
Latin American History Goes to
the Movies
Stewart Brewer
Latin American History Goes to the Movies combines the
study of the rich history of Latin America with the
medium of feature film and documentary history. Author
Stewart Brewer provides students the opportunity to
participate in a visual historical encounter of Latin
America, from pre-Columbian times through the
present. Each chapter addresses major themes, regions,
and events in Latin American History, coupled with
primary sources and filmographies, to offer an
accessible, yet scholarly approach to the field. Through
films such as Amistad, The Three Amigos, Frida, and
Che, Brewer shows how history is retold, and what that
retelling means for public memory.
From Scarface to Selena, and from the slave trades to
countless revolutions, Latin American History Goes to
the Movies sets the record straight between real history
and Hollywood culture, and gives students a solid
foundation in utilizing film as a vehicle for learning and
understanding historical episodes.
Hb: 978-0-415-87350-5: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-87351-2: £20.99
71
wo rld c ine ma
72
New in 2012
Bengali Cinema
The Asian Cinematic
Experience
’An Other Nation’
Stephen Teo
Series: Media, Culture and Social Change in Asia Series
This book explores the range and dynamism of
contemporary Asian cinemas, covering East Asia (China,
Japan, South Korea, Hong Kong, Taiwan), Southeast
Asia (Thailand, Singapore, Malaysia), South Asia
(Bollywood), and West Asia (Iran), in order to discover
what is common about them and to engender a theory
or concept of ’Asian Cinema’. It goes beyond existing
work which provides a field survey of Asian cinema,
probing more deeply into the field of Asian Cinema,
arguing that Asian Cinema constitutes a separate
pedagogical subject, and putting forward an alternative
cinematic paradigm.
August 2012: 288pp
Hb: 978-0-415-57146-3: £80.00
Sharmistha Gooptu, South Asia Research
Foundation (SARF), India
Covering the years spanning cinema’s emergence as a
popular form in Bengal in the first half of the twentieth
century, this book examines the main genres and trends
produced by this cinema, and leads up to Bengali
cinema’s last phase of transition in the 1980s. Arguing
that Bengali cinema has been a key economic and social
institution, the author highlights that the Bengali filmic
imaginary existed over and above the imaginary of the
Indian nation.
2010: 248pp
Hb: 978-0-415-57006-0: £85.00
Pb: 978-0-415-67449-2: £24.95
eBook: 978-0-203-84334-5
The Multiplex in India
A Cultural Economy of Urban Leisure
New
Film in Contemporary
Southeast Asia
Cultural Interpretation and Social
Intervention
Edited by David C.L. Lim, The Open University,
Malaysia and Hiroyuki Yamamoto, Kyoto
University, Japan
Series: Media, Culture and Social Change in Asia Series
This book discusses
contemporary film in all the
main countries of Southeast
Asia, and the social practices
and ideologies which films
either represent or oppose. It
shows how film acquires
signification through cultural
interpretation, and how film
also serves as a site of
contestations between social
and political agents seeking to
promote, challenge, or erase
certain meanings, messages or ideas from public
circulation.
Hb: 978-0-415-61763-5: £85.00
eBook: 978-0-203-18190-4
Adrian Athique, University of Essex, UK and
Douglas Hill, University of Otago, New Zealand
This book provides the reader with a comprehensive
account of the new leisure infrastructure arising at the
intersection between contemporary trends in cultural
practice and the spatial politics that are reshaping the
cities of India. Exploring the significance, and
convergence, of economic liberalisation, urban
redevelopment and the media explosion in India, the
book demonstrates an innovative approach towards the
cultural and political economy of leisure in a complex
and rapidly-changing society.
2009: 256pp
Hb: 978-0-415-46837-4: £85.00
eBook: 978-0-203-86214-8
At Routledge we always look
for innovative ways to support
and collaborate with our
readers and the organizations
they represent.
If you or your organization
would like to discuss
partnership opportunities, from
reciprocal marketing activities
to commercial enterprises,
please do get in touch.
[email protected]
Now
e
onlin
Communication and
Media Catalogue
We have introduced a number of
new functions to our easy to use
e-catalogue format which should
help you whilst browsing the latest
Routledge titles in Communication
and Media Studies.
Using the online catalogue
you can:
•save books to your personal booklist and email it to friends or colleagues or save as an Excel spreadsheet
•bring up the full details for every book, including blurbs, tables of contents, author bios and reviews
•preview titles using the view inside function for many of our books
•request a complimentary exam copy for qualifying titles or recommend books to your librarian using the online forms.
Simply visit:
www.routledge.com/resources/
catalogs/communication_media_
catalogue_2012.
Companion Website
g e n re
Genre
Routledge Film Guidebooks
New in 2012
2nd Edition
Bollywood
A Guidebook to Popular Hindi Cinema
New
Romantic Comedy
Fantasy
Claire Mortimer, Colchester Sixth Form College, UK
Jacqueline Furby and Claire Hines, both at
Southampton Solent University, UK
Fantasy addresses a previously
neglected area within Film
Studies. The book looks at the
key aesthetics, themes, debates
and issues at work within this
increasingly popular genre and
examines influential films and
franchises that illustrate these
concerns. Recent case study film
series discussed will include:
Tejaswini Ganti, New York University, USA
In Bollywood, anthropologist and film scholar Tejaswini
Ganti provides a guide to the cultural, social and political
significance of Hindi cinema, outlining the history and
structure of the Bombay film industry, and the development
of popular Hindi filmmaking since the 1930s.
Providing information and commentary on the key
players in Bollywood, including composers, directors and
stars, as well as material from current filmmakers
themselves, the areas covered in Bollywood include:
•history of Indian cinema
•main themes and characteristics of Hindi cinema
•significant films, directors and stars
•production and distribution of Bollywood films
•interviews with actors, directors and screenwriters.
Anyone interested in, or studying Bollywood cinema will
find this a valuable purchase.
Hb: 978-0-415-58384-8: £60.00
Pb: 978-0-415-58388-6: £16.99
eBook: 978-0-203-83441-1
• Harry Potter (Various,
2001–2011)
•Lord of the Rings (Peter Jackson, 2001–2003)
•Pirates of the Caribbean (Gore Verbinski 2003–2007)
•The Chronicles of Narnia (Various, 2005–2012).
The authors also consider fantasy film and its
relationship to myth, legend and fairytale, examining its
important role in contemporary culture. The book
provides an historical overview of the genre and its
evolution, contextualising each fantasy film within its
socio-cultural period and with reference to relevant
critical theory.
Westerns
John White, Anglia Ruskin University, UK
New
Crime
Sarah Casey Benyahia
Science Fiction
2010: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-55812-9: £60.00
Pb: 978-0-415-55813-6: £16.99
eBook: 978-0-203-83531-9
Film Noir
Mark Bould, University of the West of England, UK
Hard-boiled Modernity and the Cultures of
Globalization
Science Fiction looks at the key themes and issues at
work within films in this genre and then examines
popular and famous films that demonstrate these
concerns. Areas discussed with sample films include:
Jennifer Fay, Vanderbilt University, USA and Justus
Nieland, Michigan State University, USA
•Utopia/Dystopia – Just Imagine (1930); V for Vendetta
(2005)
•Apocalypse – Mad Max (1979); The Matrix (1999)
•Mad Science – Frankenstein (1931); Jurassic Park
(1993)
2010: 176pp
Hb: 978-0-415-54862-5: £60.00
Pb: 978-0-415-54863-2: £14.99
eBook: 978-0-203-85143-2
Hb: 978-0-415-48687-3: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-48688-0: £16.99
eBook: 978-0-203-80445-2
New in 2012
•Outer Space – 2001: A Space Odyssey (1968); Voyage
á travers l’impossible (1904)
2011: 288pp
Hb: 978-0-415-47309-5: £60.00
Pb: 978-0-415-47310-1: £14.99
eBook: 978-0-203-85268-2
•Monsters and Aliens – King Kong (2005); Alien (1979)
•Replication – Blade Runner (1982); I, Robot (2004)
•Time Travel – The Time Machine (1960 and 2002);
Back to the Future (1985).
Mark Bould also considers science fiction film and its
relation to culture and offers a historical overview with
chronology, contextualising science fiction within a
socio-cultural, political or national landscape.
May 2012: 176pp
Hb: 978-0-415-45810-8: £60.00
Pb: 978-0-415-45811-5: £16.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14332-2
2009: 304pp
Hb: 978-0-415-45812-2: £60.00
Pb: 978-0-415-45813-9: £14.99
eBook: 978-0-203-86968-0
Horror
Brigid Cherry, St. Mary’s University College, UK
2009: 256pp
Hb: 978-0-415-45667-8: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-45668-5: £14.99
eBook: 978-0-203-88218-4
73
genre
74
New
New in 2012
New
Documentary
The Concise Routledge
Encyclopedia of the
Documentary Film
In The Space Of A Song
Witness and Self-Revelation
John Ellis
Digital technologies have
transformed documentary for
both filmmakers and audiences.
Documentary: Witness and
Self-Revelation takes an
audience-centred approach to
documentary, arguing that
everyday experiences of what it
feels like to film and to be
filmed have developed a new
sophistication and skepticism in
today’s viewers. The book
argues that documentary has
developed a new third phase of its century long history:
films now tend to document the encounters between
filmers and the filmed. But what do we really know
about those encounters?
The author’s extensive experience of documentary
production practice also enables him to examine
technological changes in detail. Innovations in
technology can seem to offer greater realism but can at
the same time frustrate attempts to achieve it. John Ellis
therefore proposes the idea of ’Slow Film’ as an antidote
to the problems of increasing speed brought about by
easy digital editing.
This book is ideal for students studying film, media
studies and visual culture.
July 2011: 192pp
Hb: 978-0-415-57418-1: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-57419-8: £19.99
eBook: 978-0-203-80846-7
New in 2012
4 Volume Set
Documentary Film
Edited by Ian Aitken
Documentary film is cinema’s oldest form, dating back to
the medium’s invention at the turn of twentieth century.
From cinema’s earliest days, important documentary
films and film-makers have emerged continuously and,
today, interest in documentary film remains substantial,
and is rapidly growing. Standing conferences have been
instituted, and new scholarly journals and festivals
devoted to the genre are blossoming. Indeed,
documentary film culture flourishes, particularly in the
developing world and in non-democratic states. China’s
burgeoning underground documentary film movement,
for example, has garnered much critical attention in
recent years.
Documentary Film includes a full index and
comprehensive introductions, newly written by the
editor, which place the collected material in its historical
and intellectual context. It is an essential work of
reference and is destined to be valued by scholars and
advanced students as a vital research tool.
Hb: 978-0-415-57901-8: £725.00
Edited by Ian Aitken
The Concise Routledge
Encyclopedia of the
Documentary Film is a fully
international reference work on
the history of the documentary
film from the Lumiere brothers’
Workers Leaving the Lumiere
Factory (1885) to Michael
Moore’s Fahrenheit 911 (2004).
Previously published in three
volumes, entries have been
edited and updated for the
new, concise edition and three new entries have been
added on: India, China and Africa.
The Concise Routledge Encyclopedia of the Documentary
Film:
•discusses individual films and filmmakers including
little-known filmmakers from countries such as India,
Bosnia, China and others
•examines the documentary filmmaking traditions
within nations and regions, or within historical periods
in places such as Iran, Brazil, Portugal, and Japan
•explores themes, issues, and representations in
documentary film including human rights, modernism,
homosexuality, and World War I, as well as types of
documentary film such as newsreels and educational
films
•elaborates on production companies, organizations,
festivals, and institutions such as the American Film
Institute, Ceylon Tea Propaganda Board, Hot Docs
(Toronto), and the World Union of Documentary
•describes styles, techniques, and technical issues such
as animation, computer imaging, editing techniques,
IMAX, music, and spoken commentary.
The Uses of Song in Film
Richard Dyer, Kings College London, UK
Songs take up space and time
in film and the way they do so
indicates a great deal about the
songs themselves, the nature of
the feelings they present, and
who is allowed to present
feelings how, when and where.
In the Space of a Song explores
this perception through a range
of examples, from classic MGM
musicals to blaxploitation
cinema, with the career of Lena
Horne providing a turning point
in the cultural dynamics of the feeling.
In the Space of a Song is ideal for both scholars and
students of film studies.
October 2011: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-22373-7: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-22374-4: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-80462-9
New in 2012
Westerns
The Essential ’Journal of Popular Film and
Television’ Collection
Edited by Gary R. Edgerton, Old Dominion
University, USA and Michael T. Marsden, Bowling
Green State University, USA
Bringing together all aspects of documentary film, this
accessible concise edition provides an invaluable
resource for both scholars and students. With many film
stills, this resource provides the decisive entry point into
the history of an art form.
January 2012: 800pp
Hb: 978-0-415-59642-8: £150.00
eBook: 978-0-203-14806-8
This groundbreaking anthology
comprises the Journal of
Popular Film and Television’s
rich and longstanding legacy of
scholarship on Westerns with a
new special issue devoted
exclusively to the genre. It
examines and analyzes the
evolution and significance of
the screen Western from its
earliest beginnings to its current
global reach and relevance in
the twenty-first century.
Containing eighteen essays published between 1972
and 2011, it is divided into six sections covering Silent
Westerns, Classic Westerns, Race and Westerns, Gender
and Westerns, Revisionist Westerns and Westerns in
Global Context. This seminal work places the genre
squarely within the broader aesthetic, socio-historical,
cultural and political dimensions of life in the US and
internationally, where the Western has been
reinvigorated and reinvented many times. It illustrates
how Western films and television series have been used
to define the present and discover the future by looking
backwards at America’s imagined past.
March 2012: 272pp
Hb: 978-0-415-78323-1: £85.00
Pb: 978-0-415-78324-8: £24.99
To see more titles in our
Special Issues as Books
Programme:
Visit page 84
Companion Website
te l ev i s i o n
Television
New in 2012
3rd Edition
Introduction to
Television Studies
Jonathan Bignell, University of Reading, UK
In this comprehensive textbook, now updated for its third edition, Jonathan Bignell provides students
with a framework for understanding the key concepts and main approaches to Television Studies,
including audience research, television history and broadcasting policy, and the analytical study of
individual programmes.
Features for the third edition include:
•a glossary of key terms
•key terms defined in margins
•suggestions for further reading at the end of each chapter
•activities for use in class or as assignments
•new and updated case studies discussing advertisements, approaches to news reporting, television scheduling, and challenges to television in new
contexts of viewing on computers and mobile devices.
Individual chapters address: studying television, television histories, television cultures, television texts and narratives, television genres and formats,
television production, television quality and value, television realities and representation, television you can’t see, television audiences, beyond television.
Hb: 978-0-415-59816-3: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-59817-0: £21.99
New
4th Edition
Television
Critical Methods and Applications
Jeremy G. Butler, University of Alabama,
USA
Series: Routledge Communication
For nearly two decades, Television: Critical
Methods and Applications has served as
the foremost guide to television studies.
Designed for the television studies course
in communication and media studies
curricula, Television explains in depth how
television programs and commercials are
made and how they function as producers of meaning. Author Jeremy G.
Butler shows the ways in which camera style, lighting, set design, editing,
and sound combine to produce meanings that viewers take away from their
television experience. He supplies students with a whole toolbox of
implements to disassemble television and read between the lines, teaching
them to incorporate critical thinking into their own television viewing. The
fourth edition builds upon the pedagogy of previous editions to best
accommodate current modes of understanding and teaching television.
Highlights of the fourth edition include:
•a new chapter and part organization to reflect the current approach to
teaching television, with greatly expanded methods and theories chapters
•an entirely new chapter on modes of production and their impact on what
you see on the screen
•discussions integrated throughout on the latest developments in
television’s on-going convergence with other media, such as material on
transmedia storytelling and YouTube’s impact on video distribution
•over three hundred printed illustrations, including new and better quality
frame grabs of recent television shows and commercials
•a Companion Website featuring color frame grabs, a glossary, flash cards,
and editing and sound exercises for students, as well as PowerPoint
presentations, sample syllabi and other materials for instructors. Links to
online videos that support examples in the text are also provided.
With its distinctive approach to examining television, Television is
appropriate for courses in television studies, media criticism, and general
critical studies.
Hb: 978-0-415-88327-6: £140.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88328-3: £45.00
eBook: 978-0-203-84524-0
75
t elevisio n
76
New in 2012
New in 2012
New in 2012
TV Cops
Reacting to Reality Television
History on Television
The Contemporary American Television
Police Drama
Performance, Audience and Value
Ann Gray and Erin Bell
Beverley Skeggs, Goldsmiths, University of London,
UK, and Helen Wood, De Montfort University, UK
How do we get the kinds of television histories we do,
and why?
The unremitting explosion of reality television across the
schedules has become a sustainable global phenomenon
generating considerable popular and political fervour.
Non-fiction history programming has flourished on
British and other national televisions. This
interdisciplinary study of history programming identifies
and examines different genres employed by producers
and tracks the programmes’ commissioning, production,
marketing and distribution histories.
Jonathan Nichols-Pethick, DePauw University, USA
The police drama has been one of the longest running
and most popular genres in American television. In TV
Cops, Jonathan Nichols-Pethick argues that, perhaps
more than any other genre, the police series in all its
manifestations, from Hill Street Blues to Miami Vice to
The Wire – embodies the full range of the cultural
dynamics of television. Stories about the police are more
than ritual struggles between good and evil or reminders
of the ultimate necessity of a benevolent police
authority. They respond to some of our most pressing
social concerns: concerns about how we imagine and
maintain a sense of community in a vast and often
alienating society, and about our rights and
responsibilities as citizens.
Exploring the textual, industrial, and social contexts of
police shows on American television, this book
demonstrates how police drama plays a vital role in the
way we understand and engage issues of social order
that most of us otherwise experience only in such
abstractions as laws and crime statistics. And given the
current diffusion and popularity of the form, we might
ask a number of questions that deserve serious critical
attention:
•Under what circumstances have stories about the
police proliferated in popular culture?
•What function do these stories serve for both the
television industry and its audiences?
•Why have these stories become so commercially viable
for the television industry in particular?
This book addresses the impact of this endless opening
out of intimacy as an entertainment trend that erodes
the traditional boundaries between spectator and
performer demanding new tools for capturing
television’s relationships with audiences. Rather than
asking how the reality television genre is interpreted as
‘text’ or representation we investigate the politics of
viewer encounters as interventions, evocations, and
more generally mediated social relations.
Through a reinvigorated approach to audience research
the authors show how the ubiquitous use of ‘ordinary’
people on television and the exposure of their
behavioural, psychological and personal traits are worked
through by viewers in relation to self and sociality.
A must read for both students and researchers in
audience studies, television studies and media and
communication studies.
October 2012: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-69370-7: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-69371-4: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-14423-7
New in 2012
•How do stories about the police help us understand
current social and political debates about crime, about
the communities we live in, and about our identities as
citizens?
Television Regulation and
Media Policy in China
May 2012: 240pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87787-9: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-87788-6: £23.99
eBook: 978-0-203-85502-7
Series: Routledge Contemporary China Series
Yik-Chan Chin, University of Nottingham, UK
An examination of China’s national television policy and
structure since the late 1990s. Argues that the socialist
state-owned TV system is transforming into a
commercialized and mixed-ownership system. Case
studies of television systems show that China has
demonstrated substantial local diversity and complex
interactions between local, national and global media.
June 2012: 160pp
Hb: 978-0-415-49083-2: £75.00
Complimentary Exam Copies
Titles marked with this icon are available as
complimentary exam copies for lecturers or faculty
considering them for course adoption. Visit the
URL to obtain your print or electronic copy.
With comparative references to other European nations
and North America, this study focuses on British history
programming over the last two decades and analyses
the relationship between the academy and media
professionals. It outlines and discusses often-competing
discourses about how to ‘do’ history and the underlying
assumptions about who make up the audiences for
history programmes.
Recent changes in the media landscape are included,
which have affected to a great degree how history in
general, and whose history in particular, appears
onscreen and on the Internet. Through a number of case
studies, using material from interviews by the authors
with academic and media professionals, the role of the
‘professional’ historian and producer/directors as
mediators of historical material and interpretations is
analysed as well as their forms and style of presentation
and narration.
June 2012: 192pp
Hb: 978-0-415-58038-0: £85.00
Pb: 978-0-415-58039-7: £24.99
New
Global Television Formats
Understanding Television Across Borders
Edited by Tasha Oren, University of Wisconsin, USA
and Sharon Shahaf, Georgia State University, USA
For decades, television scholars
have viewed global television
through the lens of cultural
imperialism, focusing primarily
on programs produced by US
and UK markets and exported
to foreign markets. Global
Television Formats revolutionizes
television studies by deprovincializing its approach to
media globalization. It
re-examines dominant
approaches and their legacies
of global/local and center/periphery, and offers new
directions for understanding television’s contemporary
incarnations.
Hb: 978-0-415-96544-6: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-96545-3: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-92865-3
Companion Website
te l ev i s i o n
New
Legitimating Television
Media Convergence and Cultural Status
Michael Z. Newman and Elana Levine, both at
University of Wisconsin, USA
Legitimating Television explores
the increasingly prevalent idea
that TV has gotten better. This
notion, circulating in the
popular press, the TV industry,
and media scholarship, typically
references shows like The
Sopranos and new technologies
like DVRs and HDTV sets.
Across these sites, the cultural
legitimation of television
highlights the medium’s rise in
status from its previous
reputation as the ’idiot box’ to a more respectable level,
especially among cultural elites. But there are troubling
ideological implications to this, as the upgrade of
television’s status comes at the expense of forms of TV
deemed unworthy. These delegitimated forms are
associated with audiences characterized by femininity
and lower class status.
Hb: 978-0-415-88025-1: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88026-8: £22.00
eBook: 978-0-203-84764-0
New
4th Edition
The Television Handbook
Jeremy Orlebar
The only key media textbook
that brings together current
academic thinking and theory
with the practical aspects of
television programme
production in the twenty-first
century.
Comedia
For more titles in:
The Media Practice Series,
See page 48.
Transmedia Television
Series Editor: David Morley, Goldsmiths,
Audiences, New Media, and Daily Life
The Comedia series features new
theoretical and empirical work exploring
the dynamics of the arts and culture
industries, addressing critical issues in the
field of contemporary popular culture:
issues of production, design, marketing,
and consumption. While the principle
focus is contemporary, the series also
offers historical, educational, and policyoriented perspectives across a broad range
of media and cultural forms, from the news
media to the visual arts.
Transmedia Television uses empirical audience research
to explore attitudes towards the dramatic changes that
television has undergone since the turn of the
twenty-first century due to the development of digital
technologies. It asks to what extent audiences are
embracing these changes and what ‘television’ means in
a multiplatform media landscape.
New
Edited by Jostein Gripsrud, University of Bergen,
Norway
Branding Television
Catherine Johnson, Royal Holloway, University of
London, UK
Branding Television examines why and how the UK and
US television industries have turned towards branding as
a strategy in response to the rise of satellite, cable,
digital television, and new media, such as the Internet
and mobile phone.
Branding Television extends and complicates our
understanding of the changes to television over the past
thirty years and of the role of branding in contemporary
Western culture. It will be of particular interest to students
and researchers in television studies, but also cultural
industries and media and cultural studies more generally.
October 2011: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-54842-7: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-54843-4: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-59703-3
New
Teletechnologies, Place, and
Community
August 2011: 336pp
Hb: 978-0-415-60413-0: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-60414-7: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-80647-0
New
Rowan Wilken, Swinburne University of
Technology, Australia
Teletechnologies, or technologies of distance, cannot be
ignored. Indeed, the present electronic age is said to
have wrought profound changes to how we think about
and experience who we are, where we are, and how we
relate with one another. Place and community have
traditionally formed key concepts for thinking about
these issues, but what relevance do these concepts now
hold for us? In this wide-ranging study, Wilken
re-evaluates how ideas of place and community intersect
with and help us make sense of a world transformed by
information and communication technologies.
June 2011: 274pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87595-0: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-80702-6
Elizabeth Evans, University of Nottingham, UK
Hb: 978-0-415-88292-7: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-81910-4
Relocating Television
Television in the Digital Context
Relocating Television offers readers an insight into
studying television alongside the Internet, participatory
media and other technocultural phenomena such as
DVDs, user-generated content and everyday digital
media production. It also focuses on more specific
programmes and phenomena, including The Wire, MSN,
amateur footage in TV news, Bollywoodization of TV
news, YouTube, fan sites tied to programmes such as
Grey’s Anatomy and X Factor.
Relocating Television will be highly beneficial to both
students and academics across a wide range of
undergraduate and postgraduate courses including
media, communication and cultural studies, and
television and film studies.
2010: 304pp
Hb: 978-0-415-56452-6: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-56453-3: £22.99
eBook: 978-0-203-85137-1
Media Events in a Global Age
Edited by Nick Couldry, Goldsmiths, University of
London, UK, Andreas Hepp, University of Bremen,
Germany and Friedrich Krotz, University of Erfurt,
Germany
The ‘eventization’ of the media is increasingly important
for the marketing and appreciation of popular media
texts. Media Events gives readers an understanding of
the major debates in this high-profile area of media and
cultural research.
2009: 328pp
Hb: 978-0-415-47710-9: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-47711-6: £25.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87260-4
77
t elevisio n
78
New
Flow TV
Television Personalities
Music in Television
Television in the Age of Media Convergence
Stardom and the Small Screen
Channels of Listening
Edited by Michael Kackman, Marnie Binfield and
Matthew Thomas Payne, all at University of Texas
at Austin, USA, Allison Perlman, Pennsylvania State
University, USA and Bryan Sebok, also at University
of Texas at Austin, USA
James Bennett, London Metropolitan University, UK
Edited by James Deaville, Carleton University, Canada
Music in Television is a
collection of essays examining
television’s production of
meaning through music in
terms of historical contexts,
institutional frameworks,
broadcast practices,
technologies, and aesthetics. It
presents the reader with
overviews of major genres and
issues, as well as specific case
studies of important television
programs and events. With
contributions from a wide range of scholars, the essays
range from historical-analytical surveys of TV sound and
genre designations to studies of the music in individual
programs, including South Park and Dr. Who.
Flow TV examines television in an age of technological,
economic, and cultural convergence. Seeking to frame a
new set of concerns for television studies in the
twenty-first century, this collection of all new essays
establishes television’s continued importance in a shifting
media culture. Both established and rising media
scholars come together to examine television through a
range of critical approaches from formal and industrial
analysis to critical technology studies, reception studies,
political economy, and critiques of television’s
transnational flows.
Television Personalities offers an exciting, engaging
approach to studying and understanding the most
prominent and popular performers in television and
celebrity culture.
2010: 240pp
Hb: 978-0-415-48188-5: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-48189-2: £20.99
eBook: 978-0-203-84268-3
Television Style
Jeremy G. Butler, University of Alabama, USA
2010: 304pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99222-0: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99223-7: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87963-4
Hb: 978-0-415-88135-7: £60.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88136-4: £20.99
eBook: 978-0-203-83101-4
2009: 248pp
Hb: 978-0-415-96511-8: £90.00
Pb: 978-0-415-96512-5: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87957-3
Television and New Media
Beyond Prime Time
Must-Click TV
Parody and Taste in Postwar
American Television Culture
Jennifer Gillan, Bentley University, USA
Television Programming in the
Post-Network Era
Ethan Thompson, Texas A&M University, USA
Series: Routledge Advances in Television Studies
In this original study, Thompson explores the
complicated relationships between Americans and
television during the 1950s, as seen and effected
through popular humor. Parody and Taste in Postwar
American Television Culture documents how Americans
grew accustomed to understanding politics, current
events, and popular culture through comedy that is
simultaneously critical, commercial, and funny. Along
with the rapid growth of television in the 1950s, an
explosion of satire and parody took place across a wide
field of American culture, in magazines, comic books,
film, comedy albums, and on television itself. Taken
together, these case studies don’t just analyze and
theorize the production and consumption of parody and
television, but force us to revisit and revise our notions
of postwar ’consensus’ culture as well.
2010: 180pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88638-3: £80.00
eBook: 978-0-203-83293-6
Television and New Media introduces students to the
ways that new media technologies have transformed
contemporary television production, distribution, and
reception practices. Drawing upon recent examples
including Lost, 24, and Heroes, this book closely examines
the ways that television programming has changed with
the influx of new media, transforming nearly every TV
series into a franchise, whose on-air, online, and
on-mobile elements are created simultaneously and held
together through transmedia storytelling.
2010: 328pp
Hb: 978-0-415-80237-6: £90.00
Pb: 978-0-415-80238-3: £22.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87503-2
Television Studies After TV
Understanding Television in the PostBroadcast Era
Edited by Graeme Turner and Jinna Tay, both at
University of Queensland, Australia
Screening Gender on Children’s
Television
2009: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-47769-7: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-47770-3: £20.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87831-6
The Views of Producers around the World
Dafna Lemish, Southern Illinois University, USA
Screening Gender on Children’s Television offers readers
insights into the transformations taking place in the
presentation of gender portrayals in television productions
aimed at younger audiences. It goes far beyond a critical
analysis of the existing portrayals of gender and culture by
sharing media professionals’ action-oriented
recommendations for change that would promote gender
equity, social diversity and the wellbeing of children.
2010: 240pp
Hb: 978-0-415-48205-9: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-48206-6: £19.99
eBook: 978-0-203-85540-9
2009: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99668-6: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99669-3: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-88450-8
Screening Gender on Children’s Television is an
accessible text which will appeal to a wide audience of
media practitioners as well as students and scholars. It
will be useful on a range of courses, including popular
culture, gender, television and media studies.
Edited by Amanda D. Lotz, University of Michigan,
USA
Television Studies: The Basics
Toby Miller, University of California, USA
Series: The Basics
2009: 264pp
Hb: 978-0-415-77423-9: £55.00
Pb: 978-0-415-77424-6: £11.99
The Television Studies Reader
Edited by Robert C. Allen and Annette Hill
2003: 656pp
Hb: 978-0-415-28323-6: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-28324-3: £22.99
Companion Website
c ultur al s tud i e s
Cultural Studies
New
Critical Approaches to Comics
Theories and Methods
Edited by Matthew J. Smith, Wittenberg University, USA and Randy Duncan, Henderson State University, USA
Critical Approaches to Comics offers students a deeper understanding of the artistic and cultural significance of comic
books and graphic novels by introducing key theories and critical methods for analyzing comics. Each chapter explains
and then demonstrates a critical method or approach, which students can then apply to interrogate and critique the
meanings and forms of comic books, graphic novels, and other sequential art. The authors introduce a wide range of
critical perspectives on comics, including fandom, genre, intertextuality, adaptation, gender, narrative, formalism,
visual culture, and much more.
As the first comprehensive introduction to critical methods for studying comics, Critical Approaches to Comics is the
ideal textbook for a variety of courses in comics studies.
Contributors include: Henry Jenkins, David Berona, Joseph Witek, Randy Duncan, Marc Singer, Pascal Lefevre,
Andrei Molotiu, Jeff McLaughlin, Amy Kiste Nyberg, Christopher Murray, Mark Rogers, Ian Gordon, Stanford
Carpenter, Matthew J. Smith, Brad J. Ricca, Peter Coogan, Leonard Rifas, Jennifer K. Stuller, Ana Merino, Mel Gibson,
Jeffrey A. Brown and Brian Swafford.
October 2011: 256pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88554-6: £95.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88555-3: £29.99
eBook: 978-0-203-83945-4
New
2nd Edition
That’s The Joint!
The Hip-Hop Studies Reader
Edited by Murray Forman, Northeastern University, USA and Mark Anthony Neal, Duke University, USA
‘Hip-hop, like all living artistic expression, constantly regenerates, turning innovation into
convention, ‘datcourse’ into discourse, vernacularisms into commodity or the precious art object. As
this second edition of the groundbreaking That’s the Joint! shows, hip-hop scholarship has done the
same: moving, grooving, breaking, and sampling the best ideas from an interdisciplinary community
theater of writers whose insights chart a vibrant sector of the American musical landscape.’
– Guthrie P. Ramsey, University of Pennsylvania, USA
‘A standard bearer text in Hip Hop Studies. Sweeping in scope and rigorous in analyses.’
– T. Denean Sharpley-Whiting, Vanderbilt University, USA
This newly expanded and revised second edition of That’s the Joint! brings together the most important and
up-to-date hip-hop scholarship in one comprehensive volume. Presented thematically, the selections address
the history of hip-hop, identity politics of the ’hip-hop nation,’ debates of ’street authenticity, social movements
and activism, aesthetics, technologies of production, hip-hop as a cultural industry, and much more. Further,
this new edition also includes greater coverage of gender, racial diversity in hip-hop, hip-hop’s global
influences, and examines hip-hop’s role in contemporary politics.
With pedagogical features including author biographies, headnotes summarizing key points of articles, and
discussion questions, That’s the Joint! is essential reading for anyone seeking deeper understanding of the
profound impact of hip-hop as an intellectual, aesthetic, and cultural movement.
August 2011: 776pp
Hb: 978-0-415-87325-3: £110.00
Pb: 978-0-415-87326-0: £35.00
eBook: 978-0-203-86527-9
79
c u lt u ral s tudies
80
New in 2012
Edward Said
New in 2012
Organizations and Popular
Culture
The Charisma of Criticism
Popular Culture: The Basics
H. Aram Veeser, CUNY City College, USA
Gary Hoppenstand
Information, Representation and
Transformation
Edited by Carl Rhodes, Swansea University, UK and
Simon Lilley, University of Leicester, UK
Throughout its history, popular mass-mediated culture
has turned its attention to representing and
interrogating organizational life. As early as Charlie
Chaplin’s cinematic classic Modern Times and as recently
as the primetime television hit The Simpsons, we see
cultural products that engage reflexively in coming to
terms with the meaning of work, technology and
workplace relations. It is only since the late 1990s,
however, that researchers in management and
organizations have come to collectively dwell on the
relationship between organizations and popular culture
– a relationship where the cultural meanings of work are
represented in popular culture, and where popular
culture comes to inform the meaning of work itself. Key
to this development has been the journal Culture and
Organization – a journal that has been centre stage in
creating new vistas through which the ’cultural studies
of organization’ can be explored.
March 2012: 240pp
Hb: 978-0-415-69239-7: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-69238-0: £24.99
For more titles in:
Our Special Issues as Books
Programme
See page 84.
New in 2012
Porno?Chic!
This insightful critical biography shows us an Edward
Said we did not know. H. Aram Veeser brings forth not
the Said of tabloid culture, or Said the remote
philosopher, but the actual man, embedded in the
politics of the Middle East but soaked in the values of
the West and struggling to advance the best European
ideas. Veeser shows the organic ties connecting his life,
politics, and criticism.
Drawing on what he learned over thirty-five years as
Said’s student and skeptical admirer, Veeser uses
never-before-published interviews, debate transcripts,
and photographs to discover a Said who had few
inhibitions and loathed conventional routine.
The candid tale of Said’s rise from elite academic
precincts to the world stage transforms not only our
understanding of Said, the man and the myth, but also
our perception of how intellectuals can make their way
in the world.
2010: 272pp
Hb: 978-0-415-90264-9: £24.99
Pb: 978-0-415-90265-6: £18.99
Series: The Basics
Popular Culture: The Basics is a fast-paced and lively
introduction to the theories and methods of popular
culture studies. Opening with a definition of ’popular
culture’, the book embarks on a tour of those cultural
forms which have kept the masses entertained over the
centuries.
May 2012: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-58137-0: £55.00
Pb: 978-0-415-58138-7: £11.99
New in 2012
Women’s Studies: The Basics
Bonnie G. Smith, Rutgers University, USA
Series: The Basics
New in 2012
4th Edition
British Cultural Identities
Edited by Mike Storry, formerly at John Moores
University, UK and Peter Childs, University of
Gloucestershire, UK
In British Cultural Identities Mike Storry and Peter Childs
assess the degree to which being British impinges on the
identity of the many people who live in Britain. They
analyse contemporary British identity through the various
and changing ways in which people who live in the UK
position themselves and are positioned by their culture
today. Using examples from contemporary and popular
culture, each chapter covers one of seven intersecting
themes:
Women’s Studies: The Basics is an
accessible introduction into the
ever expanding and increasingly
relevant field of studies focused
on women. Tracing the history of
the discipline from its origins, this
text sets out the main agendas of
women’s studies and feminism,
exploring the global development
of the subject over time, and
highlighting its relevance in the
contemporary world.
Providing a firm foundation for
all those new to the subject, this book is valuable
reading for undergraduates and postgraduates majoring
in women’s studies and gender studies, and all those in
related disciplines seeking a helpful overview for
women-centred, subject specific courses.
May 2012: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-60941-8: £55.00
Pb: 978-0-415-60944-9: £11.99
How Pornography Changed the World and
Made it a Better Place
•place and environment
Brian McNair, Queensland University of Technology,
Australia
•gender, sex and the family
•youth culture and style
New in 2012
Porno?Chic! examines the relationship between the
proliferation of pornography and sexualised culture in
the West and social and cultural trends which have
advanced the rights of women and homosexuals.
•class and politics
Gender: The Key Concepts
Brian McNair addresses this relationship with an analysis
of trends in sexualised culture since 2002 linked to a
transnational analysis of change in sexual politics and
sex/gender relations in a range of societies, from the
sexually liberalised societies of advanced capitalism to
those in which women and homosexuals remain tightly
controlled by authoritarian, patriarchal regimes.
This new edition is fully updated to include Britain’s
relationship with the wider world, changes in university
education and testing in schools, the trend towards
electronic entertainment and social networking, the new
impact of ‘Class’, and the culture of political leaking.
In this accessible, jargon-free book, Brian McNair will
examine why those societies in which sexualised culture
is the most liberalised and pervasive are also those in
which the socio-economic and political rights of women
and homosexuals have advanced the most.
Hb: 978-0-415-57290-3: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-57291-0: £19.99
•education, work and leisure
•ethnicity and language
•religion and heritage.
Hb: 978-0-415-68075-2: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-68076-9: £21.99
Edited by Mary Evans, University of Kent, UK and
Carolyn Williams, London School of Economics, UK
This invaluable volume provides an overview of over
forty terms, theories and concepts frequently used in
gender studies which those studying the subject can find
difficult to grasp. Each entry provides a critical definition
of the concept, examining the background to the idea,
its usage and the major figures associated with the term.
With cross referencing and further reading provided
throughout the text, this book unweaves the
relationships between different aspects of the field
defined as gender studies, and is essential for all those
studying gender in interdisciplinary contexts as
undergraduates, postgraduates and beyond.
July 2012: 336pp
Hb: 978-0-415-66961-0: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-66962-7: £18.99
Companion Website
New in 2012
NEW
New
Race and Ethnicity: The Key
Concepts
Racial Spectacles
3rd Edition
Explorations in Media, Race, and Justice
American Cultural Studies
Amy Ansell, Bard College, USA
Jonathan Markovitz, University of California, USA
An Introduction to American Culture
Neil Campbell and Alasdair Kean, both at
University of Derby, UK
Exploring race and ethnicity
within its historical and
intellectual context, this much
needed guide focuses on
conceptual areas of classical and
contemporary theories of race
and ethnicity; the body as an
object of racial discourse and
biological approaches to the
question of race.
May 2012: 256pp
Hb: 978-0-415-33794-6: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-33795-3: £14.99
eBook: 978-0-203-44823-6
New
Race and Ethnicity: The Basics
Peter Kivisto and Paul Croll, both at Augustana
College, USA
Series: The Basics
Race and Ethnicity: The Basics is
an accessible introduction to the
forms and dynamics of racial
and ethnic relations. Topics
covered include the relationship
between:
• race and ethnicity
• prejudice and discrimination
• inequality, class and gender, and ethnic conflict.
Including plenty of examples,
chapter summaries and a
glossary, this book is an essential read for all those
interested in race and ethnicity.
Hb: 978-0-415-77373-7: £55.00
Pb: 978-0-415-77374-4: £11.99
eBook: 978-0-203-18107-2
Racial Spectacles: Explorations
in Media, Race, and Justice
examines the crucial role the
media has played in circulating
and shaping national dialogues
about race through
representations of crime and
racialized violence. Jonathan
Markovitz argues that mass
media ’racial spectacles’ often
work to shore up racist
stereotypes, but that they also
provide opportunities to
challenge prevalent conceptions of race, and can be
seized upon as vehicles for social protest. This book
explores a series of mass media spectacles revolving
around the news, prime-time television, Hollywood
cinema, and the Internet that have either relied upon,
reconfigured, or helped to construct collective memories
of race, crime, and (in)justice. The case studies explored
include the Scottsboro interracial rape case of the 1930s,
the Kobe Bryant rape case, the Los Angeles Police
Department’s ’Rampart scandal’, the Abu Ghraib
photographs, and a series of racist incidents at the
University of California.
Chapters in the book discuss
the various aspects of American cultural life such as
religion, gender and sexuality, and regionalism.
Updates and revisions include:
•discussion of Barack Obama’s rise to power and the
end of the ’Bush Years’
•consideration of ’Hemispheric American Studies’ and
the increasing debates about globalisation and the role
of the USA
•up-to-date case-studies, such as The Wire and Nurse
Jackie
April 2011: 240pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88345-0: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88383-2: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-84321-5
•updated further-reading lists
•more on suburbia, the Mexican-border crossing, the
Twilight phenomena etc.
•an accompanying Companion Website.
American Cultural Studies is a core text and an accessible
introduction to the interdisciplinary study of American
culture.
Race and Ethnicity
Hb: 978-0-415-59870-5: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-59871-2: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-80199-4
Edited by Stephen M. Caliendo, North Central
College, USA and Charlton D. McIlwain, New York
University, USA
A fascinating collection of
introductory essays covering the
major topics and issues in the
field. It features an international
range of case study analyses
and an A to Z of key names and
concepts.
Edited by Fiona Candlin, Birkbeck, University of
London, UK and Raiford Guins, State University of
New York, USA
2009: 576pp
Hb: 978-0-415-45229-8: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-45230-4: £23.99
This third edition of American
Cultural Studies has been
updated throughout to take
into account the
developments of the last six
years, providing an
introduction to the central
themes in modern American
culture and explores how
these themes can be
interpreted.
This book will prove to be important not only for courses
on race and media, but also for any reader interested in
issues of the media’s role in social justice.
The Object Reader
Series: In Sight: Visual Culture
2010: 272pp
Hb: 978-0-415-77706-3: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-77707-0: £18.99
2nd Edition
An Introduction to Theories of
Popular Culture
Dominic Strinati
An Introduction to Theories of Popular Culture is widely
recognized as an immensely useful textbook for students
taking courses in the major theories of popular culture.
Strinati provides a critical assessment of the ways in
which these theories have tried to understand and
evaluate popular culture in modern societies.
Hb: 978-0-415-23499-3: £65.00
Pb: 978-0-415-23500-6: £19.99
81
c u lt u ral s tudies
82
New
The Fashion History Reader
Ordinary Lives
3rd Edition
Global Perspectives
Studies in the Everyday
Postmodernism
Edited by Giorgio Riello, University of Warwick, UK
and Peter McNeil, University of Technology, Sydney,
Australia
Ben Highmore, University of Sussex, UK
Edited by Stuart Sim, University of Sunderland, UK
’An extremely useful compilation ... This is a work
crammed with interesting fact and speculation and
with a most assiduous cross-referencing of key
terms.’ – Times Educational Supplement
This fully revised third edition of
Postmodernism provides the
ideal introduction to
postmodernist thought.
Featuring contributions from a
cast of international scholars,
the Companion contains
nineteen detailed essays on
major themes and topics along
with an A to Z of key terms and
concepts. As well as revised
essays on philosophy, politics,
literature, and more, the first section now contains
brand new essays on critical theory, business, gender
and the performing arts. The concepts section, too, has
been enhanced with new topics ranging from
hypermedia to global warming. Students interested in
any aspect of postmodernism will continue to find this
an indispensable resource.
June 2011: 352pp
Hb: 978-0-415-58330-5: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-58332-9: £18.99
eBook: 978-0-203-81320-1
’Now, the key contributions
from nearly every expert in
the field are assembled in
one fascinating book. This
kaleidoscopic and
informative volume ranges
impressively across
conventional boundaries of
chronology, geography, and
discipline.’ – Glenn Adamson,
Victoria and Albert Museum,
London, UK
The Fashion History Reader is an innovative work that
provides a broad introduction to the complex literature in
the fields of fashion studies, and dress and fashion history.
Twenty-three chapters and over forty shorter ’Snapshot’
texts cover a wide range of topics and approaches within
the history of fashion, ranging from object-based studies to
theory-driven analyses. The book is divided into six parts,
surveying some of the key themes in the history of fashion.
A comprehensive introduction by the editors
contextualises debates for students, synthesising past
history and bringing them up-to-date through a
discussion of globalisation. Each section also includes a
short, accessible introduction by the editors, placing
each chapter within the wider, thematic treatment of
fashion and its history, and an annotated guide to
further reading encourages students to enhance their
learning independently.
2010: 592pp
Hb: 978-0-415-49323-9: £80.00
Pb: 978-0-415-49324-6: £26.99
New
Genealogy and Ontology of
the Western Image and its
Digital Future
Fashion In Focus
John Lechte
Series: Routledge Advances in Art and Visual Studies
What are the key moments in the genealogy of the
Western image which might illuminate the present
status of the image? And what exactly is the situation to
which we have arrived as far as the image is concerned?
These are the questions guiding the reflections in this
book. The book examines images from the Greek to the
Byzantine, from the Renaissance and the Enlightenment
to Industrial Revolution. Part II examines key aspects of
the image today, such as the digital and the cinema
image, as well as the work of philosophers of the image,
including: Roland Barthes, Walter Benjamin, Gilles
Deleuze, Jean-Paul Sartre and Bernard Stiegler.
Hb: 978-0-415-88715-1: £80.00
Concepts, Practices and Politics
Tim Edwards, University of Leicester, UK
The study of fashion has
exploded in recent decades, yet
what this all means or quite
where it might take us, is not
clear. This new book helps to
bring fashion into focus, with a
comprehensive guide to the key
theories, perspectives and
developments in the field.
Tim Edwards includes coverage
of all the major theories of
fashion, including recent
scholarship, alongside
subcultural analysis and an in-depth look at production.
Ordinary Lives links the concrete study of routine existence
to theoretical reflection on everyday life. The book
discusses philosophers such as Jacques Rancière, William
James and David Hume and combines them with
autobiographical testimonies, historical research and the
analysis of popular culture to investigate the minutiae of
day-to-day life. Highmore argues that aesthetic experience
is embedded in the mundane sensory world of everyday
life. He asks the reader to reconsider the negative
associations of habit and routine, focusing specifically on
the intrinsic ambiguity of habit (habit, we find out, is both
rigid and adaptive). Rather than ask ’what does everyday
life mean?’ this book asks ’what does everyday life feel
like and how do our sensual, emotional and temporal
experiences interconnect and intersect?’
Ordinary Lives is an accessible, animated and engaging
book that is ideally suited to both students and
researchers working in cultural studies, media and
communication and sociology.
2010: 208pp
Hb: 978-0-415-46186-3: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-46187-0: £20.99
eBook: 978-0-203-84237-9
Elsewhere, Within Here
Immigration, Refugeeism and the Boundary
Event
Trinh T. Minh-ha, University of California, USA
Elsewhere, Within Here is an engaging look at travel
across national borders – as a foreigner, a tourist, an
immigrant, a refugee, in a pre- and post-9/11 world.
Who is welcome where? What does it mean to feel out
of place in the country you call home? When does the
stranger appear in these times of dark metamorphoses?
These are some of the issues addressed by the author as
she examines the cultural meaning and complexities of
travel, immigration, home and exile. The boundary, seen
both as a material and immaterial event, is where
endings pass into beginnings. Building upon themes
present in her earlier work on hybridity and displacement
in the median passage, and illuminating the ways in
which ’every voyage can be said to involve a re-sitting of
boundaries,’ Trinh T. Minh-ha leads her readers through
an investigation of what it means to be an insider and
an outsider in this ’epoch of global fear.’
2010: 152pp
Hb: 978-0-415-88021-3: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-88022-0: £18.99
eBook: 978-0-203-84765-7
Fashion in Focus is the ideal companion for students in the
arts and social sciences, especially those studying issues
such as fashion, gender, sexuality and consumer culture.
Emotions: A Cultural Studies
Reader
2010: 192pp
Hb: 978-0-415-44793-5: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-44794-2: £21.99
eBook: 978-0-203-83688-0
Edited by Jennifer Harding, London Metropolitan
University, UK and E. Deidre Pribram, Molloy
College, USA
2009: 432pp
Hb: 978-0-415-46929-6: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-46930-2: £24.99
Companion Website
About Raymond Williams
Edited by Monika Seidl, University of Vienna,
Austria, Roman Horak, University of Applied Arts
Vienna, Austria and Lawrence Grossberg,
University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, USA
Semiotics
Militainment, Inc.
Edited by Paul Cobley, London Metropolitan
University, UK
Roger Stahl, University of Georgia, USA
War, Media, and Popular Culture
2009: 224pp
Hb: 978-0-415-99977-9: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-99978-6: £19.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87960-3
2009: 208pp
Hb: 978-0-415-54579-2: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-54580-8: £24.99
eBook: 978-0-203-86515-6
2009: 424pp
Hb: 978-0-415-44072-1: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-44073-8: £19.99
Exit Capitalism
Social Theory
Practical Wisdom
Edited by Anthony Elliott, Flinders University, Australia
2009: 208pp
Hb: 978-0-415-96819-5: £85.00
Pb: 978-0-415-96820-1: £17.99
eBook: 978-0-203-86919-2
Literary Culture, Theory and Post-Secular
Modernity
Simon During, John Hopkins University, USA
2009: 208pp
Hb: 978-0-415-24654-5: £75.00
Pb: 978-0-415-24655-2: £20.99
eBook: 978-0-203-87264-2
2009: 352pp
Hb: 978-0-415-47015-5: £70.00
Pb: 978-0-415-47016-2: £18.99
Teaching Critical Thinking
bell hooks, Berea College, USA
Alternatively, if you are only interested in recieving information about books,
please send an email to [email protected].
83
s p e c ial issues as book s
84
Special Issues as Books at
Routledge
New
New
Creativity and Cultural Policy
Cultural Studies and Finance
Capitalism
Edited by Chris Bilton, Warwick University, UK
Routledge publishes journal special issues
in book format as part of our Special
Issues as Books (SPIB) programme. This is
a publishing initiative that incorporates
journals from multiple disciplines across
the humanities and social sciences. The
SPIB programme enables us to disseminate
our journal scholarship and brand to
libraries and wholesalers throughout the
world.
If you have a current or forthcoming special issue which
you believe we should publish in book format, please
email Emily Ross, Associate Editor, at
[email protected] for SPIB guidelines and a
proposal form, or to discuss the programme in more
detail.
This special issue of the International Journal of Cultural
Policy sets out to address two related questions. Firstly,
how can cultural policy address the complexities of
creative processes and people? Secondly, to what extent
can cultural policy be seen as a ’creative’ process and
how might such an approach to cultural policy play out
in practice?
This book was originally published as a special issue of
International Journal of Cultural Policy.
Hb: 978-0-415-69760-6: £80.00
New
Cultural Policy Review of
Books
Edited by Oliver Bennett, Warwick University, UK
New
After Taste: Cultural Value and
the Moving Image
Edited by Julia Vassilieva and Constantine
Verevis, both at Monash University, Australia
This collection of essays, written by international film
and television scholars, provides detailed critical analysis
of the issues surrounding judgements of cultural value
and taste, feeling and affect, cultural morals and politics,
research methodologies and teaching strategies in the
new landscape of ’after taste’ media.
Continuum: Journal of Media and Cultural Studies.
Hb: 978-0-415-67926-8: £80.00
Cultural Policy Review of Books throws new light on the
intellectual underpinning of cultural policy studies. With
short essays on Bourdieu, de Certeau, Foucault, Gramsci,
Habermas, and Williams, as well as on many lesser
known writers, leading academics and researchers from
around the world tell us about the thinkers that have
influenced them most and why we should continue to
read them.
Hb: 978-0-415-69547-3: £80.00
New
Policy and the Popular
Edited by David Looseley, University of Leeds, UK
New
Chinese Entertainment
Edited by Kwok-Bun Chan, Hong Kong Baptist
University, Hong Kong
Richly illustrated with original photographs, this book
examines Chinese entertainment ranging from film and
opera to rock and tourism, on the mainland and outside
it, in the Chinese diaspora. It argues that entertainment,
when tied up with history, heritage and ethnicity, is a
paradox, in that it is a site of both enjoyment and
struggle, both pleasure and suffering. Chinese
entertainment gratifies the senses as much as it
confronts the mind and the soul.
The book compares ways in which we think and theorise
the relationship between policy and the popular, in a rich
variety of senses and settings. These settings certainly
include government policies for the arts, but not
exclusively; some are geographic, others involve specific
modes of cultural action: live popular music, education,
and canonisation in the Catholic Church.
Hb: 978-0-415-69807-8: £80.00
The Economic Crisis and After
Edited by Mark Hayward, American University of
Paris, France
Rather than offering a strictly economic approach to the
causes of the financial collapse, this book argues that the
crisis was as much cultural as economic, and that any way
forward must understand the complex relationship
between media, culture and the economy. It was originally
published as a special issue of Cultural Studies.
Hb: 978-0-415-68681-5: £80.00
New
Cultural Studies of
Transnationalism
Edited by Handel Kashope Wright, University of
British Columbia, Canada and Meaghan Morris,
Lingnan University, Hong Kong
This book asks what ’transnationalism’ might mean for
Cultural Studies as an intellectual project shaped in vastly
differing circumstances across the world. It was originally
published as a special issue of the journal Cultural Studies.
Hb: 978-0-415-68582-5: £80.00
New
Entertainment Industries
Entertainment as a Cultural System
Edited by Alan McKee, Christy Collis and
Ben Hamley, all at Queensland University of
Technology, Australia
Entertainment Industries is the first book to map
entertainment as a cultural system. Including work from
world-renowned analysts such as Henry Jenkins and
Jonathan Gray, this innovative collection explains what
entertainment is and how it works.
Continuum: Journal of Media and Cultural Studies.
July 2011: 176pp
Hb: 978-0-415-68104-9: £80.00
Visual Anthropology.
Hb: 978-0-415-69556-5: £80.00
Companion Website
sp e c i al i s s ue s as bo o k s
New in 2012
New in 2012
New in 2012
News Parody and Political
Satire Across the Globe
Intermedia in South Asia
Self-Mediation
The Fourth Screen
New Media, Citizenship and Civil Selves
Edited by Geoffrey Baym, University of North
Carolina-Greensboro, USA and Jeffrey P. Jones, Old
Dominion University, USA
Edited by Rajinder Dudrah, University of
Manchester, UK, Sangita Gopal, University of
Oregon, USA, Amit Rai, University of London, UK
and Anustup Basu, University of Illinois, USA
Edited by Lilie Chouliaraki, London School of
Economics, UK
This book offers an insight into the central and perhaps
controversial role that news parody has come to play in
the world. It was originally published as a special issue of
Popular Communication.
August 2012: 256pp
Hb: 978-0-415-69293-9: £80.00
New in 2012
Hybrid Hong Kong
Edited by Kwok-bun Chan, Hong Kong Baptist
Based on ethnography, fieldwork and participant
observation, Hybrid Hong Kong intends to display and
explain hybridity as it is performed in the public as well
as private spheres of city life.
Visual Anthropology.
Hb: 978-0-415-69554-1: £80.00
New in 2012
Hybridity
Edited by Kwok-Bun Chan, Hong Kong Baptist
This book interrogates everyday life events in various
interpersonal and organizational contexts to answer an
old question: what happens when (carriers of) cultures
meet, or to use a worn-out phrase, when East meets
West? The book argues that other than clash of
civilizations, other possibilities include learning,
integrating, synthesizing, creating, innovating, and
transforming. In one word: hybridity. Contexts analyzed
in this book include business organizations, travels and
personal philosophies.
This book investigates the emergence of new media
ecologies in and from South Asia and the profound
changes that they are having on subjects, social worlds
and older forms of media such as films and TV. It uses a
transnational framework to study how people try to
make sense of new media as well as how they
participate in and transform it.
South Asian Popular Culture.
January 2012: 160pp
Hb: 978-0-415-69818-4: £80.00
New
Local Foods Meet Global
Foodways
Tasting History
Edited by Benjamin Lawrance, Rochester Institute
of Technology, USA and Carolyn de la Pena,
Local Foods Meet Global Foodways: Tasting History
explores critical issues in food and drink production and
consumption. By deploying a world-historical lens to
explore the ways in which food and people interact
when one or the other is in motion, the authors uncover
the foods that move – travelling between points of
origin and points of consumption on their way to
becoming “global” cuisines; and people who move –
creating new meanings for “local” products, sometimes
but not always in anticipation of external markets.
Drawing on a view of self-mediation as a pluralistic
practice that potentially enhances our democratic public
culture but which is closely linked to the monopolistic
interests of the market, this volume critically explores the
dynamics of mediated self-representation as an
essentially ambivalent cultural phenomenon.
Critical Discourse Studies.
January 2012: 160pp
Hb: 978-0-415-67212-2: £80.00
New
South Asian Cinemas
Widening the Lens
Edited by Sara Dickey, Bowdoin College, USA and
Rajinder Dudrah, University of Manchester, UK
This original collection of new work explores the breadth
and depth of South Asia’s many vibrant cinemas. Going
well beyond Bollywood, it explores music, dance,
audiences, filmmakers, and film industries in Nepali, Sri
Lankan, Pakistani Panjabi, Bhojpuri, Bengali, Kannada,
and early Tamil cinemas, along with variations on
Bollywood genres.
South Asian Popular Culture.
Hb: 978-0-415-69845-0: £80.00
Food and Foodways.
New in 2012
Hb: 978-0-415-69775-0: £80.00
A Comparative Approach
Transnational Television History
Edited by Andreas Fickers, Maastricht University,
the Netherlands and Catherine Johnson, University
of Nottingham, UK
World Futures: Journal of General Evolution.
New
Hb: 978-0-415-69798-9: £80.00
Who Will Watch the Watchdog in the
Twitter Age?
Transnational Television History offers a new approach to
television as a medium of transnational circulation of
formats, programmes and ideas. It questions common
views about television as an agent of national identity
formation and underlines the importance of comparative
perspectives for the historical understanding of television
in modern society.
Also available:
Organizations and Popular
Culture: Information,
Representation and
Transformation
See page 80
Westerns: The Essential Journal
of Popular Film and Television
See page 74
Media Accountability
Edited by William Babcock, Southern Illinois
University, USA
To help maintain and improve the mass media’s
credibility, media practitioners and the public traditionally
have employed a variety of accountability tools from
ethics codes and critics to news councils and journalism
reviews. Media Accountability asks a group of
international media ethics experts if these tools are still
relevant for the twenty-first century, and if not, whether
the tools themselves can be re-tooled.
the Journal of Mass Media Ethics.
Hb: 978-0-415-69839-9: £80.00
Media History.
Hb: 978-0-415-69860-3: £80.00
85
paperbacks dir e ct
86
Paperbacks Direct
A new way to expand your personal library!
A growing selection of our Communication and Media hardback monographs are now available, for individual purchase, in
paperback format. These books are only available directly from Routledge and can be ordered in one of three easy ways:
Online: www.routledgepaperbacksdirect.com • Telephone Hotline: +44 (0)1235 400524 • Post: Use catalogue order form
Title
Author or Editor
ISBN
Price
Deconstruction After 9/11
Martin McQuillan, University of Leeds, UK
978-0-415-80792-0
£23.99
The Local Scenes and Global Culture of
Psytrance
Graham St. John
978-0-415-89816-4
£23.50
Framing Discourse on the Environment: A
Critical Discourse Approach
Richard Alexander, Vienna University of Economics and
Business Administration, Austria
978-0-415-88835-6
£23.50
Lesbian Discourses: Images of a
Community
Veronika Koller, Lancaster University, UK
978-0-415-88389-4
£25.00
Nation and Identity in the New German
Cinema: Homeless at Home
Inga Scharf, German National Academic Foundation,
Germany
978-0-415-87844-9
£24.95
The Contemporary Comic Book Superhero
Edited by Angela Ndalianis, University of Melbourne,
Australia
978-0-415-87841-8
£24.95
Post-War Italian Cinema
Daniela Treveri Gennari, Oxford Brookes University, UK
978-0-415-88778-6
£23.50
Internationalizing Internet Studies: Beyond
Anglophone Paradigms
Edited by Gerard Goggin, University of Sydney, Australia
and Mark McLelland, University of Wollongong, Australia
978-0-415-87842-5
£24.95
Rave Culture and Religion
Edited by Graham St John
978-0-415-55250-9
£24.95
Autism and Representation
Mark Osteen, Loyola College, USA
978-0-415-80627-5
£26.99
The Places and Spaces of Fashion,
1800-2007
Edited by John Potvin, University of Guelph, Canada
978-0-415-87382-6
£26.99
American Icons: The Genesis of a National
Visual Language
Benedikt Feldges
978-0-415-87550-9
£24.95
The Linguistics of Laughter: A CorpusAssisted Study of Laughter-Talk
Alan Partington, University of Bologna, Italy
978-0-415-54407-8
£24.95
Film and Television After DVD
Edited by James Bennett, London Metropolitan University,
UK and Tom Brown, University of Reading, UK
978-0-415-87834-0
£24.95
Communicating in the Third Space
Edited by Karin Ikas, Frankfurt University, Germany and
Gerhard Wagner, Johann Wolfgang Goethe-University,
Germany
978-0-415-87840-1
£24.95
Mobile Technologies: From
Telecommunications to Media
Edited by Gerard Goggin, University of Sydney, Australia
and Larissa Hjorth, RMIT University, Australia
978-0-415-87843-2
£24.95
Media Consumption and Everyday Life in
Asia
Edited by Youna Kim, American University of Paris, France
978-0-415-87838-8
£24.95
The Practice of Public Art
Edited by Cameron Cartiere, Birkbeck, University of
London, UK and Shelly Willis, University of Minnesota, USA
978-0-415-87839-5
£24.95
Latsploitation, Exploitation Cinemas, and
Latin America
Edited by Victoria Ruétalo, University of Alberta, Canada
and Dolores Tierney, University of Sussex, UK
978-0-415-89854-6
£28.99
Queer Temporalities in Gay Male
Representation: Tragedy, Normativity, and
Futurity
Dustin Bradley Goltz, DePaul University, USA
978-0-415-89815-7
£28.99
Audience Studies: A Japanese Perspective
Toshie Takahashi, Rikkyo University, Japan
978-0-415-89658-0
£28.99
Women of the Humiliati: A Moral
Response to Medieval Civic Life
Sally Brasher
978-0-415-80346-5
£26.99
Cities, Citizens, and Technologies: Urban
Life and Postmodernity
Paula Geyh, Yeshiva University, USA
978-0-415-80794-4
£23.99
Companion Website
INDE x
a
Aalberg, Toril . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Abate, Michelle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Abel, Richard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Abousnnouga, Gill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
About Raymond Williams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Activism and Rhetoric. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Adams, Sally. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Adaptation Industry, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Advertising. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Advertising - Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Advertising and Consumer Culture Reader,
The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Advertising and Public Relations Law. . . . . . . 18
Advertising Handbook, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Advertising Theory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Advertising, the Media and Globalisation . . . 17
Aesthetic Practices and Politics in Media, Music,
and Art. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Aesthetics of Antifascist Film, The. . . . . . . . . 67
Afifi, Tamara. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Afifi, Walid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
African American Women in the News. . . . . 52
After Taste: Cultural Value and the Moving
Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
After the Holocaust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
After the Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Aitken, Ian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Albarran, Alan B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Albrechtslund, Anders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Allan, Stuart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 53
Allen, Mike. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Allen, Robert C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Allington, Daniel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
American Cultural Studies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
American History Goes to the Movies. . . . . . 69
American Independent Cinema. . . . . . . . . . . 69
American Journalism History Reader, The . . . 54
Analysing the Screenplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Anderson, James A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Animation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Ansell, Amy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Applied Public Relations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Arguments, Aggression, and Conflict . . . . . . . 4
Arnheim for Film and Media Studies. . . . . . . 70
Arnold, Michael . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Art Platforms and Cultural Production on the
Internet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Artificial Culture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Asian Cinematic Experience, The. . . . . . . . . . 72
Atakav, Eylem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Athique, Adrian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Audience Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Audiobooks, Literature, and Sound Studies. . . . 28
Austin, Stephen F.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Avtgis, Theodore. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Aw, Annette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
b
Ba, Saer Maty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Babcock, William . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 85
Banks, Miranda J.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Baltruschat, Doris. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Bardhan, Nilanjana. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Barker, Jennifer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Basu, Anustup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Bateman, John. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Baym, Geoffrey. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Beaman, Jim. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 57
Beck, Christina S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Beckett, Gulbahar H.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Becoming a Public Relations Writer. . . . . . . . 15
Bell, Erin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Bell, Melanie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Bengali Cinema. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Bennett, James. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Bennett, Peter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Bennett, Oliver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Benson, Christopher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 61
Berry, Chris. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Berry, William E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Best Before. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Beyond Prime Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Bignell, Jonathan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Billings, Andrew C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Biltereyst, Daniel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Bilton, Chris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Binfield, Marnie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Bioethics, Public Moral Argument, and Social
Responsibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Biographical Encyclopedia of American Radio,
The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Bivins, Tom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Black, Jay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Blaine, Mark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Bloore, Peter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Boersma, Kees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Boeyink, David E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Bolin, Göran. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Bolls, Paul. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Bollywood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Bollywood Travels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Bonito, Joseph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Book Production. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Book Publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Borden, Sandra L.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Bostrom, Robert N.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Bould, Mark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 73
Boyle, Karen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Bracken, Cheryl Campanella. . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Bradshaw, Paul. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Branding Post-Communist Nations . . . . . . . . 29
Branding Television. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Branigan, Edward. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Branston, Gill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Brashers, Dale E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Brennen, Bonnie S.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 54
Brewer, Stewart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
British Comedy Cinema. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
British Cultural Identities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Bromley, Michael. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Brown, Rockell A.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Brown, Simon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Brown, Stephen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Bruner, Michael. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Bryant, Jennings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Buchan, Suzanne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Buckland, Warren. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 70
Bucy, Erik P.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Bull, Andy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Bullock, Adrian. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Burgess, Jean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Burgoon, Michael. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Burgoyne, Robert. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Burleson, Brant R.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Burrell, Nancy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
burrough, xtine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Business of Sports, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Butler, Andrew M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Butler, Jeremy G.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 78
Buzzanell, Patrice M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
c
Calcutt, Andrew. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Caldwell, John T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Caliendo, Stephen M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Campbell, Christopher P.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Campbell, Neil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Canary, Daniel J.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Canary, Heather E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Candlin, Fiona. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Canjels, Rudmer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Carbaugh, Donal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Carden, Ann R.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Carey, James W.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Carlson, Matt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Carroll, Brian. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Carroll, Craig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Cases in Public Relations Management. . . . . 16
Casey Benyahia, Sarah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Casting Handbook, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Catliff, Suzy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Celebrity Culture and the American Dream . . . 35
Celebrity Society. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Cesarani, David. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Chan, Dean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Chan, Kwok-Bun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 85
Changing Faces of Journalism, The. . . . . . . . 24
Changing Journalism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Changing the News . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Chapman, Jane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Cheney, George. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Cherry, Brigid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Childs, Peter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Chin, Yik-Chan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
China’s Assimilationist Language Policy. . . . . 31
Chinese Cinema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Chinese Entertainment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Chopra, Rohit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Chow-White, Peter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Chouliaraki, Lilie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Christensen, Christian. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Christensen, Miyase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Chu, Rodney Wai-chi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Cinema as Weather. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Cinema Audiences and Modernity. . . . . . . . . 64
Cinema, Memory, Modernity. . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Cinematic Emotion in Horror Films
and Thrillers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Cissna, Kenneth N.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Cities, Citizens, and Technologies . . . . . . . . . 29
Clarke, Judith. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Classical Hollywood Reader, The. . . . . . . . . . 69
Classroom Communication and Diversity. . . . 10
Clayton, Alex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Clayton, Martin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Cobley, Paul. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Cody, Michael. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Cognitive Poetics and Cultural Memory. . . . . 29
Cognitive Psychology of Mass Communication,
A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Cohen, Yoel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Coleman, Robin R Means. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Coleman, William. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Collins, Erik L.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Collins, Kent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Collis, Christy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Color and the Moving Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Communicating and Organizing in Context. . . . 7
Communicating in English. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Communicating Science. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Communicating Social Change. . . . . . . . . . . 35
Communicating to Manage Health
and Illness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Communication and Organizational
Knowledge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Communication as Culture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Communication Matters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Communication Research Measures II. . . . . . 19
Communication, Cultural and Media Studies:
The Key Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Communication, Public Discourse, and Road
Safety Campaigns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Comparative Media Law and Ethics. . . . . . . . 39
Conboy, Martin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Concise Encyclopedia of American Radio,
The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Concise Routledge Encyclopedia of the
Documentary Film, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Conrad, Mark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Convergence Media History . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Contemporary Chinese Print Media. . . . . . . . 31
Contemporary Hollywood Reader, The . . . . . 69
Controversies in Media Ethics. . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Cooper, Margaret. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Cope, Jon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Corporate Reputation and the News Media. . . .16
Corrigan, Timothy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Couldry, Nick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Craft, Stephanie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Craig, Robert T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Crawford, Garry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 46
Creating Second Lives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Creativity and Cultural Policy. . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Crime. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Crime, Policy and the Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Crisis Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Crisis Communications Text and Student
Workbook, Academic Package. . . . . . . . . . 13
Crisis Manager, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Critical Approaches to Comics. . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Critical Political Economy of the Media. . . . . 27
Croll, Paul. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Crook, Tim. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 48
Crystal, David. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Cubitt, Sean. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Cultural Policy Review of Books. . . . . . . . . . . 84
Cultural Studies and Finance Capitalism . . . . 84
Cultural Studies of Transnationalism . . . . . . . 84
Cultural Study of Music, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Cultural Technologies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Culture and Public Relations. . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Cunningham, Una . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Cupach, William R.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Curran, James. . . . . . . . . 27, 34, 35, 37, 48, 53
Cvetkovich, Ann. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
d
D’Angelo, Paul. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Dark Side of Close Relationships II, The. . . . . . 4
Davis, Aeron. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Davis, Charles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Davis, Colin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Davis, Rocío G.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
de la Pena, Carolyn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
De Souza E Silva, Adriana. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Deacy, Christopher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Deaville, James. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Deetz, Stanley A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Delwiche, Aaron. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Demetrious, Kristin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Demo, Anne Teresa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Designing for Newspapers and Magazines . . . . 57
Destructive Organizational Communication. . . . 7
De-Westernizing Communication Research . . . . 9
De-Westernizing Film Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Dickey, Sara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Digital Development in Korea. . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Digital Drama. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Digital Labor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Digital Reporter’s Notebook, The. . . . . . . . . . 56
Disability and New Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Discourse Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Discourse and Democracy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Distinctive Qualities in Communication
Research . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Distributing Silent Film Serials. . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Dobrin, Sidney I.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Documentary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Documentary Film. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Documentary Handbook, The. . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Documentary Testimonies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Doing Ethics in Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Doing News Framing Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Donald, Stephanie Hemelryk. . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Doorley, John. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Dorsher, Michael. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Doveling, Katrin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Dovey, Jon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
87
i n d ex
88
Downing, Lisa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Downs, Simon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Duchovnay, Gerald. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Dudrah, Rajinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 85
Duffy, Brooke Erin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Duncan, Randy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
During, Simon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Durovicová, Nataša. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Dutta, Mohan J.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Dyer, Richard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Dynamics and Performativity of
Imagination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Dynamics of Persuasion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
e
EcoCinema Reader, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Ecology, Writing Theory, and New Media . . . 10
Edgerton, Gary R.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Edward Said. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Edwards, Lee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Edwards, Tim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Egenfeldt-Nielsen, Simon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
eHealth Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Ellis, John. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Ellis, Katie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Elliott, Anthony. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Elsaesser, Thomas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 67
Elsewhere, Within Here. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Emotions, Genre, Justice in Film
and Television. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Emotions: A Cultural Studies Reader. . . . . . . 82
Enchanted Screen, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Encyclopedia of American Journalism. . . . . . 54
Encyclopedia of Early Cinema. . . . . . . . . . . . 66
English for Journalists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Ensslin, Astrid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Enteen, Jillana B.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Entering the Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Entertainment and Society . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Entertainment Industries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Epic Film in World Culture, The. . . . . . . . . . . 70
Esser, Frank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Ethics for Journalists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Evans, Elizabeth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Evans, Mary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Everyday Pornography. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Exit Capitalism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Explorations in Communication and History . . . 24
Exploring Health Communication . . . . . . . . . . 5
Exploring Professional Communication. . . . . 21
f
Fairclough, Norman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Family Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Fantasy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Farman, Jason. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Farrelly, Michael . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Farrington, Neil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Fashion History Reader, The . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Fashion In Focus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Fay, Jennifer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Fearn-Banks, Kathleen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Feather, John . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Feature Writing for Journalists. . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Feminism at the Movies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Feminist Film Studies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Fenton, Natalie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Fernback, Jan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Fields, Jill. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Fickers, Andreas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Fifty Contemporary Film Directors. . . . . . . . . 66
Fifty Key American Films. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Fifty Key Thinkers on Globalization. . . . . . . . 30
Fight Club. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Fighting the Future War . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Film and Ethics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Film and Literature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Film in Contemporary Southeast Asia . . . . . . 72
Film Noir. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Film Theory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Film Theory and Contemporary Hollywood
Movies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Film Theory: Rational Reconstructions. . . . . . 64
Film Theory Reader: Debates
and Arguments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Financial Journalism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Finkelstein, David . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Finney, Angus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Fischer-Hornung, Dorothea. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Fiske, John . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Fleming, Carole. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Flora, Jeanne. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Flow TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Forensic Science in Contemporary American
Popular Culture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Forman, Murray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Fortunati, Leopoldina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 37
Foundations of Critical Media and Information
Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Franklin, Bob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Fredriksson, Magnus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Freedman, Des. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Freedom of Information Reform in China . . . 31
French, Ylva . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Frey, Lawrence R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Frith, Jordan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Frost, Chris. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 58
Frye, Joshua . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Fuchs, Christian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 39
Funnell, Lisa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Furby, Jacqueline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Furstenau, Marc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
g
Gade, Peter J.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Gajjala, Radhika . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Gaming Cultures and Place in Asia-Pacific. . . 41
Ganti, Tejaswini. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Garcia, Helio Fred. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Garrison, Bruce. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Gatekeeping Theory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Gates, Philippa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Gayle, Barbara Mae . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Gee, James Paul. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 43
Geesin, Beverly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Gelley, Ora. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Gender and Media Reader, The. . . . . . . . . . . 25
Gender and Sexuality in Online Game
Cultures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Gender: The Key Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Genealogy and Ontology of the Western Image
and its Digital Future. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Geyh, Paula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Giaccardi, Elisa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Giddings, Seth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Gilbert, Harriett. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Giles, Howard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Gillan, Jennifer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Global Journalist in the 21st Century, The. . . 52
Global Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Global Media Ecologies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Global Media, Culture, and Identity. . . . . . . . 30
Global Mobile Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Global Perspectives on Tarzan. . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Global Public Relations Handbook, Revised and
Expanded Edition, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Global Television Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
God, Jews and the Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Goddard, Angela . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Godwired. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Goggin, Gerard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 41
Goggin, Peter N.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Golan, Guy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Goldsmith, Daena. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Goldstein, Tom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Goltz, Dustin Bradley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Gomery, Douglas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Gomez, James . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Google and the Culture of Search. . . . . . . . . 34
Gooptu, Sharmistha. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Gopal, Sangita . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Gordon, A. David. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Goriunova, Olga. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Gosling, Victoria K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Graham, Elizabeth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Grant, Iain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Granville, Jenny. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Graphic Communication Handbook, The. . . . 10
Gray, Ann. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Gripsrud, Jostein. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Gronas, Mikhail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Gronnvoll, Marita. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Grossberg, Lawrence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Growing Up with Two Languages. . . . . . . . . 21
Grunig, James E.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Gudykunst, William B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Guins, Raiford. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Guttman, Nurit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Guynn, William. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
h
Haenni, Sabine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Hafner, Christoph A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Hagener, Malte. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Hake, Sabine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Hamley, Ben. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Hammond, Philip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Han, Sam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Handa, Carolyn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Handbook of Communication Ethics, The. . . 19
Handbook of Communication History. . . . . . 19
Handbook of Comparative Communication
Research. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Handbook of Intergroup Communication,
The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Handbook of Journalism Studies, The. . . . . . 51
Handbook of Media and Communication
Research, A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Handbook of Risk and Crisis
Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Handbook of Spanish Language Media,
The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Handford, Michael . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Hanich, Julian. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Hanitzsch, Thomas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 51
Harding, Jennifer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Hardt, Hanno. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Hardy, Jonathan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 27
Harrington, Nancy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Harris, Richard Jackson. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Hartley, John. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Hartmann, Tilo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Harvey, Kevin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Haslett, Beth Bonniwell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Havens, Timothy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Hawkin, Sarah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Hayes, Elisabeth R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Hayes, Mike . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Hayward, Mark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Health and Risk Communication. . . . . . . . . . . 6
Health Public Relations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Heath, Robert L.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17
Heinrich, Ansgard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Henderson, Jennifer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Hendricks, John Allen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Hepp, Andreas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Herbert, Trevor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Heritage and Social Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Hicks, Wynford. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Higbee, Will. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Higgins, Scott. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Highmore, Ben. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Hill, Annette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 78
Hill, Douglas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Hillis, Ken. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Hilmes, Michele . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Hines, Claire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
History on Television. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
HIV/AIDS, Health and the Media in China. . . 31
Hjorth, Larissa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 41, 42
Hodges, Caroline E. M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Holbert, R. Lance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Hollinger, Karen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Hollingshead, Andrea. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Hollywood Melodrama and the New Deal. . . . 68
Holmes, Tim. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Holtzhausen, Derina R.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Honald, Michelle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Hood, Johanna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
hooks, bell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Hoppenstand, Gary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Horak, Roman. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Horror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Horror Noire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
How Media Inform Democracy. . . . . . . . . . . 35
Howell, Amanda. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Hua, Zhu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Hunsinger, Jeremy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Huntemann, Nina B.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Hunter, I.Q.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Huppauf, Bernd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Hutchins, Brett. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Hybrid Hong Kong . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Hybridity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Hyde, Michael J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
i
ICA Communication Yearbooks. . . . . . . . . . . 20
Ietcu-Fairclough, Isabela. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Ihlen, Øyvind. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Immersed in Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Imre, Anikö. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
In The Space Of A Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Interaction and Influence in Small Group
Decision Making. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Intermedia in South Asia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
International Communication: A Reader. . . . 32
International Film Business, The. . . . . . . . . . . 66
International Journalism and Democracy. . . . 29
International Media Communication in a
Global Age. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
International News in the Digital Age . . . . . . 55
Internationalizing Media Studies. . . . . . . . . . 33
Internet and Surveillance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Internet Linguistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Interplay of Truth and Deception, The. . . . . . . 4
Interviewing for Journalists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Interviewing for Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Introduction to Book History. . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Introduction to Communication Studies . . . . 26
Introduction to Film Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Introduction to Political Communication, An. . . . 8
Introduction to Television Studies . . . . . . . . . 75
Introduction to Theories of Popular Culture,
An . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Iranian Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
j
Jackson, Cassandra. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Jackson, John. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
James, Martin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Japanese Horror Films and their American
Remakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Japan’s Local Newspapers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Jarrett, Kylie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Jenkins, Cheryl D.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Companion Website
index
Jensen, Klaus Bruhn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 25
Jesse Owens, the Press, and the 1936 Berlin
Olympic Games. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Jirik, John. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Johnson, Catherine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 85
Johnson, Thomas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Jones, Hugh. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Jones, Jean G.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Jones, Jeffrey P.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Jones, Rodney. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 21, 42
Journalism After September 11. . . . . . . . . . . 53
Journalism and Citizenship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Journalism and Free Speech . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Journalism as Practice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Journalism Education, Training and
Employment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Journalism Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Journalism Studies: The Basics. . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Journalists, Sources, and Credibility. . . . . . . . 55
Joystick Soldiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
k
Kackman, Michael . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Kahlor, LeeAnn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Kahn, Seth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Kaid, Lynda Lee. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Kalbfleisch, Pamela J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Kaneva, Nadia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Kaplan, Brett Ashley. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Kapur, Jyotsna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Kardux, Johanna C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Kashope Wright, Handel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Katz, Helen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Kean, Alasdair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Kearney, Mary Celeste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Keeble, Richard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 57, 58
Kelly, Kieran. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Kelly, William H.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Kendall, Alex. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Kent, Mike. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Key Issues in Journalism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Key Readings in Journalism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Key Readings in Media Today. . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Khiabany, Gholam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Kilbourn, Russell J.A.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Kilvington, Daniel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Kim, Jeong-Nam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Kim, Youna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
King, Cynthia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
King, Elliot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
King, Geoff. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
King, Nancy M.P.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
King, Rob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Kinsey, Marie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Kiousis, Spiro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Kittross, John Michael. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Kivisto, Peter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Klevan, Andrew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Knapp, Mark L.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Kohnen, Melanie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Kolodzy, Janet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Konijn, Elly A.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Korea’s Occupied Cinemas, 1893-1948. . . . . 68
Koteyko, Nelya. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Kraidy, Marwan M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Krome, Frederic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Krotz, Friedrich. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Kruckeberg, Dean. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Kumar, Shanti. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Kurian, Alka. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Kuypers, Jim A.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Kyle, Greeley. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
l
Lakey, Sandra. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Lamb, Larry F.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Lambe, Jennifer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Lancaster, Kurt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Landscapes of Holocaust Postmemory. . . . . . 29
Language and Intercultural Communication
Reader, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Language and Learning in the Digital Age. . . 43
Language and Style of Film Criticism, The. . . 64
Language and Technology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Lansley, Andrew. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Lapidus, Rina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Larson, James. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Latin American History Goes to the Movies. . . . 71
Latsploitation, Exploitation Cinemas, and Latin
America. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Laucella, Pamela C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Lawrance, Benjamin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Law, Patrick Pui-Lam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Leaver, Tama. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Lechte, John. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
LeDuff, Kim M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Lee, JongHwa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Lee-Wright, Peter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 54
Legitimating Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Lemish, Dafna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Lerbinger, Otto. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Letters, Postcards, Email. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Lever, Annabelle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Levine, Elana. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
LGBT Identity and Online New Media. . . . . . 44
Life of Voices, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Light, Ben. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Lilley, Simon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Lim, David C. L.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Lister, Martin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Local Foods Meet Global Foodways. . . . . . . . 85
Looseley, David. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Lotz, Amanda D.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Lowrey, Wilson. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Lustyik, Kati . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Lutgen-Sandvik, Pamela . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Lynch, Gordon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
m
MacCallum-Stewart, Esther. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Machin, David. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
MacRury, Iain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Madianou, Mirca . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Magazine Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Magazine Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Magazine Writing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Making Hard Choices in Journalism Ethics . . . . 54
Making Sense of Media and Politics . . . . . . . . 9
Making the University Matter. . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Maltby, Richard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Managing Interpersonal Conflict. . . . . . . . . . . 4
Marketing and Public Relations for Museums,
Galleries, Cultural and Heritage
Attractions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Markovitz, Jonathan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Marsden, Michael T.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Marshall, Ian. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Martin, Brendan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Matthews, Kelli. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
May, Steve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Maye, Carmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Mayor, Barbara. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Mayer, Vicki . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
McAllister, Matthew P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
McCleery, Alistair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
McDougall, Julian. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 25
McGlone, Matthew S.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
McIlwain, Charlton D.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
McKee, Alan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
McKee, Kathy Brittain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Mckim, Kristi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
McLaughlin, Margaret L.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
McNair, Brian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 53, 80
McNeil, Peter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
McPhee, Robert D.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Media Accountability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Media and Democracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Media and Entertainment Law . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Media and Religion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Media and the Creation of Babe Ruth. . . . . . 34
Media Choice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Media Convergence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Media Economy, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Media Effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Media Effects and Society. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Media Ethics Beyond Borders . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Media Events in a Global Age. . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Media Globalization and the Discovery Channel
Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Media Handbook, The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Media Law and Ethics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Media Literacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Media Perspectives for the 21st Century. . . . 27
Media Power and Democratization in Brazil . . . 32
Media Representations of Gender and Torture
Post-9/11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Media Student’s Book, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Media Studies Reader, The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Media Studies: The Basics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Media Today. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Mediating the Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
MediaWriting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Meek, Allen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Meers, Philippe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Mensing, Donica. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Merrill, John C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Meyers, Marian. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Middleton, Richard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Migration and New Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Migration, Diaspora and Information Technology
in Global Societies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Militainment, Inc.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Miller, Daniel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Miller, Toby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 78
Milne, Esther. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Minh-ha, Trinh T.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Misunderstanding the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Mitchell, Jolyon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Mitchell, Leslie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Mixed Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Mjös, Ole J.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Mobile Communication and Greater China. . 31
Mobile Interface Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Mobile Interfaces in Public Spaces. . . . . . . . . 42
Mobile Technology and Place . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Molloy, Claire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Monani, Salma. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Moore, Roy L.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 48
Morley, David. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Morris, Meaghan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Morrish, John. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Mortimer, Claire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Movie History: A Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Multimedia Journalism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Multimediated Rhetoric of the Internet,
The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Multimodal Film Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Multiplex in India, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Munshi, Debashish. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Murray, Michael D.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Murray, Simone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Muse, Eben. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Music in Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Music Industry Handbook, The. . . . . . . . . . . 48
Music, Social Media and Global Mobility. . . . 32
Muslim Women Online. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
n
Nakamura, Lisa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Neal, Mark Anthony. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Neale, Steve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Nelmes, Jill. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 66
Neo-Feminist Cinema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Neoliberalism and Global Cinema. . . . . . . . . 68
Net Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Network Journalism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Network Nations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Networked Self, A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
New Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
New Media and Human Rights in Southeast
Asia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
New Media and Technocultures Reader, The. 40
Newman, James. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Newman, Kathleen E.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Newman, Michael Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
News and Journalism in the UK. . . . . . . . . . . 53
News Parody and Political Satire Across the
Globe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Newspapers Handbook, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Nichols-Pethick, Jonathan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Nieland, Justus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Nimmo, Dan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Noar, Seth M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Nussbaum, Jon F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
o
Object Reader, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
O’Dell, Cary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Oh, Myung. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
O’Hair, H. Dan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Oliver, Mary Beth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
On Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Online Games, Social Narratives . . . . . . . . . . 41
Online Gaming in Context. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Online@AsiaPacific. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Orange, Richard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Ordinary Lives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Oren, Tasha. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Organizations and Popular Culture. . . . . . . . 80
Orlebar, Jeremy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Ouellette, Laurie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Owen, Lynette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
p
Packer, Jeremy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Pafort-Overduin, Clara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Page, Ruth E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Papacharissi, Zizi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 55
Papathanassopoulos, Stylianos . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Paranormal Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Parents and Children Communicating with
Society . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Parks, Lisa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Parody and Taste in Postwar American Television
Culture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Parrott, Roxanne. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Paul, Christopher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Paulus, Tom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Payne, Matthew Thomas. . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 78
Peck, Janice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Perlman, Allison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Perloff, Richard M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Perron, Bernard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Perse, Elizabeth M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 39
Persistence of Hollywood, The. . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Persuasion in Society. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Pertierra, Raul. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Petit, Michael. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Phillips, Angela. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Piela, Anna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Platte, Nathan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Poetry of Radio, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Policy and the Popular. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
89
i n d ex
90
Political Communication and Social Theory. . . 9
Political Communication in Asia . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Political Discourse Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Political Emotions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Political Public Relations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Politics of Loss and Trauma in Contemporary
Israeli Cinema, The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Politics of Reality Television, The . . . . . . . . . . 24
Ponzanesi, Sandra. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Poole, Marshall Scott . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Popular Culture: The Basics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Popular Media, Democracy and Development in
Africa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Popular Music and Masculinity in
Action Films. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Popular Music Journalism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Popular Television in Eastern Europe During
Socialism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Porno?Chic!. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Porrovecchio, Mark J.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Porter, Laraine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Porto, Mauro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Postcolonial Cinema Studies. . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Postiglione, Gerard A.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Postwar Renoir. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Potter, Robert F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Powell, Dana. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Powell, Robert G.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Powell, Helen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Power Without Responsibility. . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Practicing Convergence Journalism. . . . . . . . 56
Preiss, Raymond W.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Pribram, E. Deidre. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 82
Price, John . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Principles of American Journalism. . . . . . . . . 56
Producing for Web 2.0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Production Management for Television. . . . . 57
Production Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Professional Feature Writing. . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Programme Making for Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Promoting Peace, Inciting Violence. . . . . . . . 36
Psychophysiological Measurement and
Meaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Public Journalism 2.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Public Relations and Social Theory. . . . . . . . . 17
Public Relations As Activism . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Public Relations Handbook, The . . . . . . . . . . 15
Public Relations in Global Cultural Contexts. . . . 16
Public Relations Strategic Toolkit, The. . . . . . 14
Public Relations Writing Worktext. . . . . . . . . 17
Public Relations, Activism, and Social Change. . 14
Public Relations, Society & Culture . . . . . . . . 15
Publishing Law. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Pullen, Christopher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
q
Qualitative Research Methods for Media
Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Queer Representation, Visibility, and Race in
American Film and Television. . . . . . . . . . . 28
Queer Temporalities in Gay Male
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
r
Race After the Internet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Race and Ethnicity: The Basics. . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Race and Ethnicity: The Key Concepts. . . . . . 81
Race and News. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Race, Racism and Sports Journalism . . . . . . . 52
Racial Spectacles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Radical Pedagogies of Socrates and Freire. . . 11
Radio Handbook, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Radner, Hilary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 66
Ramsey, Janet E.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Rancer, Andrew S.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Rausch, Anthony. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Reacting to Reality Television. . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Read All About It!. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Reading the Popular. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Reading, Writing, and the Rhetorics of
Whiteness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Reengaging the Prospects of Rhetoric. . . . . . 11
Reese, Stephen D.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Religion, Media and Culture: A Reader. . . . . 36
Relocating Television. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Reporting Disaster on Deadline. . . . . . . . . . . 57
Reporting for Journalists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Reputation Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Research Methods for Studying Groups and
Teams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Reyman, Jessica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Reynolds, Ann. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Rhetoric of Food, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Rhetoric of Intellectual Property, The. . . . . . . 11
Rhetorical and Critical Approaches to Public
Relations II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Rhetorics, Literacies, and Narratives of
Sustainability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Rhetoric, Remembrance, and Visual Form. . . 11
Rhodes, Carl. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Richardson, Ingrid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Riello, Giorgio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Riggulsford, Myc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Ritterfeld, Ute. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Roberts, Adam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Roberts, Chris. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Rockwell, B. Hannah. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Rodgers, Shelly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Roloff, Michael. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Romano, Angela. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Romantic Comedy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Rosenberry, Jack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Roush, Chris. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Roust, Colin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Routledge Companion to Film History, The. . . . 66
Routledge Companion to News and Journalism,
The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Routledge Companion to Postmodernism,
The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Routledge Companion to Race and Ethnicity,
The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Routledge Companion to Science Fiction,
The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Routledge Companion to Semiotics, The. . . . 83
Routledge Companion to Social Theory,
The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Routledge Concise History of Science Fiction,
The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Routledge Film Music Sourcebook, The. . . . . 66
Routledge Handbook of Applied Communication
Research. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Routledge Handbook of Discourse Analysis,
The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Routledge Handbook of Emotions and Mass
Media, The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Routledge Handbook of Family
Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Routledge Handbook of Health Communication,
The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Routledge Handbook of Participatory Cultures,
The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Routledge Handbook of Social Media, The. . . . 42
Rowe, David. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 36
Rubery, Matthew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Ruben, Brent D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Rubin, Alan M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Rubin, Rebecca B.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Ruétalo, Victoria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Ruiz, W. Bryan Rommel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Runyard, Sue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Rust, Stephen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Rutter, Paul. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Ryden, Wendy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
s
Saeed, Amir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Sajed, Alina. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Salmon, Charles T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Sandoval, Marisol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Sarkar, Bhaskar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Saxton, Libby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Sayre, Shay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Scherer, Jay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Schmidt, Karl-Heinrich . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Schnurr, Stephanie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Scholz, Trebor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Science Fiction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Science Fiction Film and Television. . . . . . . . . 28
Screening Gender on Children’s Television. . . 78
Screening the Afterlife . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Screenplay Business, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Seaton, Jean. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Sebok, Bryan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Segrin, Chris. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Seibold, David. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Seidl, Monika. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Self-Mediation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Selling Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Sender, Katherine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Senft, Theresa M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Serious Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Shahaf, Sharon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Shim, Ae-Gyung. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Shoemaker, Pamela J.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 54
Show Me the Money . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Silverman, Jon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Sim, Stuart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Simons, Herbert W.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Simonson, Peter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Sinclair, John. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Siomopoulos, Anna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Situated Organization, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Situational Theory of Problem Solving. . . . . . 19
Skalski, Paul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Skeggs, Beverley. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Slapstick Comedy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Smartt, Ursula. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Smith, Bonnie G.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Smith, Greg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Smith, Jonas Heide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Smith, Matthew J.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Smith, Ronald D.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 15, 59
Socha, Thomas J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Sound Handbook, The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Sound Production. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Sound Studies Reader, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Sourcebook for Political Communication
Research. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
South Asian Cinema. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
South Asian Cinemas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Specialist Journalism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Spitzberg, Brian H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Sport Beyond Television. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Sport, Public Broadcasting, and Cultural
Citizenship. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Sports Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Sriramesh, Krishnamurthy. . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 17
St John, Burton. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Stafford, Roy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Stahl, Roger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Staiger, Janet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 26
Stamp, Glen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Stardom and the Aesthetics of Neorealism. . . . 67
Steel, John . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Steenberg, Lindsay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Steffens, Martha. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Sterling, Christopher H.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Sterne, Jonathan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Sternheimer, Karen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Stories and Social Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Storry, Mike . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Stout, Daniel A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Stout, Patricia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Strategic Conflict . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Strategic Planning for Public Relations. . . . . . 13
Strategic Social Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Straubhaar, Joe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Street, Sarah. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Street, Seán . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Strhan, Anna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Strinati, Dominic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Stringer, Rebecca . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Stromback, Jesper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Student Workbook to Accompany Crisis
Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Studying Mobile Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Sundén, Jenny . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Sundquist, Eric J.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Sveningsson, Malin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Swann, Patricia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Sypher, Beverly Davenport. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
t
Takahashi, Toshie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Tasker, Yvonne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Tay, Jinna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Taylor, James R.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Teaching Critical Thinking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Teaching Media and Communication
Studies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Techno Politics in Presidential Campaigning. . . . 9
Teletechnologies, Place, and Community. . . . 77
Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Television and New Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Television Culture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Television Handbook, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Television Personalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Television regulation and media policy in
China. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Television Studies After TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Television Studies Reader, The. . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Television Studies: The Basics. . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Television Style. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Telotte, Jay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Teo, Stephen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
That’s the Joint! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Theaker, Alison. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 15
Thompson, Ethan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Thompson, Rick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Thompson, Teresa L.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Thorson, Esther. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 57
Thussu, Daya Kishan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 33
Tibbs, Andy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Tierney, Dolores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Tosca, Susana Pajares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Toth, Elizabeth L.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Transmedia Television. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Transnational Asian Identities in Pan-Pacific
Cinemas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Transnational Migration, Media and Identity of
Asian Women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Transnational Television History. . . . . . . . . . . 85
Transparency, Public Relations and the Mass
Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Trauma and Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Trimble, Patrick Adam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Tsetsura, Katerina. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Turner, Barry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Turner, Graeme. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Turow, Joseph. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 22, 23
TV Cops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Tyner, Kathleen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Tzioumakis, Yannis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
u
Uimonen, Paula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Uncertainty, Information Management, and
Disclosure Decisions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Understanding Digital Literacies . . . . . . . . . . 42
Understanding Media and Culture in Turkey. . . 32
Companion Website
index
Understanding Popular Culture. . . . . . . . . . . 26
Understanding Video Games. . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
v
Van Every, Elizabeth J.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
van Krieken, Robert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Van Ruler, Betteke. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Vangelisti, Anita L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Vassilieva, Julia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Vaughn, Stephen L.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Veeser, Harold Aram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Verčič, Dejan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 17
Verevis, Constantine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Video Game Theory Reader 2, The . . . . . . . . 46
Video Gamers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Video Journalism for the Web. . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Videogames. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Videogames and Virtual Realities in East Asia. 45
Vincent, Jane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Vint, Sherryl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Violence, Visual Culture, and the Black Male
Body. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Virtual English. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Visual Discourses of War. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Vivian, Bradford . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Order
your
books
today...
von Scheve, Christian. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Vorderer, Peter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Vos, Timothy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Vultee, Fred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
W
Wagner, Keith B.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Wagner, Rachel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Wahl-Jorgensen, Karin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Walker, Janet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Waller, Marguerite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Wang, Georgette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Wannamaker, Annette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Wanta, Wayne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
War Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Ward, Stephen J.A.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Wartenberg, Thomas E.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Wasserman, Herman. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 39
Watkins, Liz I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Waymer, Damion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Weaver, C. Kay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Weaver, David H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Web 2.0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Wee, Valerie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Werner, Michael. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Westerns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Westerns - SPIB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
What Media Classes Really Want to Discuss. . . .25
Wheeler, Sharon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Whitaker, Charles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Whitaker, W. Richard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
White, John . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 73
Whittaker, Jason. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 58
Wierzbicki, James. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Wiley, Stephen B. Crofts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Wilken, Rowan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 77
Wilkins, Lee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Williams, Carolyn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Williams, Kevin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 54
Williams, Melanie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Willnat, Lars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 52
Witschge, Tamara. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Wolf, Mark J.P.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Wolfe, Charles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Wolfsfeld, Gadi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Women and Turkish Cinema. . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Women’s Studies: The Basics. . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Wong, Dixon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Wood, Helen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Wordplay and the Discourse of Video Games.41
World Cinemas, Transnational Perspectives. . . . 70
Writing for Broadcast Journalists. . . . . . . . . . 58
Writing for Digital Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Writing for Journalists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Wulf, Christoph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
x
Xiao, Weibing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
y
Yamamoto, Hiroyuki. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Yang, Shanhua. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Yaxley, Heather. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Yecies, Brian. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Yi, Zheng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Yosef, Raz. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
z
Zappala, Joseph M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Zelizer, Barbie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 53
Zipes, Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Please complete and return this order form to the address below:
QtyTitleISBN
Price
Your Details
– Please use block capitals.
First Name:
Surname:
Email:
Department:
Institution:
VAT No. (EU Member States):
Address:
Postcode:
Country:
Telephone:
To find out if a title is available
on complimentary exam,
please visit our website:
www.routledge.com/info/compcopy
Fax:
Signature:
Prices and publication dates are correct at time of going to press, but
may be subject to change without notice. All prices are net in the UK.
TOTAL
MEDA1113
ISBN: 978-0-418-25887-3
Date:
91
hea d ing goe s here
92
Companion Website
AS
A2
Media, Film and Communication
Ne
w
and
books from Routledge
Related Titles
AS Film Studies
2nd
Edition
Sarah Casey Benyahia, Freddie Gaffney
and John White
2008: 246x174: 414pp • Pb: 978-0-415-45433-9: £19.99
A2 Film Studies
Sarah Casey Benyahia,
Freddie Gaffney, and John White
2nd
Edition
2009: 246x174: 468pp • Pb: 978-0-415-45436-0: £19.99
Visit the Companion Website:
www.alevelfilmstudies.co.uk
AS Communication
and Culture
Peter Bennett and Jerry Slater
3rd
Edition
2008: 246x174: 340pp • Pb: 978-0-415-45512-1: £19.99
AS Media Studies
The Essential Introduction for AQA
Philip Rayner, and Peter Wall
2008: 246x174: 360pp • Pb: 978-0-415-44823-9: £19.99
A2 Media Studies
The Essential Introduction for AQA
Anthony Bateman, Peter Bennett,
Sarah Casey Benyahia, Jacqui Shirley,
and Peter Wall
2010: 246x174: 320pp • Pb: 978-0-415-83896-9: £19.99
AS Media Studies
The Essential Introduction for WJEC
Anthony Bateman, Sarah Casey Benyahia,
Claire Mortimer and Peter Wall
2011: 246x174: 320pp • Pb: 978-0-415-61334-7: £19.99
A2 Media Studies
The Essential Introduction for WJEC
Anthony Bateman, Peter Bennett,
Sarah Casey Benyahia and Peter Wall
A2 Communication
and Culture
2010: 246x174: 352pp • Pb: 978-0-415-58659-7: £19.99
Peter Bennett and Jerry Slater
2009: 246x174: 336pp • Pb: 978-0-415-47160-2: £19.99
www.routledge.com/
textbooks/a2mediastudies
www.alevelcommculture.co.uk
Request Your Complimentary Exam Copies Online Today!
www.routledge.com/media • www.routledge.com/communication
Routledge
Page 10
Page 19 Page 28 Page 30
Page 40
Page 46 Page 50 Page 51
Routledge, 2 Park Square, Milton Park, Abingdon, Oxon OX14 4RN
Tel: 020 7017 6000 • Fax: 020 7017 6699 • Email: [email protected] • [email protected]
www.routledge.com/communication
e and
Brows nline
o
order ay!
tod
Visit Routledge.com
Why Should You Try Our Website?
Improved search, product listings and product detail pages
Enhanced shopping experience, shipping options and security
New ways to browse our books; “Textbooks by Course”
online orders over £20 receive free postage & packaging in uk
Paper used in this catalogue is chlorine free and environmentally friendly. It is manufactured with pulp supplied from sustainable managed forests.

Communication and Media

Transcription

Similar documents

Residential Interventions for Children, Adolescents, and Families A

How to Create eBook Access Cards

Culture, Identity, and The Global Economy

Visual Story for Ambassadors Cinema I am going to see a film at the

Bandyke Moving Pictures

Film quiz 12 May 2011

Page 19 - Films - Magazine for the Arts

A Terrain of Legends reviewed in